US20190064038A1 - Manipulation of Cell Nuclei in a Micro-Fluidic Device - Google Patents
Manipulation of Cell Nuclei in a Micro-Fluidic Device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20190064038A1 US20190064038A1 US16/121,398 US201816121398A US2019064038A1 US 20190064038 A1 US20190064038 A1 US 20190064038A1 US 201816121398 A US201816121398 A US 201816121398A US 2019064038 A1 US2019064038 A1 US 2019064038A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- microfluidic device
- nuclei
- microfluidic
- cell
- moiety
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 210000003855 cell nucleus Anatomy 0.000 title claims abstract description 190
- 230000009919 sequestration Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 205
- 210000004940 nucleus Anatomy 0.000 claims abstract description 159
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 96
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 79
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 185
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 claims description 140
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 claims description 140
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 116
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 78
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 claims description 67
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 54
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 claims description 41
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 claims description 23
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 claims description 16
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 claims description 16
- ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorous acid Chemical compound OP(O)=O ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 14
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical group 0.000 claims description 14
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 claims description 14
- 150000001735 carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 claims description 13
- 125000003709 fluoroalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 12
- 229920002307 Dextran Polymers 0.000 claims description 11
- 125000000129 anionic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 10
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 10
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 claims description 9
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 claims description 9
- 125000005010 perfluoroalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 9
- 238000010801 machine learning Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- IIACRCGMVDHOTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N sulfamic acid group Chemical class S(N)(O)(=O)=O IIACRCGMVDHOTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 7
- 108010088751 Albumins Proteins 0.000 claims description 6
- 102000009027 Albumins Human genes 0.000 claims description 6
- LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-M Bisulfite Chemical compound OS([O-])=O LSNNMFCWUKXFEE-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000001453 quaternary ammonium group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000000837 carbohydrate group Chemical group 0.000 claims 2
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 abstract description 17
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 abstract description 14
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 abstract description 10
- 238000004720 dielectrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 128
- 108091006146 Channels Proteins 0.000 description 124
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 117
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 108
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 51
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 46
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 45
- 239000002981 blocking agent Substances 0.000 description 39
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 39
- -1 DNAse Proteins 0.000 description 38
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 35
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 29
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 25
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 description 24
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 description 24
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 24
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 23
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 21
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000001143 conditioned effect Effects 0.000 description 20
- 239000010703 silicon Chemical group 0.000 description 20
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N ether Substances CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- 229910052710 silicon Chemical group 0.000 description 19
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 18
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 18
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 17
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 17
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 17
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 16
- 108091003079 Bovine Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 16
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 16
- 229940098773 bovine serum albumin Drugs 0.000 description 15
- 201000011510 cancer Diseases 0.000 description 15
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical group 0.000 description 15
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 13
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N disiloxane Chemical class [SiH3]O[SiH3] KPUWHANPEXNPJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 12
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 12
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 12
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 11
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 10
- 229920001282 polysaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 239000005017 polysaccharide Substances 0.000 description 10
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical group [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 125000003275 alpha amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 150000004676 glycans Chemical class 0.000 description 9
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon dioxide Chemical compound O=C=O CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L Magnesium chloride Chemical compound [Mg+2].[Cl-].[Cl-] TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 8
- 229920003171 Poly (ethylene oxide) Polymers 0.000 description 8
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 8
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 8
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 8
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 8
- 125000004437 phosphorous atom Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 239000011593 sulfur Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000012491 analyte Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 7
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 230000001537 neural effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 7
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 150000001450 anions Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229920001400 block copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 150000001768 cations Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000003599 detergent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 6
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229920001983 poloxamer Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 125000004469 siloxy group Chemical group [SiH3]O* 0.000 description 6
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 125000000542 sulfonic acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 241000283707 Capra Species 0.000 description 5
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 101001092197 Homo sapiens RNA binding protein fox-1 homolog 3 Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102100035530 RNA binding protein fox-1 homolog 3 Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 5
- 125000000732 arylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 230000006037 cell lysis Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000004205 dimethyl polysiloxane Substances 0.000 description 5
- 235000013870 dimethyl polysiloxane Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 229940088598 enzyme Drugs 0.000 description 5
- MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein-5-isothiocyanate Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC(N=C=S)=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000003306 harvesting Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000011068 loading method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 125000002467 phosphate group Chemical group [H]OP(=O)(O[H])O[*] 0.000 description 5
- 229920000435 poly(dimethylsiloxane) Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 238000007740 vapor deposition Methods 0.000 description 5
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- UXVMQQNJUSDDNG-UHFFFAOYSA-L Calcium chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Cl-].[Ca+2] UXVMQQNJUSDDNG-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 4
- 206010009944 Colon cancer Diseases 0.000 description 4
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formaldehyde Chemical compound O=C WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 206010058467 Lung neoplasm malignant Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 206010038389 Renal cancer Diseases 0.000 description 4
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 201000005969 Uveal melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 125000003368 amide group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 210000005013 brain tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 239000001110 calcium chloride Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910001628 calcium chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 235000011089 carbon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 230000010261 cell growth Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000007857 degradation product Substances 0.000 description 4
- 210000003527 eukaryotic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 208000014829 head and neck neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 125000005549 heteroarylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 201000005202 lung cancer Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 208000020816 lung neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 229910001629 magnesium chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 210000002569 neuron Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- CXQXSVUQTKDNFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N octamethyltrisiloxane Chemical compound C[Si](C)(C)O[Si](C)(C)O[Si](C)(C)C CXQXSVUQTKDNFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000004987 plasma desorption mass spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229920001992 poloxamer 407 Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920000867 polyelectrolyte Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920001451 polypropylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 4
- 230000037452 priming Effects 0.000 description 4
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000005559 triazolylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 description 3
- CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetone Chemical compound CC(C)=O CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 244000157072 Hylocereus undatus Species 0.000 description 3
- 235000018481 Hylocereus undatus Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 3
- 210000001744 T-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 150000001345 alkine derivatives Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 125000005376 alkyl siloxane group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 125000002947 alkylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3] PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 210000003719 b-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000012620 biological material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000000601 blood cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 229910002092 carbon dioxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000005119 centrifugation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002759 chromosomal effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000007850 fluorescent dye Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000002538 fungal effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012252 genetic analysis Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000012010 growth Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910000449 hafnium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- WIHZLLGSGQNAGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N hafnium(4+);oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[Hf+4] WIHZLLGSGQNAGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000007791 liquid phase Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000002540 macrophage Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011325 microbead Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000877 morphologic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000000822 natural killer cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 210000000633 nuclear envelope Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000005693 optoelectronics Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000012188 paraffin wax Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920000768 polyamine Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000004528 spin coating Methods 0.000 description 3
- YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N (+)-Biotin Chemical compound N1C(=O)N[C@@H]2[C@H](CCCCC(=O)O)SC[C@@H]21 YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PEHVGBZKEYRQSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-deaza-adenine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC2=C1C=CN2 PEHVGBZKEYRQSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010000830 Acute leukaemia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010061424 Anal cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000007860 Anus Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010005003 Bladder cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000008720 Bone Marrow Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010005949 Bone cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000018084 Bone neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010006187 Breast cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000026310 Breast neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000009030 Carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010007953 Central nervous system lymphoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010008342 Cervix carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000005443 Circulating Neoplastic Cells Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 102000029816 Collagenase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108060005980 Collagenase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 208000001333 Colorectal Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000003298 DNA probe Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001712 DNA sequencing Methods 0.000 description 2
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000196324 Embryophyta Species 0.000 description 2
- 208000001976 Endocrine Gland Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010014733 Endometrial cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010014759 Endometrial neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000000461 Esophageal Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 102000010834 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010037362 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000233866 Fungi Species 0.000 description 2
- 206010018338 Glioma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000017604 Hodgkin disease Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000010747 Hodgkins lymphoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 108010003272 Hyaluronate lyase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000001974 Hyaluronidases Human genes 0.000 description 2
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000005016 Intestinal Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010061252 Intraocular melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000008839 Kidney Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000031422 Lymphocytic Chronic B-Cell Leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010052178 Lymphocytic lymphoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000032271 Malignant tumor of penis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 241000124008 Mammalia Species 0.000 description 2
- 108010052285 Membrane Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 208000003445 Mouth Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000015914 Non-Hodgkin lymphomas Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010030155 Oesophageal carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010033128 Ovarian cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010061535 Ovarian neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010061902 Pancreatic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000000821 Parathyroid Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000002471 Penile Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010034299 Penile cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000009565 Pharyngeal Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010034811 Pharyngeal cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000007913 Pituitary Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000005746 Pituitary adenoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010061538 Pituitary tumour benign Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 2
- 206010060862 Prostate cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000000236 Prostatic Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 108020004518 RNA Probes Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000003391 RNA probe Substances 0.000 description 2
- 208000015634 Rectal Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000006265 Renal cell carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000000453 Skin Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010068771 Soft tissue neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229920002125 Sokalan® Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 208000005718 Stomach Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000024313 Testicular Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010057644 Testis cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000024770 Thyroid neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000023915 Ureteral Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010046392 Ureteric cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010046431 Urethral cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010046458 Urethral neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000006105 Uterine Cervical Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000003761 Vaginal carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010047741 Vulval cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 201000005188 adrenal gland cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000024447 adrenal gland neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 2
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 201000011165 anus cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 210000003030 auditory receptor cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- IVRMZWNICZWHMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N azide group Chemical group [N-]=[N+]=[N-] IVRMZWNICZWHMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 244000052616 bacterial pathogen Species 0.000 description 2
- 238000001574 biopsy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 201000001531 bladder carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000001185 bone marrow Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 201000006491 bone marrow cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000000133 brain stem Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 235000014633 carbohydrates Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000021164 cell adhesion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000002421 cell wall Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 208000025997 central nervous system neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000010881 cervical cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002738 chelating agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N cholesterol Chemical compound C1C=C2C[C@@H](O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2 HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001684 chronic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 208000024207 chronic leukemia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000010367 cloning Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229960002424 collagenase Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 208000029742 colonic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000001010 compromised effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003750 conditioning effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013527 convolutional neural network Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 208000030381 cutaneous melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000009089 cytolysis Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000000805 cytoplasm Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009503 electrostatic coating Methods 0.000 description 2
- 201000003914 endometrial carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000001339 epidermal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 230000001973 epigenetic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000002919 epithelial cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 201000004101 esophageal cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- GGABWRGYJHJXJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethynylphosphonic acid Chemical compound OP(O)(=O)C#C GGABWRGYJHJXJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000002744 extracellular matrix Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 201000001343 fallopian tube carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001943 fluorescence-activated cell sorting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002509 fluorescent in situ hybridization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011010 flushing procedure Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004907 flux Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000002485 formyl group Chemical group [H]C(*)=O 0.000 description 2
- 244000053095 fungal pathogen Species 0.000 description 2
- 206010017758 gastric cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 2
- ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-O guanidinium Chemical class NC(N)=[NH2+] ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 2
- 201000005787 hematologic cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000024200 hematopoietic and lymphoid system neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000005260 human cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 229960002773 hyaluronidase Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000036571 hydration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000006703 hydration reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 201000002313 intestinal cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000000968 intestinal effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 201000010982 kidney cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000012987 lip and oral cavity carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 201000007270 liver cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000014018 liver neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000002826 magnetic-activated cell sorting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000029559 malignant endocrine neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000015486 malignant pancreatic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000026037 malignant tumor of neck Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000026045 malignant tumor of parathyroid gland Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000004962 mammalian cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N mercury Chemical compound [Hg] QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052753 mercury Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- QLOAVXSYZAJECW-UHFFFAOYSA-N methane;molecular fluorine Chemical compound C.FF QLOAVXSYZAJECW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000325 methylidene group Chemical group [H]C([H])=* 0.000 description 2
- 239000011859 microparticle Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002772 monosaccharides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000002757 morpholinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 210000003205 muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 210000005036 nerve Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen group Chemical group [N] QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 201000002575 ocular melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 2
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 201000002528 pancreatic cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000008443 pancreatic carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 150000003009 phosphonic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000004193 piperazinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 208000021310 pituitary gland adenoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229920000172 poly(styrenesulfonic acid) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004584 polyacrylic acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229940005642 polystyrene sulfonic acid Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000005381 potential energy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000016800 primary central nervous system lymphoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- TVDSBUOJIPERQY-UHFFFAOYSA-N prop-2-yn-1-ol Chemical compound OCC#C TVDSBUOJIPERQY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UORVCLMRJXCDCP-UHFFFAOYSA-N propynoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C#C UORVCLMRJXCDCP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 244000079416 protozoan pathogen Species 0.000 description 2
- KIDHWZJUCRJVML-UHFFFAOYSA-N putrescine Chemical compound NCCCCN KIDHWZJUCRJVML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 206010038038 rectal cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000001275 rectum cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000010174 renal carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000008672 reprogramming Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108091008146 restriction endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 201000000849 skin cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000003708 skin melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000002314 small intestine cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000001082 somatic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 2
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 2
- ATHGHQPFGPMSJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N spermidine Chemical compound NCCCCNCCCN ATHGHQPFGPMSJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PFNFFQXMRSDOHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N spermine Chemical compound NCCCNCCCCNCCCN PFNFFQXMRSDOHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 201000011549 stomach cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 150000005846 sugar alcohols Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012706 support-vector machine Methods 0.000 description 2
- 201000003120 testicular cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 201000002510 thyroid cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 201000011294 ureter cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000010570 urinary bladder carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000037965 uterine sarcoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000035899 viability Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920002554 vinyl polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 244000052613 viral pathogen Species 0.000 description 2
- 201000005102 vulva cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000004018 waxing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009736 wetting Methods 0.000 description 2
- HCHFRAXBELVCGG-JYFOCSDGSA-N (2z,3z)-2,3-bis[(4-methoxyphenyl)methylidene]butanedinitrile Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1\C=C(/C#N)\C(\C#N)=C\C1=CC=C(OC)C=C1 HCHFRAXBELVCGG-JYFOCSDGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NGNBDVOYPDDBFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2,4-di(pentan-2-yl)phenoxy]acetyl chloride Chemical compound CCCC(C)C1=CC=C(OCC(Cl)=O)C(C(C)CCC)=C1 NGNBDVOYPDDBFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 0 CC(C(C(CC1(F)F)C(**)(F)F)C1(F)F)(F)F Chemical compound CC(C(C(CC1(F)F)C(**)(F)F)C1(F)F)(F)F 0.000 description 1
- YEBDNSAPAXEUCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(F)(F)C1CC(F)(F)C(F)(F)C1C(C)(F)F Chemical compound CC(F)(F)C1CC(F)(F)C(F)(F)C1C(C)(F)F YEBDNSAPAXEUCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UJVARJNLPPEPPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCC.CCCOC Chemical compound CCC.CCCOC UJVARJNLPPEPPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FTQBNKNIGMIYQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCC.CCCOC.C[O-] Chemical compound CCC.CCCOC.C[O-] FTQBNKNIGMIYQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CXBDYQVECUFKRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCCCOC Chemical compound CCCCOC CXBDYQVECUFKRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VNKYTQGIUYNRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCCOC Chemical compound CCCOC VNKYTQGIUYNRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004215 Carbon black (E152) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000252506 Characiformes Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010077544 Chromatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008186 Collagen Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010035532 Collagen Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004127 Cytokines Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000695 Cytokines Proteins 0.000 description 1
- VVNCNSJFMMFHPL-VKHMYHEASA-N D-penicillamine Chemical group CC(C)(S)[C@@H](N)C(O)=O VVNCNSJFMMFHPL-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N D-ribofuranose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000016911 Deoxyribonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010053770 Deoxyribonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dihydrogen disulfide Chemical compound SS BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000016942 Elastin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010014258 Elastin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100034239 Emerin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- HCHFRAXBELVCGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Emerin Natural products C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1C=C(C#N)C(C#N)=CC1=CC=C(OC)C=C1 HCHFRAXBELVCGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108050001049 Extracellular proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010067306 Fibronectins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000016359 Fibronectins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108060003393 Granulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100039869 Histone H2B type F-S Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010033040 Histones Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001035372 Homo sapiens Histone H2B type F-S Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000006835 Lamins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010047294 Lamins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150106447 NUP gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150077352 NUP153 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010035916 Nuclear Matrix-Associated Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008297 Nuclear Matrix-Associated Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000007999 Nuclear Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010089610 Nuclear Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101710163270 Nuclease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150062948 Nup210 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001494479 Pecora Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010013381 Porins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000017033 Porins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101000781681 Protobothrops flavoviridis Disintegrin triflavin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000005700 Putrescine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091028664 Ribonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N Ribose Natural products OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012300 Sequence Analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108010090804 Streptavidin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920006362 Teflon® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiophosphoric acid Chemical group OP(O)(S)=O RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091023040 Transcription factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000040945 Transcription factor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010066342 Virus Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000018265 Virus Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000003158 alcohol group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002355 alkine group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000304 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-D-Furanose-Ribose Natural products OCC1OC(O)C(O)C1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000030317 anaplastic cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000004102 animal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000003242 anti bacterial agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940088710 antibiotic agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000002617 apheresis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012736 aqueous medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003125 aqueous solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013528 artificial neural network Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003050 axon Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 150000001540 azides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000852 azido group Chemical group *N=[N+]=[N-] 0.000 description 1
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960002685 biotin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000020958 biotin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011616 biotin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001246 bromo group Chemical group Br* 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001569 carbon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004113 cell culture Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003833 cell viability Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005754 cellular signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004978 chinese hamster ovary cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000012000 cholesterol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000003483 chromatin Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920001436 collagen Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011370 conductive nanoparticle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004748 cultured cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001086 cytosolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032798 delamination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001787 dendrite Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000004443 dendritic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000000432 density-gradient centrifugation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000005547 deoxyribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002637 deoxyribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000034373 developmental growth involved in morphogenesis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003745 diagnosis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003989 dielectric material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000014113 dietary fatty acids Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012154 double-distilled water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011143 downstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920002549 elastin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000000806 elastomer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000572 ellipsometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002257 embryonic structure Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 108010056197 emerin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 210000003743 erythrocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000194 fatty acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229930195729 fatty acid Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000004665 fatty acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000005262 ferroelectric liquid crystals (FLCs) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012894 fetal calf serum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000005525 fibrillarin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020002231 fibrillarin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920005570 flexible polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 102000034287 fluorescent proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091006047 fluorescent proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920002313 fluoropolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004811 fluoropolymer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012520 frozen sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000578 graft copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000003102 growth factor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001963 growth medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanidine group Chemical group NC(=N)N ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000005556 hormone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940088597 hormone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000004408 hybridoma Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229930195733 hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000002430 hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001900 immune effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 1
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000005053 lamin Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000265 leukocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000031700 light absorption Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002934 lysing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000002207 metabolite Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 1
- YACKEPLHDIMKIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylphosphonic acid Chemical compound CP(O)(O)=O YACKEPLHDIMKIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002048 multi walled nanotube Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002107 nanodisc Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002105 nanoparticle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002070 nanowire Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005615 natural polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 210000002353 nuclear lamina Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000004492 nuclear pore Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000007899 nucleic acid hybridization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002777 nucleoside Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003835 nucleoside group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 210000000287 oocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000003463 organelle Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000007800 oxidant agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002923 oximes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004091 panning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002972 pentoses Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003904 phospholipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004626 polylactic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091033319 polynucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000040430 polynucleotide Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000002157 polynucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002335 preservative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001236 prokaryotic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000002096 quantum dot Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002336 ribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002652 ribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000005060 rubber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000012239 silicon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920005573 silicon-containing polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 125000005373 siloxane group Chemical group [SiH2](O*)* 0.000 description 1
- 239000002109 single walled nanotube Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000527 sonication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940063673 spermidine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940063675 spermine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000010186 staining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004936 stimulating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012536 storage buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003467 sulfuric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920001059 synthetic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000004881 tumor cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N urethane group Chemical group NC(=O)OCC JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005019 vapor deposition process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001429 visible spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001285 xanthan gum Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000000230 xanthan gum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940082509 xanthan gum Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000010493 xanthan gum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910052724 xenon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N xenon atom Chemical compound [Xe] FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N1/00—Sampling; Preparing specimens for investigation
- G01N1/28—Preparing specimens for investigation including physical details of (bio-)chemical methods covered elsewhere, e.g. G01N33/50, C12Q
- G01N1/34—Purifying; Cleaning
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L3/00—Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
- B01L3/50—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
- B01L3/502—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
- B01L3/5027—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
- B01L3/502761—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip specially adapted for handling suspended solids or molecules independently from the bulk fluid flow, e.g. for trapping or sorting beads, for physically stretching molecules
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B03—SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS USING LIQUIDS OR USING PNEUMATIC TABLES OR JIGS; MAGNETIC OR ELECTROSTATIC SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS FROM SOLID MATERIALS OR FLUIDS; SEPARATION BY HIGH-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC FIELDS
- B03C—MAGNETIC OR ELECTROSTATIC SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS FROM SOLID MATERIALS OR FLUIDS; SEPARATION BY HIGH-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC FIELDS
- B03C5/00—Separating dispersed particles from liquids by electrostatic effect
- B03C5/005—Dielectrophoresis, i.e. dielectric particles migrating towards the region of highest field strength
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B03—SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS USING LIQUIDS OR USING PNEUMATIC TABLES OR JIGS; MAGNETIC OR ELECTROSTATIC SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS FROM SOLID MATERIALS OR FLUIDS; SEPARATION BY HIGH-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC FIELDS
- B03C—MAGNETIC OR ELECTROSTATIC SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS FROM SOLID MATERIALS OR FLUIDS; SEPARATION BY HIGH-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC FIELDS
- B03C5/00—Separating dispersed particles from liquids by electrostatic effect
- B03C5/02—Separators
- B03C5/022—Non-uniform field separators
- B03C5/026—Non-uniform field separators using open-gradient differential dielectric separation, i.e. using electrodes of special shapes for non-uniform field creation, e.g. Fluid Integrated Circuit [FIC]
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6806—Preparing nucleic acids for analysis, e.g. for polymerase chain reaction [PCR] assay
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N27/00—Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electrochemical, or magnetic means
- G01N27/26—Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electrochemical, or magnetic means by investigating electrochemical variables; by using electrolysis or electrophoresis
- G01N27/416—Systems
- G01N27/447—Systems using electrophoresis
- G01N27/44704—Details; Accessories
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N27/00—Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electrochemical, or magnetic means
- G01N27/26—Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electrochemical, or magnetic means by investigating electrochemical variables; by using electrolysis or electrophoresis
- G01N27/416—Systems
- G01N27/447—Systems using electrophoresis
- G01N27/44756—Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G01N27/44791—Microapparatus
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2200/00—Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
- B01L2200/06—Fluid handling related problems
- B01L2200/0647—Handling flowable solids, e.g. microscopic beads, cells, particles
- B01L2200/0668—Trapping microscopic beads
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2300/00—Additional constructional details
- B01L2300/08—Geometry, shape and general structure
- B01L2300/0809—Geometry, shape and general structure rectangular shaped
- B01L2300/0816—Cards, e.g. flat sample carriers usually with flow in two horizontal directions
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2300/00—Additional constructional details
- B01L2300/08—Geometry, shape and general structure
- B01L2300/0809—Geometry, shape and general structure rectangular shaped
- B01L2300/0819—Microarrays; Biochips
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2300/00—Additional constructional details
- B01L2300/08—Geometry, shape and general structure
- B01L2300/0861—Configuration of multiple channels and/or chambers in a single devices
- B01L2300/0877—Flow chambers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2400/00—Moving or stopping fluids
- B01L2400/04—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
- B01L2400/0403—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces
- B01L2400/0415—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces electrical forces, e.g. electrokinetic
- B01L2400/0424—Dielectrophoretic forces
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2400/00—Moving or stopping fluids
- B01L2400/04—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
- B01L2400/0403—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces
- B01L2400/0454—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces radiation pressure, optical tweezers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2400/00—Moving or stopping fluids
- B01L2400/04—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
- B01L2400/0403—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces
- B01L2400/0457—Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific forces passive flow or gravitation
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2400/00—Moving or stopping fluids
- B01L2400/08—Regulating or influencing the flow resistance
- B01L2400/084—Passive control of flow resistance
- B01L2400/086—Passive control of flow resistance using baffles or other fixed flow obstructions
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B03—SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS USING LIQUIDS OR USING PNEUMATIC TABLES OR JIGS; MAGNETIC OR ELECTROSTATIC SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS FROM SOLID MATERIALS OR FLUIDS; SEPARATION BY HIGH-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC FIELDS
- B03C—MAGNETIC OR ELECTROSTATIC SEPARATION OF SOLID MATERIALS FROM SOLID MATERIALS OR FLUIDS; SEPARATION BY HIGH-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC FIELDS
- B03C2201/00—Details of magnetic or electrostatic separation
- B03C2201/26—Details of magnetic or electrostatic separation for use in medical applications
Definitions
- the analysis of individual intact eukaryotic cells, or populations of isolated cells, can be hindered due to many factors, including the morphology of the cell (e.g., differentiated neurons), the source of the cell (e.g., complex tissue), or the fact that the cells have been treated with a preservative or are otherwise in a non-viable or compromised state (e.g., frozen, fixed, paraffin embedded, attached to a slide, etc.).
- a preservative or are otherwise in a non-viable or compromised state e.g., frozen, fixed, paraffin embedded, attached to a slide, etc.
- the present disclosure provides methods and systems for isolating individual nuclei derived from a cell sample (e.g., fixed or frozen samples), thereby enabling the analysis of cell phenotypes and genotypes from cell sources that were previously considered of limited value.
- a cell sample e.g., fixed or frozen samples
- the present invention relates to a method of isolating a cell nucleus.
- the method comprises flowing a medium comprising a cell nucleus into a flow region of a microfluidic device, wherein said flow region is in fluid connection with a first isolation region, and wherein said microfluidic device comprises a substrate configured to selectively generate forces that move micro-objects.
- the method further comprises moving said cell nucleus from said flow region to said first isolation region, wherein the flow of said medium in said flow region does not penetrate into said first isolation region.
- moving said cell nucleus from said flow region to said first isolation region comprises using said forces selectively generated by said substrate.
- moving said cell nucleus from said flow region to said first isolation region comprises tilting said microfluidic device such that gravity acts upon said cell nucleus and pulls it into or toward said first isolation region.
- said flow region comprises a flow channel in fluid connection with said first isolation region, and wherein flowing a medium comprising said cell nucleus comprises flowing said medium into said flow channel.
- said micro-fluidic device comprises a first sequestration pen, and wherein said first isolation region is located within said first sequestration pen.
- the method further comprises detecting a characteristic of said cell nucleus.
- detecting a characteristic of the cell nucleus is performed prior to said moving step of the method.
- said micro-fluidic device comprises a plurality of sequestration pens in fluid connection with said flow channel, each sequestration pen of said plurality having a corresponding isolation region.
- said flowing medium comprises a plurality of cell nuclei and said method further comprises moving said plurality of cell nuclei into said corresponding isolation region(s) of one or more sequestration pens of said plurality.
- the method further comprises selecting a first sub-set of cell nuclei from said plurality of cell nuclei that have a first predetermined characteristic, and moving said selected first sub-set of cell nuclei to the corresponding isolation region(s) of one or more first sequestration pens of said plurality of sequestration pens.
- the method further comprises selecting at least a second sub- set of cell nuclei from said plurality of cell nuclei that have a second predetermined characteristic, and moving said selected second sub-set of cell nuclei to the corresponding isolation region(s) of one or more second sequestration pens of said plurality of sequestration pens.
- only one cell nucleus is moved to an isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- said cell nuclei are contacted with a detectable binding agent.
- said binding agent is an antibody.
- said binding agent comprises a fluorescent label.
- moving said nuclei comprises generating dielectrophoresis (DEP) forces that attract or repel said cell nucleus.
- DEP dielectrophoresis
- the method further comprises generating said DEP forces comprises activating DEP electrodes located at the surface of said substrate.
- said DEP electrodes are optically actuated.
- said DEP electrodes are virtual electrodes.
- said DEP electrodes are phototransistors.
- said DEP electrodes is controlled by a photo-actuated transistor.
- said DEP electrodes is controlled by an electrically-actuated transistor.
- said DEP electrodes is controlled independently of the other DEP electrodes.
- the method further comprises determining a genetic characteristic of one or more of said isolated cell nuclei.
- said determining step comprises extracting nucleic acids from said one or more of said isolated cell nuclei and performing one or more genetic analysis tests on said nucleic acids.
- said genetic characteristic is selected from the group consisting of: copy number of a genetic region, a mutation, a duplication, a single nucleotide polymorphism, an insertion, an inversion, a nucleic acid modification, a chromosomal feature, a difference compared to a reference nucleic acid sample, epigenetic variation, and combinations thereof.
- said one or more of said isolated cell nuclei are exported from said micro-fluidic device prior to performing said determining step.
- the cell nuclei are derived from a eukaryotic cell selected from the group consisting of: fungi, plants, protists, and animals.
- the cell nuclei are derived from a mammal or a human.
- the cell nuclei are derived from a tissue selected from the group consisting of: epithelial cell types (e.g., neuronal cell types, epidermal cells, cochlear hair cells, or the like), mesodermal cell types (e.g., muscle, fat, bone marrow, blood, or the like), endodermal cell types (e.g., intestinal cells or the like), blood cells (e.g., B cells, T cells, NK cells, macrophages), or tissues exhibiting a disease phenotype (e.g., cancer cells, inflamed cells, cells infected with a bacterial, fungal, protozoan, or viral pathogen).
- epithelial cell types e.g., neuronal cell types, epidermal cells, cochlear hair cells, or the like
- mesodermal cell types e.g., muscle, fat, bone marrow, blood, or the like
- endodermal cell types e.g., intestinal cells or the like
- the method further comprises comprising harvesting said cell nuclei from one or more cells.
- said harvesting comprises one or more of: disrupting the cytoplasmic membrane and/or cell wall of said cell; contacting said cell nuclei with an enzyme (e.g., DNAse, collagenase, hyaluronidase); contacting said cell nuclei with a chelating agent (e.g., EDTA); and contacting said cell nuclei with one or more blocking agents (e.g., BSA, serum, polymers, detergents).
- an enzyme e.g., DNAse, collagenase, hyaluronidase
- a chelating agent e.g., EDTA
- blocking agents e.g., BSA, serum, polymers, detergents
- the cell nuclei are derived from live cells.
- the cell nuclei are derived from non-viable cells.
- said non-viable cells are cells that have been frozen and thawed.
- said non-viable cells are cells that have been chemically fixed.
- the non-viable cells are derived from a formalin fixed paraffin embedded (FFPE) sample.
- FFPE formalin fixed paraffin embedded
- the method further comprises de-waxing and rehydrating the sample.
- the cell nuclei are derived from a cancer cell.
- the cancer is selected from the group consisting of: breast cancer, large intestinal cancer, lung cancer, small lung cancer, stomach cancer, liver cancer, blood cancer, bone cancer, pancreatic cancer, skin cancer, head or neck cancer, cutaneous or intraocular melanoma, uterine sarcoma, ovarian cancer, rectal or colorectal cancer, anal cancer, colon cancer, fallopian tube carcinoma, endometrial carcinoma, cervical cancer, vulval cancer, vaginal carcinoma, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, esophageal cancer, small intestine cancer, endocrine cancer, thyroid cancer, parathyroid cancer, adrenal cancer, chronic or acute leukemia, soft tissue tumor, urethral cancer, penile cancer, prostate cancer, lymphocytic lymphoma, bladder carcinoma, kidney cancer, ureter cancer, renal carcinoma, renal pelvic carcinoma, CNS tumor, primary CNS lymphoma, bone marrow tumor, brain stem nerve gliomas, pitu
- the flow region, flow channel, isolation regions, and/or sequestration pens are pre-treated with a blocking solution to prevent or reduce nuclei adherence.
- the blocking solution comprises one or more of: serum, BSA, polymer, detergent, enzymes, or any combination thereof.
- the microfluidic device comprises a substrate surface and the blocking solution comprises a blocking agent that binds to substrate surface.
- the microfluidic device comprises a substrate surface that comprises a coating material.
- the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and an alkyl moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate.
- the alkyl moiety is a fluoroalkyl group.
- the alkyl moiety is a perfluoroalkyl group.
- the linking group is a siloxy linking group.
- the alkyl moiety comprises a linear chain of carbons comprising at least 10 carbon atoms (e.g., at least 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms).
- the molecules of the coating material form a densely-packed monolayer structure.
- the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a cationic moiety and/or an anionic moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate.
- the cationic moiety comprises a quaternary ammonium group.
- the anionic moiety comprises a phosphonic acid, carboxylic acid, or sulfonic acid.
- the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a zwitterionic moiety (e.g., capable of ionically bonding with a blocking agent).
- the zwitterionic moiety is selected from carboxybetaines, sulfobetaines, sulfamic acids, and amino acids.
- the coating material comprises a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties, saccharide moieties, or amino acid moieties.
- the coating material comprises dextran.
- the coating material comprises poly-ethylene glycol.
- the present invention relates to a method of identifying a cell nucleus associated with one or more characteristics wherein the cell nucleus is identified within a microfluidic device.
- the method further comprises repositioning said cell nucleus within the microfluidic device using dielectrophoretic force responsive to identifying that the cell nucleus is associated with a characteristic.
- the microfluidic device comprises a plurality of inner surfaces, wherein the plurality of inner surfaces have been treated with a blocking solution to prevent or reduce nuclei adherence.
- the blocking solution comprises a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties.
- the polymer comprises polyethylene glycol.
- the blocking solution comprises a polymer comprising saccharide moieties.
- the blocking solution comprises dextran.
- the blocking solution comprises a polymer comprising amino acid moieties.
- the blocking solution comprises albumin.
- the microfluidic device comprises a substrate surface that has been coated with a coating material.
- the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and an alkyl moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate surface.
- the alkyl moiety is a fluoroalkyl group.
- the alkyl moiety is a perfluoroalkyl group.
- the linking group is a siloxy linking group.
- the alkyl moiety comprises a linear chain of carbons comprising at least 10 carbon atoms (e.g., at least 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms).
- the molecules of the coating material form a densely-packed monolayer structure.
- the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a cationic moiety and/or an anionic moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate surface.
- the cationic moiety comprises a quaternary ammonium group.
- the anionic moiety comprises a phosphonic acid, carboxylic acid, or sulfonic acid.
- the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a zwitterionic moiety (: e.g., capable of ionically bonding with a blocking agent).
- the zwitterionic moiety is selected from carboxybetaines, sulfobetaines, sulfamic acids, and amino acids.
- the coating material comprises a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties, saccharide moieties, or amino acid moieties.
- the coating material comprises dextran.
- the coating material comprises poly-ethylene glycol.
- the coating material comprises albumin.
- the one or more characteristics include the morphology of the cell nuclei.
- the one or more characteristics include the cell nucleus being labelled with a detectable binding agent.
- the one or more characteristics include the intensity of the binding agent.
- the one or more characteristics are identified using a machine learning algorithm.
- the microfluidic device comprises a flow region and a first sequestration pen, and wherein repositioning the cell nucleus in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nucleus from the flow region to the first sequestration pen using dielectrophoretic force.
- the microfluidic device comprises a first sequestration pen and a second sequestration pen
- repositioning the cell nucleus in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nucleus from the first sequestration pen to the second sequestration pen using dielectrophoretic force.
- repositioning the cell nuclei in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nuclei to a portion of the microfluidic device for export using dielectrophoretic force.
- repositioning the cell nuclei in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nuclei to a portion of the microfluidic device configured for electrowetting using dielectrophoretic force.
- FIG. 1 illustrates an example of a system for use with a microfluidic device and associated control equipment according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate a microfluidic device according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIGS. 2C and 2D illustrate sequestration pens according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 2E illustrates a detailed sequestration pen according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 2F illustrates a microfluidic device according to an embodiment of the invention.
- FIG. 3A illustrates a specific example of a system for use with a microfluidic device and associated control equipment according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 3B illustrates an exemplary analog voltage divider circuit according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 3C illustrates an exemplary GUI configured to plot temperature and waveform data according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 3D illustrates an imaging device according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 3E illustrates the communications between an imaging module and a light modulating subsystem to project patterns of light according to some embodiments of the invention.
- FIGS. 4A, 4B, 4C and 4D illustrate inner surfaces of a microfluidic device and blocking agents according to various specific embodiments of the invention.
- FIG. 5 illustrates steps performed to select nuclei according to a specific embodiment of the invention.
- FIG. 6 shows an image of a sequestration pen of a microfluidic device according to the present disclosure, with a cell nucleus stained with anti-NeuN-FITC antibody under visible light (left) and fluorescent light to detect FITC (right).
- FIG. 7 shows the cell nucleus of FIG. 6 after movement using OET.
- one element e.g., a material, a layer, a substrate, etc.
- one element can be “on,” “attached to,” “connected to,” or “coupled to” another element regardless of whether the one element is directly on, attached to, connected to, or coupled to the other element or there are one or more intervening elements between the one element and the other element.
- elements e.g., elements a, b, c
- such reference is intended to include any one of the listed elements by itself, any combination of less than all of the listed elements, and/or a combination of all of the listed elements.
- substantially means sufficient to work for the intended purpose.
- the term “substantially” thus allows for minor, insignificant variations from an absolute or perfect state, dimension, measurement, result, or the like such as would be expected by a person of ordinary skill in the field but that do not appreciably affect overall performance.
- substantially means within ten percent.
- the term “ones” means more than one.
- the term “plurality” can be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more.
- a “microfluidic device” or “microfluidic apparatus” is a device that includes one or more discrete microfluidic circuits configured to hold a fluid, each microfluidic circuit comprised of fluidically interconnected circuit elements, including but not limited to region(s), flow path(s), channel(s), chamber(s), and/or pen(s), and at least two ports configured to allow the fluid (and, optionally, micro-objects suspended in the fluid) to flow into and/or out of the microfluidic device.
- a microfluidic circuit of a microfluidic device will include at least one microfluidic channel and at least one chamber, and will hold a volume of fluid of less than about 1 mL, e.g., less than about 750, 500, 250, 200, 150, 100, 75, 50, 25, 20, 15, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 ⁇ L.
- the microfluidic circuit holds about 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 2-5, 2-8, 2-10, 2-12, 2-15, 2-20, 5-20, 5-30, 5-40, 5-50, 10-50, 10-75, 10-100, 20-100, 20-150, 20-200, 50-200, 50-250, or 50-300 ⁇ L.
- a “nanofluidic device” or “nanofluidic apparatus” is a type of microfluidic device having a microfluidic circuit that contains at least one circuit element configured to hold a volume of fluid of less than about 1 ⁇ L, e.g., less than about 750, 500, 250, 200, 150, 100, 75, 50, 25, 20, 15, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 nL or less.
- a nanofluidic device will comprise a plurality of circuit elements (e.g., at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10,000, or more).
- circuit elements e.g., at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10,000, or more).
- one or more (e.g., all) of the at least one circuit elements is configured to hold a volume of fluid of about 100 pL to 1 nL, 100 pL to 2 nL, 100 pL to 5 nL, 250 pL to 2 nL, 250 pL to 5 nL, 250 pL to 10 nL, 500 pL to 5 nL, 500 pL to 10 nL, 500 pL to 15 nL, 750 pL to 10 nL, 750 pL to 15 nL, 750 pL to 20 nL, 1 to 10 nL, 1 to 15 nL, 1 to 20 nL, 1 to 25 nL, or 1 to 50 nL.
- one or more (e.g., all) of the at least one circuit elements is configured to hold a volume of fluid of about 100 to 200 nL, 100 to 300 nL, 100 to 400 nL, 100 to 500 nL, 200 to 300 nL, 200 to 400 nL, 200 to 500 nL, 200 to 600 nL, 200 to 700 nL, 250 to 400 nL, 250 to 500 nL, 250 to 600 nL, or 250 to 750 nL.
- a “microfluidic channel” or “flow channel” as used herein refers to flow region of a microfluidic device having a length that is significantly longer than both the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
- the flow channel can be at least 5 times the length of either the horizontal or vertical dimension, e.g., at least 10 times the length, at least 25 times the length, at least 100 times the length, at least 200 times the length, at least 300 times the length, at least 400 times the length, at least 500 times the length, or longer.
- the length of a flow channel is in the range of from about 20,000 microns to about 100,000 microns, including any range therebetween.
- the horizontal dimension is in the range of from about 100 microns to about 1000 microns (e.g., about 150 to about 500 microns) and the vertical dimension is in the range of from about 25 microns to about 200 microns, e.g., from about 40 to about 150 microns.
- a flow channel may have a variety of different spatial configurations in a microfluidic device, and thus is not restricted to a perfectly linear element.
- a flow channel may be, or include one or more sections having, the following configurations: curve, bend, spiral, incline, decline, fork (e.g., multiple different flow paths), and any combination thereof.
- a flow channel may have different cross-sectional areas along its path, widening and constricting to provide a desired fluid flow therein.
- the term “obstruction” refers generally to a bump or similar type of structure that is sufficiently large so as to partially (but not completely) impede movement of target micro-objects between two different regions or circuit elements in a microfluidic device.
- the two different regions/circuit elements can be, for example, a microfluidic sequestration pen and a microfluidic channel, or a connection region and an isolation region of a microfluidic sequestration pen.
- constriction refers generally to a narrowing of a width of a circuit element (or an interface between two circuit elements) in a microfluidic device.
- the constriction can be located, for example, at the interface between a microfluidic sequestration pen and a microfluidic channel, or at the interface between an isolation region and a connection region of a microfluidic sequestration pen.
- transparent refers to a material which allows visible light to pass through without substantially altering the light as is passes through.
- micro-object refers generally to any microscopic object that may be isolated and collected in accordance with the present invention.
- micro-objects include: inanimate micro-objects such as microparticles; microbeads (e.g., polystyrene beads, LuminexTM beads, or the like); magnetic beads; microrods; microwires; quantum dots, and the like; biological micro-objects such as cells (e.g., embryos, oocytes, sperm cells, cells dissociated from a tissue, eukaryotic cells, protist cells, animal cells, mammalian cells, human cells, immunological cells including but not limited to T cells, B cells, Natural Killer Cells, Macrophages, Dendritic Cells and the like, hybridomas, cultured cells, cells from a cell line, cancer cells including but not limited to circulating tumor cells, infected cells, transfected and/or transformed cells including but not limited to CHO cells, reporter cells, prok
- vesicles, or complexes e.g., synthetic or derived from membrane preparations
- liposomes e.g., synthetic or derived from membrane preparations
- lipid nanorafts as described in Ritchie et al. (2009) “Reconstitution of Membrane Proteins in Phospholipid Bilayer Nanodiscs,” Methods Enzymol., 464:211-231), and the like; or a combination of inanimate micro-objects and biological micro-objects (e.g., microbeads attached to cells, liposome-coated micro-beads, liposome-coated magnetic beads, or the like).
- Beads may further have other moieties/molecules covalently or non-covalently attached, such as fluorescent labels, proteins, small molecule signaling moieties, antigens, or chemical/biological species capable of use in an assay.
- maintaining (a) cell(s) refers to providing an environment comprising both fluidic and gaseous components and, optionally a surface, that provides the conditions necessary to keep the cells viable and/or expanding.
- a “component” of a fluidic medium is any chemical or biochemical molecule present in the medium, including solvent molecules, ions, small molecules, antibiotics, nucleotides and nucleosides, nucleic acids, amino acids, peptides, proteins, sugars, carbohydrates, lipids, fatty acids, cholesterol, metabolites, or the like.
- diffuse and “diffusion” refer to thermodynamic movement of a component of fluidic medium down a concentration gradient.
- flow of a medium means bulk movement of a fluidic medium primarily due to any mechanism other than diffusion.
- flow of a medium can involve movement of the fluidic medium from one point to another point due to a pressure differential between the points.
- Such flow can include a continuous, pulsed, periodic, random, intermittent, or reciprocating flow of the liquid, or any combination thereof.
- substantially no flow refers to a rate of flow of a fluidic medium that, averaged over time, is less than the rate of diffusion of components of a material (e.g., an analyte of interest) into or within the fluidic medium.
- a material e.g., an analyte of interest
- the rate of diffusion of components of such a material can depend on, for example, temperature, the size of the components, and the strength of interactions between the components and the fluidic medium.
- fluidically connected means that, when the different regions are substantially filled with fluid, such as fluidic media, the fluid in each of the regions is connected so as to form a single body of fluid. This does not mean that the fluids (or fluidic media) in the different regions are necessarily identical in composition. Rather, the fluids in different fluidically connected regions of a microfluidic device can have different compositions (e.g., different concentrations of solutes, such as proteins, carbohydrates, ions, or other molecules) which are in flux as solutes move down their respective concentration gradients and/or fluids flow through the device.
- solutes such as proteins, carbohydrates, ions, or other molecules
- a microfluidic (or nanofluidic) device can comprise “swept” regions and “unswept” regions.
- a “swept” region is comprised of one or more fluidically interconnected circuit elements of a microfluidic circuit, each of which experiences a flow of medium when fluid is flowing through the microfluidic circuit.
- the circuit elements of a swept region can include, for example, regions, channels, and all or parts of chambers.
- an “unswept” region is comprised of one or more fluidically interconnected circuit element of a microfluidic circuit, each of which experiences substantially no flux of fluid when fluid is flowing through the microfluidic circuit.
- An unswept region can be fluidically connected to a swept region, provided the fluidic connections are structured to enable diffusion but substantially no flow of media between the swept region and the unswept region.
- the microfluidic device can thus be structured to substantially isolate an unswept region from a flow of medium in a swept region, while enabling substantially only diffusive fluidic communication between the swept region and the unswept region.
- a flow channel of a micro-fluidic device is an example of a swept region while an isolation region (described in further detail below) of a microfluidic device is an example of an unswept region.
- a “flow path” refers to one or more fluidically connected circuit elements (e.g. channel(s), region(s), chamber(s) and the like) that define, and are subject to, the trajectory of a flow of medium.
- a flow path is thus an example of a swept region of a microfluidic device.
- Other circuit elements e.g., unswept regions
- sample material comprising biological micro-objects (e.g., cells) to be assayed for production of an analyte of interest can be loaded into a swept region of the microfluidic device.
- biological micro-objects e.g., mammalian cells, such as human cells
- Ones of the biological micro-objects e.g., mammalian cells, such as human cells
- the remaining sample material can then be flowed out of the swept region and an assay material flowed into the swept region.
- the selected biological micro-objects are not substantially affected by the flowing out of the remaining sample material or the flowing in of the assay material.
- the selected biological micro-objects can be allowed to produce the analyte of interest, which can diffuse from the unswept regions into the swept region, where the analyte of interest can react with the assay material to produce localized detectable reactions, each of which can be correlated to a particular unswept region. Any unswept region associated with a detected reaction can be analyzed to determine which, if any, of the biological micro-objects in the unswept region are sufficient producers of the analyte of interest.
- FIG. 1 illustrates an example of a system 150 which can be used to control a microfluidic device 100 (e.g. a microfluidic device of the present invention) in the practice of the present invention.
- a perspective view of the microfluidic device 100 is shown having a partial cut-away of its cover 110 to provide a partial view into the microfluidic device 100 .
- the microfluidic device 100 generally comprises a microfluidic circuit 120 comprising a flow path 106 through which a fluidic medium 180 can flow, optionally carrying one or more micro-objects (not shown) into and/or through the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- a single microfluidic circuit 120 is illustrated in FIG.
- suitable microfluidic devices can include a plurality (e.g., 2 or 3) of such microfluidic circuits.
- the microfluidic device 100 can be configured to be a nanofluidic device.
- the microfluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality of microfluidic sequestration pens 124 , 126 , 128 , and 130 , each having one or more openings in fluidic communication with flow path 106 .
- the microfluidic sequestration pens comprise various features and structures that have been optimized for retaining micro-objects in the microfluidic device, such as microfluidic device 100 , even when a medium 180 is flowing through the flow path 106 .
- the microfluidic circuit 120 is defined by an enclosure 102 .
- the enclosure 102 can be physically structured in different configurations, in the example shown in FIG. 1 the enclosure 102 is depicted as comprising a support structure 104 (e.g., a base), a microfluidic circuit structure 108 , and a cover 110 .
- the support structure 104 , microfluidic circuit structure 108 , and cover 110 can be attached to each other.
- the microfluidic circuit structure 108 can be disposed on an inner surface 109 of the support structure 104
- the cover 110 can be disposed over the microfluidic circuit structure 108 .
- the microfluidic circuit structure 108 can define the elements of the microfluidic circuit 120 and the enclosure 102 .
- the height of the enclosure 102 i.e. the distance from the cover 110 to the support structure 104
- the height of the enclosure 102 will range from 30-50 microns.
- the support structure 104 can be at the bottom and the cover 110 at the top of the microfluidic circuit 120 as illustrated in FIG. 1 .
- the support structure 104 and the cover 110 can be configured in other orientations.
- the support structure 104 can be at the top and the cover 110 at the bottom of the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- a passage include a valve, a gate, a pass-through hole, or the like.
- port 107 is a pass-through hole created by a gap in the microfluidic circuit structure 108 .
- the port 107 can be situated in other components of the enclosure 102 , such as the cover 110 .
- the microfluidic circuit 120 can have two or more ports 107 .
- Whether a port 107 function as an inlet or an outlet can depend upon the direction that fluid flows through flow path 106 .
- the support structure 104 can comprise one or more electrodes (not shown) and a substrate or a plurality of interconnected substrates.
- the support structure 104 can comprise one or more semiconductor substrates, each of which is electrically connected to an electrode (e.g., all or a subset of the semiconductor substrates can be electrically connected to a single electrode).
- the support structure 104 can further comprise a printed circuit board assembly (“PCBA”).
- PCBA printed circuit board assembly
- the semiconductor substrate(s) can be mounted on a PCBA.
- the microfluidic circuit structure 108 can define circuit elements (e.g. chambers, sequestration pens and channels) of the microfluidic circuit 120 . Such circuit elements can comprise spaces or regions that can be fluidly interconnected when microfluidic circuit 120 is filled with fluid, such as flow channels, chambers, pens, traps, and the like.
- the microfluidic circuit structure 108 comprises a frame 114 and a microfluidic circuit material 116 .
- the frame 114 can partially or completely enclose the microfluidic circuit material 116 .
- the frame 114 can be, for example, a relatively rigid structure substantially surrounding the microfluidic circuit material 116 .
- the frame 114 can comprise a metal material.
- the microfluidic circuit material 116 can be patterned with cavities or the like to define circuit elements and interconnections of the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- the microfluidic circuit material 116 can comprise a flexible material, such as a flexible polymer (e.g. rubber, plastic, elastomer, silicone, organosilicone, such as polydimethylsiloxane (“PDMS”), or the like), which can be gas permeable.
- PDMS polydimethylsiloxane
- Other examples of materials that can compose microfluidic circuit material 116 include molded glass, a patternable material such as a silicone polymer (e.g. photo- patternable silicone or “PPS”), photo-resist (e.g., an expoxy-based photo-resist such as SU8), or the like.
- microfluidic circuit material 116 can be rigid and/or substantially impermeable to gas. Regardless, microfluidic circuit material 116 can be disposed on the support structure 104 and inside the frame 114 .
- the cover 110 can be an integral part of the frame 114 and/or the microfluidic circuit material 116 .
- the cover 110 can be a structurally distinct element, as illustrated in FIG. 1 .
- the cover 110 can comprise the same or different materials than the frame 114 and/or the microfluidic circuit material 116 .
- the support structure 104 can be a separate structure from the frame 114 or microfluidic circuit material 116 as illustrated, or an integral part of the frame 114 or microfluidic circuit material 116 .
- the frame 114 and microfluidic circuit material 116 can be separate structures as shown in FIG. 1 or integral portions of the same structure.
- the cover 110 can comprise a rigid material.
- the rigid material may be glass or a material with similar properties.
- the cover 110 can comprise a deformable material.
- the deformable material can be a polymer, such as PDMS.
- the cover 110 can comprise both rigid and deformable materials.
- one or more portions of cover 110 e.g., one or more portions positioned over sequestration pens 124 , 126 , 128 , 130
- the cover 110 can further include one or more electrodes.
- the one or more electrodes can comprise a conductive oxide, such as indium-tin-oxide (ITO), which may be coated on glass or a similarly insulating material.
- the one or more electrodes can be flexible electrodes, such as single-walled nanotubes, multi-walled nanotubes, nanowires, clusters of electrically conductive nanoparticles, or combinations thereof, embedded in a deformable material, such as a polymer (e.g., PDMS).
- a conductive oxide such as indium-tin-oxide (ITO)
- ITO indium-tin-oxide
- the one or more electrodes can be flexible electrodes, such as single-walled nanotubes, multi-walled nanotubes, nanowires, clusters of electrically conductive nanoparticles, or combinations thereof, embedded in a deformable material, such as a polymer (e.g., PDMS).
- a polymer e.g., polymer
- the cover 110 can be modified (e.g., by conditioning all or part of a surface that faces inward toward the microfluidic circuit 120 ) to support cell adhesion, viability and/or growth.
- the modification may include a coating of a synthetic or natural polymer.
- the cover 110 and/or the support structure 104 can be transparent to light.
- the cover 110 may also include at least one material that is gas permeable (e.g., PDMS or PPS).
- FIG. 1 also shows a system 150 for operating and controlling microfluidic devices, such as microfluidic device 100 .
- System 150 includes an electrical power source 192 , an imaging device 194 , and a tilting device 190 .
- the electrical power source 192 can provide electric power to the microfluidic device 100 and/or tilting device 190 , providing biasing voltages or currents as needed.
- the electrical power source 192 can, for example, comprise one or more alternating current (AC) and/or direct current (DC) voltage or current sources.
- the imaging device 194 can comprise a device, such as a digital camera, for capturing images inside microfluidic circuit 120 . In some instances, the imaging device 194 further comprises a detector having a fast frame rate and/or high sensitivity (e.g. for low light applications).
- the imaging device 194 can also include a mechanism for directing stimulating radiation and/or light beams into the microfluidic circuit 120 and collecting radiation and/or light beams reflected or emitted from the microfluidic circuit 120 (or micro-objects contained therein).
- the emitted light beams may be in the visible spectrum and may, e.g., include fluorescent emissions.
- the reflected light beams may include reflected emissions originating from an LED or a wide spectrum lamp, such as a mercury lamp (e.g. a high pressure mercury lamp) or a Xenon arc lamp.
- the imaging device 194 may further include a microscope (or an optical train), which may or may not include an eyepiece.
- System 150 further comprises a tilting device 190 configured to rotate a microfluidic device 100 about one or more axes of rotation.
- the tilting device 190 is configured to support and/or hold the enclosure 102 comprising the microfluidic circuit 120 about at least one axis such that the microfluidic device 100 (and thus the microfluidic circuit 120 ) can be held in a level orientation (i.e. at 0° relative to x- and y-axes), a vertical orientation (i.e. at 90° relative to the x-axis and/or the y-axis), or any orientation therebetween.
- a level orientation i.e. at 0° relative to x- and y-axes
- a vertical orientation i.e. at 90° relative to the x-axis and/or the y-axis
- the orientation of the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120 ) relative to an axis is referred to herein as the “tilt” of the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120 ).
- the tilting device 190 can tilt the microfluidic device 100 at 0.1°, 0.2°, 0.3°, 0.4°, 0.5°, 0.6°, 0.7°, 0.8°, 0.9°, 1°, 2°, 3°, 4°, 5°, 10°, 15°, 20°, 25°, 30°, 35°, 40°, 45°, 50°, 55°, 60°, 65°, 70°, 75°, 80°, 90° relative to the x-axis or any degree therebetween.
- the level orientation (and thus the x- and y-axes) is defined as normal to a vertical axis defined by the force of gravity.
- the tilting device can also tilt the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120 ) to any degree greater than 90° relative to the x-axis and/or y-axis, or tilt the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120 ) 180° relative to the x-axis or the y-axis in order to fully invert the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120 ).
- the tilting device 190 tilts the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120 ) about an axis of rotation defined by flow path 106 or some other portion of microfluidic circuit 120 .
- the microfluidic device 100 is tilted into a vertical orientation such that the flow path 106 is positioned above or below one or more sequestration pens.
- the term “above” as used herein denotes that the flow path 106 is positioned higher than the one or more sequestration pens on a vertical axis defined by the force of gravity (i.e. an object in a sequestration pen above a flow path 106 would have a higher gravitational potential energy than an object in the flow path).
- the term “below” as used herein denotes that the flow path 106 is positioned lower than the one or more sequestration pens on a vertical axis defined by the force of gravity (i.e. an object in a sequestration pen below a flow path 106 would have a lower gravitational potential energy than an object in the flow path).
- the tilting device 190 tilts the microfluidic device 100 about an axis that is parallel to the flow path 106. Moreover, the microfluidic device 100 can be tilted to an angle of less than 90° such that the flow path 106 is located above or below one or more sequestration pens without being located directly above or below the sequestration pens. In other instances, the tilting device 190 tilts the microfluidic device 100 about an axis perpendicular to the flow path 106 . In still other instances, the tilting device 190 tilts the microfluidic device 100 about an axis that is neither parallel nor perpendicular to the flow path 106 .
- the System 150 can further include a media source 178 .
- the media source 178 e.g., a container, reservoir, or the like
- the media source 178 can comprise multiple sections or containers, each for holding a different fluidic medium 180 .
- the media source 178 can be a device that is outside of and separate from the microfluidic device 100 , as illustrated in FIG. 1 .
- the media source 178 can be located in whole or in part inside the enclosure 102 of the microfluidic device 100 .
- the media source 178 can comprise reservoirs that are part of the microfluidic device 100 .
- FIG. 1 also illustrates simplified block diagram depictions of examples of control and monitoring equipment 152 that constitute part of system 150 and can be utilized in conjunction with a microfluidic device 100 .
- control and monitoring equipment 152 include a master controller 154 comprising a media module 160 for controlling the media source 178 , a motive module 162 for controlling movement and/or selection of micro-objects (not shown) and/or medium (e.g., droplets of medium) in the microfluidic circuit 120 , an imaging module 164 for controlling an imaging device 194 (e.g., a camera, microscope, light source or any combination thereof) for capturing images (e.g., digital images), and a tilting module 166 for controlling a tilting device 190 .
- the control equipment 152 can also include other modules 168 for controlling, monitoring, or performing other functions with respect to the microfluidic device 100 .
- the equipment 152 can further include a display device 170 and an input/output device 172 .
- the master controller 154 can comprise a control module 156 and a digital memory 158 .
- the control module 156 can comprise, for example, a digital processor configured to operate in accordance with machine executable instructions (e.g., software, firmware, source code, or the like) stored as non-transitory data or signals in the memory 158 .
- the control module 156 can comprise hardwired digital circuitry and/or analog circuitry.
- the media module 160 , motive module 162 , imaging module 164 , tilting module 166 , and/or other modules 168 can be similarly configured.
- functions, processes acts, actions, or steps of a process discussed herein as being performed with respect to the microfluidic device 100 or any other microfluidic apparatus can be performed by any one or more of the master controller 154 , media module 160 , motive module 162 , imaging module 164 , tilting module 166 , and/or other modules 168 configured as discussed above.
- the master controller 154 , media module 160 , motive module 162 , imaging module 164 , tilting module 166 , and/or other modules 168 may be communicatively coupled to transmit and receive data used in any function, process, act, action or step discussed herein.
- the media module 160 controls the media source 178 .
- the media module 160 can control the media source 178 to input a selected fluidic medium 180 into the enclosure 102 (e.g., through an inlet port 107 ).
- the media module 160 can also control removal of media from the enclosure 102 (e.g., through an outlet port (not shown)).
- One or more media can thus be selectively input into and removed from the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- the media module 160 can also control the flow of fluidic medium 180 in the flow path 106 inside the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- media module 160 stops the flow of media 180 in the flow path 106 and through the enclosure 102 prior to the tilting module 166 causing the tilting device 190 to tilt the microfluidic device 100 to a desired angle of incline.
- the motive module 162 can be configured to control selection, trapping, and movement of micro-objects (not shown) in the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- the enclosure 102 can comprise a dielectrophoresis (DEP), optoelectronic tweezers (OET) and/or opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration (not shown in FIG. 1 ), and the motive module 162 can control the activation of electrodes and/or transistors (e.g., phototransistors) to select and move micro-objects (not shown) and/or droplets of medium (not shown) in the flow path 106 and/or sequestration pens 124 , 126 , 128 , 130 .
- DEP dielectrophoresis
- OET optoelectronic tweezers
- OEW opto-electrowetting
- the imaging module 164 can control the imaging device 194 .
- the imaging modole 164 can receive and process image data from the imaging device 194 .
- Image data from the imaging device 194 can comprise any type of information captured by the imaging device 194 (e.g., the presence or absence of micro-objects, droplets of medium, accumulation of label, such as fluorescent label, etc.).
- the imaging modole 164 can further calculate the position of objects (e.g., micro-objects, droplets of medium) and/or the rate of motion of such objects within the microfluidic device 100.
- the tilting module 166 can control the tilting motions of tilting device 190 . Alternatively, or in addition, the tilting module 166 can control the tilting rate and timing to optimize transfer of micro-objects to the one or more sequestration pens via gravitational forces.
- the tilting module 166 is communicatively coupled with the imaging modole 164 to receive data describing the motion of micro-objects and/or droplets of medium in the microfluidic circuit 120 . Using this data, the tilting module 166 may adjust the tilt of the microfluidic circuit 120 in order to adjust the rate at which micro-objects and/or droplets of medium move in the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- the tilting module 166 may also use this data to iteratively adjust the position of a micro-object and/or droplet of medium in the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- the microfluidic circuit 120 is illustrated as comprising a microfluidic channel 122 and sequestration pens 124 , 126 , 128 , 130 .
- Each pen comprises an opening to channel 122 , but otherwise is enclosed such that the pens can substantially isolate micro-objects inside the pen from fluidic medium 180 and/or micro-objects in the flow path 106 of channel 122 or in other pens.
- pens 124 , 126 , 128 , 130 are configured to physically corral one or more micro-objects within the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- Sequestration pens in accordance with the present invention can comprise various shapes, surfaces and features that are optimized for use with DEP, OET, OEW, and/or gravitational forces, as will be discussed and shown in detail below.
- the microfluidic circuit 120 may comprise any number of microfluidic sequestration pens. Although five sequestration pens are shown, microfluidic circuit 120 may have fewer or more sequestration pens. In some embodiments, the microfluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality of identical microfluidic sequestration pens. In some embodiments, the microfluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality of microfluidic sequestration pens, wherein two or more of the sequestration pens comprise differing structures and/or features.
- a single channel 122 and flow path 106 is shown.
- the microfluidic circuit 120 further comprises an inlet valve or port 107 in fluid communication with the flow path 106 and fluidic medium 180 , whereby fluidic medium 180 can access channel 122 via the inlet port 107 .
- the flow path 106 comprises a single path.
- the single path is arranged in a zigzag pattern whereby the flow path 106 travels across the microfluidic device 100 two or more times in alternating directions.
- microfluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality of parallel channels 122 and flow paths 106 , wherein the fluidic medium 180 within each flow path 106 flows in the same direction. In some instances, the fluidic medium within each flow path 106 flows in at least one of a forward or reverse direction. In some instances, a plurality of sequestration pens are configured (e.g., relative to a channel 122 ) such that they can be loaded with target micro-objects in parallel.
- microfluidic circuit 120 further comprises one or more micro-object traps 132 .
- the traps 132 are generally formed in a wall forming the boundary of a channel 122 , and may be positioned opposite an opening of one or more of the microfluidic sequestration pens 124 , 126 , 128 , 130 .
- the traps 132 are configured to receive or capture a single micro-object from the flow path 106 .
- the traps 132 are configured to receive or capture a plurality of micro-objects from the flow path 106 .
- the traps 132 comprise a volume approximately equal to the volume of a single target micro-object.
- the traps 132 may further comprise an opening which is configured to assist the flow of targeted micro-objects into the traps 132 .
- the traps 132 comprise an opening having a height and width that is approximately equal to the dimensions of a single target micro-object, whereby larger micro-objects are prevented from entering into the micro-object trap.
- the traps 132 may further comprise other features configured to assist in retention of targeted micro-objects within the trap 132 .
- the trap 132 is aligned with and situated on the opposite side of a channel 122 relative to the opening of a microfluidic sequestration pen, such that upon tilting the microfluidic device 100 about an axis parallel to the channel 122 , the trapped micro-object exits the trap 132 at a trajectory that causes the micro-object to fall into the opening of the sequestration pen.
- the trap 132 comprises a side passage 134 that is smaller than the target micro-object in order to facilitate flow through the trap 132 and thereby increase the likelihood of capturing a micro-object in the trap 132 .
- DEP forces are applied across the fluidic medium 180 (e.g., in the flow path and/or in the sequestration pens) via one or more electrodes (not shown) to manipulate, transport, separate and sort micro-objects located therein.
- DEP forces are applied to one or more portions of a microfluidic circuit 120 in order to transfer a single micro-object from the flow path 106 into a desired microfluidic sequestration pen.
- DEP forces are used to prevent a micro-object within a sequestration pen (e.g., sequestration pen 124 , 126 , 128 , or 130 ) from being displaced therefrom.
- DEP forces are used to selectively remove a micro-object from a sequestration pen that was previously collected in accordance with the teachings of the instant invention.
- the DEP forces comprise optoelectronic tweezer (OET) forces.
- optoelectrowetting (OEW) forces are applied to one or more positions in the support structure 104 (and/or the cover 110 ) of the microfluidic device 100 (e.g., positions helping to define the flow path and/or the sequestration pens) via one or more electrodes (not shown) to manipulate, transport, separate and sort droplets located in the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- OEW forces are applied to one or more positions in the support structure 104 (and/or the cover 110 ) in order to transfer a single droplet from the flow path 106 into a desired microfluidic sequestration pen.
- OEW forces are used to prevent a droplet within a sequestration pen (e.g., sequestration pen 124 , 126 , 128 , or 130 ) from being displaced therefrom. Further, in some embodiments, OEW forces are used to selectively remove a droplet from a sequestration pen that was previously collected in accordance with the teachings of the instant invention.
- a sequestration pen e.g., sequestration pen 124 , 126 , 128 , or 130
- OEW forces are used to selectively remove a droplet from a sequestration pen that was previously collected in accordance with the teachings of the instant invention.
- DEP and/or OEW forces are combined with other forces, such as flow and/or gravitational force, so as to manipulate, transport, separate and sort micro-objects and/or droplets within the microfluidic circuit 120 .
- the enclosure 102 can be tilted (e.g., by tilting device 190 ) to position the flow path 106 and micro-objects located therein above the microfluidic sequestration pens, and the force of gravity can transport the micro-objects and/or droplets into the pens.
- the DEP and/or OEW forces can be applied prior to the other forces.
- the DEP and/or OEW forces can be applied after the other forces.
- the DEP and/or OEW forces can be applied at the same time as the other forces or in an alternating manner with the other forces.
- FIGS. 2A-2F illustrates various embodiments of microfluidic devices that can be used in the practice of the present invention.
- FIG. 2A depicts an embodiment in which the microfluidic device 200 is configured as an optically-actuated electrokinetic device.
- a variety of optically-actuated electrokinetic devices are known in the art, including devices having an optoelectronic tweezer (OET) configuration and devices having an opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration. Examples of suitable OET configurations are illustrated in the following U.S. patent documents, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety: U.S. Pat. No. RE 44,711 (Wu et al.) (originally issued as U.S. Pat. No.
- the control and monitoring equipment of the system can comprise a motive module for selecting and moving objects, such as micro-objects or droplets, in the microfluidic circuit of a microfluidic device.
- the microfluidic device can have a variety of motive configurations, depending upon the type of object being moved and other considerations. For example, a dielectrophoresis (DEP) configuration can be utilized to select and move micro-objects in the microfluidic circuit.
- DEP dielectrophoresis
- the support structure 104 and/or cover 110 of the microfluidic device 100 can comprise a DEP configuration for selectively inducing DEP forces on micro-objects in a fluidic medium 180 in the microfluidic circuit 120 and thereby select, capture, and/or move individual micro-objects or groups of micro-objects.
- the support structure 104 and/or cover 110 of the microfluidic device 100 can comprise an electrowetting (EW) configuration for selectively inducing EW forces on droplets in a fluidic medium 180 in the microfluidic circuit 120 and thereby select, capture, and/or move individual droplets or groups of droplets.
- EW electrowetting
- FIGS. 2A and 2B show a side cross-sectional view and a top cross-sectional view, respectively, of a portion of an enclosure 102 of the microfluidic device 200 having an open region/chamber 202 , it should be understood that the region/chamber 202 may be part of a fluidic circuit element having a more detailed structure, such as a growth chamber, a sequestration pen, a flow region, or a flow channel. Furthermore, the microfluidic device 200 may include other fluidic circuit elements.
- the microfluidic device 200 can include a plurality of growth chambers or sequestration pens and/or one or more flow regions or flow channels, such as those described herein with respect to microfluidic device 100 .
- a DEP configuration may be incorporated into any such fluidic circuit elements of the microfluidic device 200 , or select portions thereof. It should be further appreciated that any of the above or below described microfluidic device components and system components may be incorporated in and/or used in combination with the microfluidic device 200 .
- system 150 including control and monitoring equipment 152 , described above, may be used with microfluidic device 200 , including one or more of the media module 160 , motive module 162 , imaging module 164 , tilting module 166 , and other modules 168 .
- the microfluidic device 200 includes a support structure 104 having a bottom electrode 204 and an electrode activation substrate 206 overlying the bottom electrode 204 , and a cover 110 having a top electrode 210 , with the top electrode 210 spaced apart from the bottom electrode 204 .
- the top electrode 210 and the electrode activation substrate 206 define opposing surfaces of the region/chamber 202 .
- a medium 180 contained in the region/chamber 202 thus provides a resistive connection between the top electrode 210 and the electrode activation substrate 206 .
- a power source 212 configured to be connected to the bottom electrode 204 and the top electrode 210 and create a biasing voltage between the electrodes, as required for the generation of DEP forces in the region/chamber 202 , is also shown.
- the power source 212 can be, for example, an alternating current (AC) power source.
- the microfluidic device 200 illustrated in FIGS. 2A and 2B can have an optically-actuated DEP configuration. Accordingly, changing patterns of light 222 from the light source 220 , which may be controlled by the motive module 162 , can selectively activate and deactivate changing patterns of DEP electrodes at regions 214 of the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 .
- regions 214 of a microfluidic device having a DEP configuration are referred to as “DEP electrode regions.”
- a light pattern 222 directed onto the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 can illuminate select DEP electrode regions 214 a (shown in white) in a pattern, such as a square.
- the non-illuminated DEP electrode regions 214 are hereinafter referred to as “dark” DEP electrode regions 214 .
- the relative electrical impedance through the DEP electrode activation substrate 206 i.e., from the bottom electrode 204 up to the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 which interfaces with the medium 180 in the flow region 106
- the relative electrical impedance through the DEP electrode activation substrate 206 is greater than the relative electrical impedance through the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202 (i.e., from the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 to the top electrode 210 of the cover 110 ) at each dark DEP electrode region 214 .
- An illuminated DEP electrode region 214 a exhibits a reduced relative impedance through the electrode activation substrate 206 that is less than the relative impedance through the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202 at each illuminated DEP electrode region 214 a.
- the foregoing DEP configuration creates an electric field gradient in the fluidic medium 180 between illuminated DEP electrode regions 214 a and adjacent dark DEP electrode regions 214 , which in turn creates local DEP forces that attract or repel nearby micro-objects (not shown) in the fluidic medium 180 .
- DEP electrodes that attract or repel micro-objects in the fluidic medium 180 can thus be selectively activated and deactivated at many different such DEP electrode regions 214 at the inner surface 208 of the region/chamber 202 by changing light patterns 222 projected from a light source 220 into the microfluidic device 200 . Whether the DEP forces attract or repel nearby micro-objects can depend on such parameters as the frequency of the power source 212 and the dielectric properties of the medium 180 and/or micro-objects (not shown).
- the square pattern 224 of illuminated DEP electrode regions 214 a illustrated in FIG. 2B is an example only. Any pattern of the DEP electrode regions 214 can be illuminated (and thereby activated) by the pattern of light 222 projected into the device 200 , and the pattern of illuminated/activated DEP electrode regions 214 can be repeatedly changed by changing or moving the light pattern 222 .
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise or consist of a photoconductive material.
- the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 can be featureless.
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise or consist of a layer of hydrogenated amorphous silicon (a-Si:H).
- the a-Si:H can comprise, for example, about 8% to 40% hydrogen (calculated as 100 *the number of hydrogen atoms/the total number of hydrogen and silicon atoms).
- the layer of a-Si:H can have a thickness of about 500 nm to about 2.0 microns.
- the DEP electrode regions 214 can be created anywhere and in any pattern on the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 208 , in accordance with the light pattern 222 .
- the number and pattern of the DEP electrode regions 214 thus need not be fixed, but can correspond to the light pattern 222 .
- Examples of microfluidic devices having a DEP configuration comprising a photoconductive layer such as discussed above have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. RE 44,711 (Wu et al.) (originally issued as U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,355), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise a substrate comprising a plurality of doped layers, electrically insulating layers (or regions), and electrically conductive layers that form semiconductor integrated circuits, such as is known in semiconductor fields.
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise a plurality of phototransistors, including, for example, lateral bipolar phototransistors, each phototransistor corresponding to a DEP electrode region 214 .
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise electrodes (e.g., conductive metal electrodes) controlled by phototransistor switches, with each such electrode corresponding to a DEP electrode region 214 .
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can include a pattern of such phototransistors or phototransistor-controlled electrodes.
- the pattern for example, can be an array of substantially square phototransistors or phototransistor-controlled electrodes arranged in rows and columns, such as shown in FIG. 2B .
- the pattern can be an array of substantially hexagonal phototransistors or phototransistor-controlled electrodes that form a hexagonal lattice.
- electric circuit elements can form electrical connections between the DEP electrode regions 214 at the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 and the bottom electrode 210 , and those electrical connections (i.e., phototransistors or electrodes) can be selectively activated and deactivated by the light pattern 222 .
- each electrical connection can have high impedance such that the relative impedance through the electrode activation substrate 206 (i.e., from the bottom electrode 204 to the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 which interfaces with the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202 ) is greater than the relative impedance through the medium 180 (i.e., from the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 to the top electrode 210 of the cover 110 ) at the corresponding DEP electrode region 214 .
- the relative impedance through the electrode activation substrate 206 is less than the relative impedance through the medium 180 at each illuminated DEP electrode region 214 , thereby activating the DEP electrode at the corresponding DEP electrode region 214 as discussed above.
- DEP electrodes that attract or repel micro-objects (not shown) in the medium 180 can thus be selectively activated and deactivated at many different DEP electrode regions 214 at the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 in the region/chamber 202 in a manner determined by the light pattern 222 .
- microfluidic devices having electrode activation substrates that comprise phototransistors have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 7,956,339 (Ohta et al.) (see, e.g., device 300 illustrated in FIGS. 21 and 22 , and descriptions thereof), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Examples of microfluidic devices having electrode activation substrates that comprise electrodes controlled by phototransistor switches have been described, for example, in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2014/0124370 (Short et al.) (see, e.g., devices 200 , 400 , 500 , 600 , and 900 illustrated throughout the drawings, and descriptions thereof), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the top electrode 210 is part of a first wall (or cover 110 ) of the enclosure 102
- the electrode activation substrate 206 and bottom electrode 204 are part of a second wall (or support structure 104 ) of the enclosure 102.
- the region/chamber 202 can be between the first wall and the second wall.
- the electrode 210 is part of the second wall (or support structure 104 ) and one or both of the electrode activation substrate 206 and/or the electrode 210 are part of the first wall (or cover 110 ).
- the light source 220 can alternatively be used to illuminate the enclosure 102 from below.
- the motive modole 162 can select a micro-object (not shown) in the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202 by projecting a light pattern 222 into the device 200 to activate a first set of one or more DEP electrodes at DEP electrode regions 214 a of the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 in a pattern (e.g., square pattern 224 ) that surrounds and captures the micro-object.
- the motive modole 162 can then move the captured micro-object by moving the light pattern 222 relative to the device 200 to activate a second set of one or more DEP electrodes at DEP electrode regions 214 .
- the device 200 can be moved relative to the light pattern 222 .
- the microfluidic device 200 can have a DEP configuration that does not rely upon light activation of DEP electrodes at the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 .
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise selectively addressable and energizable electrodes positioned opposite to a surface including at least one electrode (e.g., cover 110 ).
- Switches e.g., transistor switches in a semiconductor substrate
- the DEP force can attract or repel a nearby micro-object.
- a set of DEP electrodes e.g., at a set of DEP electrodes regions 214 that forms a square pattern 224
- one or more micro-objects in region/chamber 202 can be trapped and moved within the region/chamber 202 .
- the motive modole 162 in FIG. 1 can control such switches and thus activate and deactivate individual ones of the DEP electrodes to select, trap, and move particular micro-objects (not shown) around the region/chamber 202 .
- Microfluidic devices having a DEP configuration that includes selectively addressable and energizable electrodes are known in the art and have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,294,063 (Becker et al.) and U.S. Pat. No. 6,942,776 (Medoro), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the microfluidic device 200 can have an electrowetting (EW) configuration, which can be in place of the DEP configuration or can be located in a portion of the microfluidic device 200 that is separate from the portion which has the DEP configuration.
- the EW configuration can be an opto-electrowetting configuration or an electrowetting on dielectric (EWOD) configuration, both of which are known in the art.
- the support structure 104 has an electrode activation substrate 206 sandwiched between a dielectric layer (not shown) and the bottom electrode 204 .
- the dielectric layer can comprise a hydrophobic material and/or can be coated with a hydrophobic material.
- the inner surface 208 of the support structure 104 is the inner surface of the dielectric layer or its hydrophobic coating.
- the dielectric layer (not shown) can comprise one or more oxide layers, and can have a thickness of about 50 nm to about 250 nm (e.g., about 75 nm to about 150 nm, or about 125 nm to about 175 nm).
- the dielectric layer may comprise a layer of oxide, such as a metal oxide (e.g., aluminum oxide or halfnuim oxide).
- the dielectric layer can comprise a dielectric material other than a metal oxide, such as silicon oxide or a nitride. Regardless of the exact composition and thickness, the dielectric layer can have an impedance of about 10 kOhms to about 50 kOhms.
- the inner surface 208 of the dielectric layer that faces inward toward region/chamber 202 is coated with a hydrophobic coating material (which is sub-group of the materials generally referred to herein as “coating materials”).
- the hydrophobic coating material can comprise, for example, fluorinated carbon molecules.
- fluorinated carbon molecules include perfluoro-polymers such as polytetrafluoroethylene (e.g., TEFLON®) or poly(2,3-difluoromethylenyl-perfluorotetrahydrofuran) (e.g., CYTOPTM).
- the hydrophobic coating material can have a thickness of about 10 nm to about 50 nm.
- molecules that make up the hydrophobic coating material can be covalently bonded to the surface of the dielectric layer.
- molecules of the hydrophobic coating material can form covalent bonds with the inner surface 208 of the dielectric layer by means of a linking group such as a siloxane group, or a phosphonate ester group.
- the hydrophobic coating material can comprise an alkyl group.
- the coating material can comprise alkyl-terminated siloxane or alkyl-terminated phosphonate ester.
- the alkyl group can comprise carbon atoms that form a linear chain (e.g., a linear chain of at least 10 carbon atoms, or at least 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms).
- the alkyl group can be an unbranched or a branched alkyl group.
- the alkyl group can be a substituted alkyl group (e.g., some of the carbons in the alkyl group can be fluorinated or perfluorinated).
- the coating material can comprise perfluoroalkyl-terminated siloxane or perfluoroalkyl-terminated phosphonate ester.
- the alkyl group may comprise a linear chain of substituted (e.g., fluorinated or perfluorinated) carbons joined to a linear chain of non-substituted carbons.
- the alkyl group may include a first segment, which may be a perfluoroalkyl group, joined to a second segment, which may be a non-substituted alkyl group.
- the first and second segments may be joined directly or indirectly (e.g., by means of an ethereal linkage).
- the first segment of the alkyl group can be located distal to the linking group, and the second segment of the alkyl group can be located proximal to the linking group.
- the coating material may form a monolayer when covalently bound to the surface of the dielectric layer.
- the coating material can form a monolayer of perfluoroalkyl-terminated siloxane or perfluoroalkyl-terminated phosphonate ester, which may or may not have an intervening linear chain of non- substituted carbons.
- the covalently bonded hydrophobic coating material can have a thickness of less than 10 nm (e.g., less than 5 nm, or about 1.5 to 3.0 nm).
- the inner surface (not shown) of the cover 110 of a microfluidic device 200 having an electrowetting (e.g. OEW) configuration is coated with a coating material (not shown) as well.
- the hydrophobic coating material can be the same hydrophobic coating material used to coat the inner surface 208 of the dielectric layer, and the hydrophobic coating material can have a thickness that is substantially the same as the thickness of the hydrophobic coating material on the dielectric layer.
- the cover 110 can comprise an electrode activation substrate 206 sandwiched between a dielectric layer and the top electrode 210 , in the manner of the support structure 104 .
- the electrode activation substrate 206 and the dielectric layer of the cover 110 can have the same composition and/or dimensions as the electrode activation substrate 206 and the dielectric layer of the support structure 104 .
- the microfluidic device 200 can have two electrowetting surfaces.
- the hydrophobic coating material is deposited on substantially all exposed regions of the inner surface of the cover 110 and substantially all exposed regions of the inner surface 208 of dielectric layer of the support structure 104 (i.e., on substantially all surfaces facing inward toward the enclosure 102 ). In some embodiments, the hydrophobic coating material is deposited on all surfaces within the enclosure 102 , including on substantially all inner surfaces of microfluidic circuit material 116 used to form circuit elements and structures (e.g. walls forming sequestration pens and chambers) within the enclosure 102 .
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise a photoconductive material, such as described above. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise or consist of a layer of hydrogenated amorphous silicon (a-Si:H).
- the a-Si:H can comprise, for example, about 8% to 40% hydrogen (calculated as 100* the number of hydrogen atoms/the total number of hydrogen and silicon atoms).
- the layer of a-Si:H can have a thickness of about 500 nm to about 2.0 ⁇ m.
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise electrodes (e.g., conductive metal electrodes) controlled by phototransistor switches, as described above.
- Microfluidic devices having an opto- electrowetting configuration are known in the art and/or can be constructed with electrode activation substrates known in the art.
- U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,132 (Chiou et al.), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference, discloses opto-electrowetting configurations having a photoconductive material such as a-Si:H
- U.S. Patent Publication No. 2014/0124370 (Short et al.), referenced above, discloses electrode activation substrates having electrodes controlled by phototransistor switches.
- the microfluidic device 200 thus can have an opto-electrowetting configuration, and light patterns 222 can be used to activate photoconductive EW regions or photoresponsive EW electrodes in the electrode activation substrate 206 .
- Such activated EW regions or EW electrodes of the electrode activation substrate 206 can generate an electrowetting force at the inner surface 208 of the support structure 104 (i.e., the inner surface of the overlaying dielectric layer or its hydrophobic coating).
- droplets e.g., containing an aqueous medium, solution, or solvent
- an oil-based fluid e.g., a silicone or fluorinated oil
- microfluidic devices 200 can have an EWOD configuration
- the electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise selectively addressable and energizable electrodes that do not rely upon light for activation.
- the electrode activation substrate 206 thus can include a pattern of such electrowetting (EW) electrodes.
- the pattern for example, can be an array of substantially square EW electrodes arranged in rows and columns, such as shown in FIG. 2B .
- the pattern can be an array of substantially hexagonal EW electrodes that form a hexagonal lattice.
- the EW electrodes can be selectively activated (or deactivated) by electrical switches (e.g., transistor switches in a semiconductor substrate).
- EW electrodes By selectively activating and deactivating EW electrodes in the electrode activation substrate 206 , droplets (not shown) contacting the inner surface 208 of the overlaying dielectric layer or its hydrophobic coating can be moved within the region/chamber 202 .
- the motive modole 162 in FIG. 1 can control such switches and thus activate and deactivate individual EW electrodes to select and move particular droplets around region/chamber 202 .
- Microfluidic devices having a EWOD configuration with selectively addressable and energizable electrodes are known in the art and have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 8,685,344 (Sundarsan et al.), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- a power source 212 can be used to provide a potential (e.g., an AC voltage potential) that powers the electrical circuits of the microfluidic device 200 .
- the power source 212 can be the same as, or a component of, the power source 192 referenced in FIG. 1 .
- Power source 212 can be configured to provide an AC voltage and/or current to the top electrode 210 and the bottom electrode 204 .
- the power source 212 can provide a frequency range and an average or peak power (e.g., voltage or current) range sufficient to generate net DEP forces (or electrowetting forces) strong enough to trap and move individual micro-objects (not shown) in the region/chamber 202 , as discussed above, and/or to change the wetting properties of the inner surface 208 of the support structure 104 (i.e., the dielectric layer and/or the hydrophobic coating on the dielectric layer) in the region/chamber 202 , as also discussed above.
- Such frequency ranges and average or peak power ranges are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,132 (Chiou et al.), U.S. Pat. No.
- Sequestration Pens Non-limiting examples of generic sequestration pens 244 , 246 , and 248 are shown within the microfluidic device 240 depicted in FIGS. 2C and 2D .
- Each sequestration pen 244 , 246 , and 248 can comprise an isolation structure 250 defining an isolation region 258 and a connection region 254 fluidically connecting the isolation region 258 to a channel 122 .
- the connection region 254 can comprise a proximal opening 252 to the channel 122 and a distal opening 256 to the isolation region 258 .
- connection region 254 can be configured so that the maximum penetration depth of a flow of a fluidic medium (not shown) flowing from the channel 122 into the sequestration pen 244 , 246 , 248 does not extend into the isolation region 258 .
- a micro-object (not shown) or other material (not shown) disposed in an isolation region 258 of a sequestration pen 244 , 246 , 248 can thus be isolated from, and not substantially affected by, a flow of medium 180 in the channel 122 .
- the channel 122 can thus be an example of a swept region, and the isolation regions 258 of the sequestration pens 244 , 246 , 248 can be examples of unswept regions.
- the channel 122 and sequestration pens 244 , 246 , 248 can be configured to contain one or more fluidic media 180 .
- the ports 242 are connected to the channel 122 and allow a fluidic medium 180 to be introduced into or removed from the microfluidic device 240 .
- the microfluidic device Prior to introduction of the fluidic medium 180 , the microfluidic device may be primed with a gas such as carbon dioxide gas.
- the flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 can be selectively generated and stopped.
- the ports 242 can be disposed at different locations (e.g., opposite ends) of the channel 122 , and a flow 260 of medium can be created from one port 242 functioning as an inlet to another port 242 functioning as an outlet.
- FIG. 2E illustrates a detailed view of an example of a sequestration pen 244 according to the present invention. Examples of micro-objects 270 are also shown.
- a flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in a microfluidic channel 122 past a proximal opening 252 of sequestration pen 244 can cause a secondary flow 262 of the medium 180 into and/or out of the sequestration pen 244 .
- the length L con of the connection region 254 of the sequestration pen 244 i.e., from the proximal opening 252 to the distal opening 256 ) should be greater than the penetration depth D p of the secondary flow 262 into the connection region 254 .
- the penetration depth D p of the secondary flow 262 depends upon the velocity of the fluidic medium 180 flowing in the channel 122 and various parameters relating to the configuration of the channel 122 and the proximal opening 252 of the connection region 254 to the channel 122 .
- the configurations of the channel 122 and the opening 252 will be fixed, whereas the rate of flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 will be variable. Accordingly, for each sequestration pen 244 , a maximal velocity V max for the flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in channel 122 can be identified that ensures that the penetration depth D p of the secondary flow 262 does not exceed the length L con of the connection region 254 .
- the resulting secondary flow 262 can be limited to the channel 122 and the connection region 254 and kept out of the isolation region 258 .
- the flow 260 of medium 180 in the channel 122 will thus not draw micro-objects 270 out of the isolation region 258 . Rather, micro-objects 270 located in the isolation region 258 will stay in the isolation region 258 regardless of the flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 .
- the flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 will not move miscellaneous particles (e.g., microparticles and/or nanoparticles) from the channel 122 into the isolation region 258 of a sequestration pen 244 .
- miscellaneous particles e.g., microparticles and/or nanoparticles
- Having the length L con of the connection region 254 be greater than the maximum penetration depth D p of the secondary flow 262 can thus prevent contamination of one sequestration pen 244 with miscellaneous particles from the channel 122 or another sequestration pen (e.g., sequestration pens 246 , 248 in FIG. 2D ).
- the channel 122 and the connection regions 254 of the sequestration pens 244 , 246 , 248 can be affected by the flow 260 of medium 180 in the channel 122 , the channel 122 and connection regions 254 can be deemed swept (or flow) regions of the microfluidic device 240 .
- the isolation regions 258 of the sequestration pens 244 , 246 , 248 can be deemed unswept (or non-flow) regions.
- components (not shown) in a first fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 can mix with a second fluidic medium 280 in the isolation region 258 substantially only by diffusion of components of the first medium 180 from the channel 122 through the connection region 254 and into the second fluidic medium 280 in the isolation region 258 .
- components (not shown) of the second medium 280 in the isolation region 258 can mix with the first medium 180 in the channel 122 substantially only by diffusion of components of the second medium 280 from the isolation region 258 through the connection region 254 and into the first medium 180 in the channel 122 .
- the first medium 180 can be the same medium or a different medium than the second medium 280 .
- first medium 180 and the second medium 280 can start out being the same, then become different (e.g., through conditioning of the second medium 280 by one or more cells in the isolation region 258 , or by changing the medium 180 flowing through the channel 122 ).
- the maximum penetration depth D p of the secondary flow 262 caused by the flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 can depend on a number of parameters, as mentioned above. Examples of such parameters include: the shape of the channel 122 (e.g., the channel can direct medium into the connection region 254 , divert medium away from the connection region 254 , or direct medium in a direction substantially perpendicular to the proximal opening 252 of the connection region 254 to the channel 122 ); a width W ch (or cross-sectional area) of the channel 122 at the proximal opening 252 ; and a width W con (or cross-sectional area) of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 ; the velocity V of the flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 ; the viscosity of the first medium 180 and/or the second medium 280 , or the like.
- the shape of the channel 122 e.g., the channel can direct medium into the connection region 254 , diver
- the dimensions of the channel 122 and sequestration pens 244 , 246 , 248 can be oriented as follows with respect to the vector of the flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122 : the channel width W ch (or cross-sectional area of the channel 122 ) can be substantially perpendicular to the flow 260 of medium 180 ; the width W con (or cross-sectional area) of the connection region 254 at opening 252 can be substantially parallel to the flow 260 of medium 180 in the channel 122 ; and/or the length L con of the connection region can be substantially perpendicular to the flow 260 of medium 180 in the channel 122 .
- the foregoing are examples only, and the relative position of the channel 122 and sequestration pens 244 , 246 , 248 can be in other orientations with respect to each other.
- the width W con of the connection region 254 can be uniform from the proximal opening 252 to the distal opening 256 .
- the width W con of the connection region 254 at the distal opening 256 can thus be in any of the ranges identified herein for the width W con of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 .
- the width W con of the connection region 254 at the distal opening 256 can be larger than the width W con of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 .
- the width of the isolation region 258 at the distal opening 256 can be substantially the same as the width W con of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 .
- the width of the isolation region 258 at the distal opening 256 can thus be in any of the ranges identified herein for the width W con of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 .
- the width of the isolation region 258 at the distal opening 256 can be larger or smaller than the width W con of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 .
- the distal opening 256 may be smaller than the proximal opening 252 and the width W con of the connection region 254 may be narrowed between the proximal opening 252 and distal opening 256 .
- the connection region 254 may be narrowed between the proximal opening and the distal opening, using a variety of different geometries (e.g. chamfering the connection region, beveling the connection region). Further, any part or subpart of the connection region 254 may be narrowed (e.g. a portion of the connection region adjacent to the proximal opening 252 ).
- the isolation region (e.g. 258 ) is configured to contain a plurality of micro-objects. In other embodiments, the isolation region can be configured to contain only one, two, three, four, five, or a similar relatively small number of micro-objects.
- the volume of an isolation region can be, for example, at least 3 ⁇ 10 3 , 6 ⁇ 10 3 , 9 ⁇ 10 3 , 1 ⁇ 10 4 , 2 ⁇ 10 4 , 4 ⁇ 10 4 , 8 ⁇ 10 4 , 1 ⁇ 10 5 , 2 ⁇ 10 5 , 4 ⁇ 10 5 , 8 ⁇ 10 5 , 1 ⁇ 10 6 , 2 ⁇ 10 6 , 4 ⁇ 10 6 , 6 ⁇ 10 6 cubic microns, or more.
- the width W ch of the channel 122 at a proximal opening can be within any of the following ranges: 50-1000 microns, 50-500 microns, 50-400 microns, 50-300 microns, 50-250 microns, 50-200 microns, 50-150 microns, 50-100 microns, 70-500 microns, 70-400 microns, 70-300 microns, 70-250 microns, 70-200 microns, 70-150 microns, 90-400 microns, 90-300 microns, 90-250 microns, 90-200 microns, 90-150 microns, 100-300 microns, 100-250 microns, 100-200 microns, 100-150 microns, and 100-120 microns.
- the width W ch of the channel 122 can be in other ranges (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above). Moreover, the W ch of the channel 122 can be selected to be in any of these ranges in regions of the channel other than at a proximal opening of a sequestration pen.
- a sequestration pen has a cross-sectional height of about 30 to about 200 microns, or about 50 to about 150 microns. In some embodiments, the sequestration pen has a cross-sectional area of about 100,000 to about 2,500,000 square microns, or about 200,000 to about 2,000,000 square microns. In some embodiments, a connection region has a cross-sectional height that matches the cross-sectional height of the corresponding sequestration pen. In some embodiments, the connection region has a cross-sectional width of about 50 to about 500 microns, or about 100 to about 300 microns.
- the height H ch of the channel 122 at a proximal opening 252 can be within any of the following ranges: 20-150 microns, 20-125 microns, 20-100 microns, 20-80 microns, 20-60 microns, 20-50 microns, 30-150 microns, 30-125 microns, 30-100 microns, 30-80 microns, 30-60 microns, 30-50 microns, 40-150 microns, 40-125 microns, 40-100 microns, 40-80 microns, 40-60 microns, or 40-50 microns.
- the height H ch of the channel 122 can be in other ranges (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above).
- the height H ch of the channel 122 can be selected to be in any of these ranges in regions of the channel other than at a proximal opening of a sequestration pen.
- a cross-sectional area of the channel 122 at a proximal opening 252 can be within any of the following ranges: 500-50,000 square microns, 500-40,000 square microns, 500-30,000 square microns, 500-25,000 square microns, 500-20,000 square microns, 500-15,000 square microns, 500-10,000 square microns, 500-7,500 square microns, 500-5,000 square microns, 1,000-25,000 square microns, 1,000-20,000 square microns, 1,000-15,000 square microns, 1,000-10,000 square microns, 1,000-7,500 square microns, 1,000-5,000 square microns, 2,000-20,000 square microns, 2,000-15,000 square microns, 2,000-10,000 square microns, 2,000-7,500 square microns, 2,000-6,000 square microns, 3,000-20,000 square microns, 3,000-15,000 square microns, 3,000-10,000 square microns, 3,000-7,500 square microns, or 3,000 to 6,000 square microns, 500-50,000 square micron
- the length L con of the connection region 254 can be in any of the following ranges: 1-200 microns, 5-150 microns, 10-100 microns, 15-80 microns, 20-60 microns, 20-500 microns, 40-400 microns, 60-300 microns, 80-200 microns, and 100-150 microns.
- the foregoing are examples only, and length L con of a connection region 254 can be in a different ranges than the foregoing examples (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above).
- the width W con of a connection region 254 at a proximal opening 252 can be in any of the following ranges 20-500 microns, 20-400 microns, 20-300 microns, 20-200 microns, 20-150 microns, 20-100 microns, 20-80 microns, 20-60 microns, 30-400 microns, 30-300 microns, 30-200 microns, 30-150 microns, 30-100 microns, 30-80 microns, 30-60 microns, 40-300 microns, 40-200 microns, 40-150 microns, 40-100 microns, 40-80 microns, 40-60 microns, 50-250 microns, 50-200 microns, 50-150 microns, 50-100 microns, 50-80 microns, 60-200 microns, 60-150 microns, 60-100 microns, 60-80 microns, 70-150 microns, 70-100 microns, 70-100 microns, 70-
- the width W con of a connection region 254 at a proximal opening 252 can be in any of the following ranges 2-35 microns, 2-25 microns, 2-20 microns, 2-15 microns, 2-10 microns, 2-7 microns, 2-5 microns, 2-3 microns, 3-25 microns, 3-20 microns, 3-15 microns, 3-10 microns, 3-7 microns, 3-5 microns, 3-4 microns, 4-20 microns, 4-15 microns, 4-10 microns, 4-7 microns, 4-5 microns, 5-15 microns, 5-10 microns, 5-7 microns, 6-15 microns, 6-10 microns, 6-7 microns, 7-15 microns, 7-10 microns, 8-15 microns, and 8-10 microns.
- the foregoing are examples only, and the width W con of a connection region 254 at a proximal opening 252 can be different than the
- a ratio of the length L con of a connection region 254 to a width W con of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 can be greater than or equal to any of the following ratios: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, or more.
- the foregoing are examples only, and the ratio of the length L con of a connection region 254 to a width W con of the connection region 254 at the proximal opening 252 can be different than the foregoing examples.
- V max can be set around 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, or 1.5 ⁇ L/sec.
- the volume of an isolation region 258 of a sequestration pen can be, for example, at least 3 ⁇ 10 3 , 6 ⁇ 10 3 , 9 ⁇ 10 3 , 1 ⁇ 10 4 , 2 ⁇ 10 4 , 4 ⁇ 10 4 , 8 ⁇ 10 4 , 1 ⁇ 5 , 2 ⁇ 10 5 , 4 ⁇ 10 5 , 8 ⁇ 10 5 , 1 ⁇ 10 6 , 2 ⁇ 10 6 , 4 ⁇ 10 6 , 6 ⁇ 10 6 cubic microns, or more.
- the volume of a sequestration pen may be about 5 ⁇ 10 3 , 7 ⁇ 10 3 , 1 ⁇ 10 4 , 3 ⁇ 10 4 , 5 ⁇ 10 4 , 8 ⁇ 10 4 , 1 ⁇ 10 5 , 2 ⁇ 10 5 , 4 ⁇ 10 5 , 6 ⁇ 10 5 , 8 ⁇ 10 5 , 1 ⁇ 10 6 , 2 ⁇ 10 6 , 4 ⁇ 10 6 , 8 ⁇ 10 6 , 1 ⁇ 10 7 , 3 ⁇ 10 7 , 5 ⁇ 10 7 , or about 8 ⁇ 10 7 cubic microns, or more.
- the microfluidic device has sequestration pens wherein no more than 1 ⁇ 10 2 biological cells may be maintained, and the volume of a sequestration pen may be no more than 2 ⁇ 10 6 cubic microns. In some embodiments, the microfluidic device has sequestration pens wherein no more than 1 ⁇ 10 2 biological cells may be maintained, and a sequestration pen may be no more than 4 ⁇ 10 5 cubic microns. In yet other embodiments, the microfluidic device has sequestration pens wherein no more than 50 biological cells may be maintained, a sequestration pen may be no more than 4 ⁇ 10 5 cubic microns.
- the microfluidic device has sequestration pens configured as in any of the embodiments discussed herein where the microfluidic device has about 100 to about 500 sequestration pens; about 200 to about 1000 sequestration pens, about 500 to about 1500 sequestration pens, about 1000 to about 2000 sequestration pens, or about 1000 to about 3500 sequestration pens.
- the microfluidic device has sequestration pens configured as in any of the embodiments discussed herein where the microfluidic device has about 1500 to about 3000 sequestration pens, about 2000 to about 3500 sequestration pens, about 2500 to about 4000 sequestration pens, about 3000 to about 4500 sequestration pens, about 3500 to about 5000 sequestration pens, about 4000 to about 5500 sequestration pens, about 4500 to about 6000 sequestration pens, about 5000 to about 6500 sequestration pens, about 5500 to about 7000 sequestration pens, about 6000 to about 7500 sequestration pens, about 6500 to about 8000 sequestration pens, about 7000 to about 8500 sequestration pens, about 7500 to about 9000 sequestration pens, about 8000 to about 9500 sequestration pens, about 8500 to about 10,000 sequestration pens, about 9000 to about 10,500 sequestration pens, about 9500 to about 11,000 sequestration pens,
- FIG. 2F illustrates a microfluidic device 290 according to one embodiment.
- the microfluidic device 290 is illustrated in FIG. 2F is a stylized diagram of a microfluidic device 100 .
- the microfluidic circuit 120 illustrated in FIG. 2F has two ports 107 , four distinct channels 122 and four distinct flow paths 106 .
- the microfluidic device 290 further comprises a plurality of sequestration pens opening off of each channel 122 .
- the sequestration pens have a geometry similar to the pens illustrated in FIG.
- the microfluidic circuit 120 includes both swept regions (e.g. channels 122 and portions of the connection regions 254 within the maximum penetration depth D p of the secondary flow 262 ) and non-swept regions (e.g. isolation regions 258 and portions of the connection regions 254 not within the maximum penetration depth D p of the secondary flow 262 ).
- FIGS. 3A through 3D shows various embodiments of system 150 which can be used to operate and observe microfluidic devices (e.g. 100 , 200 , 240 , 290 ) according to the present invention.
- the system 150 can include a structure (“nest”) 300 configured to hold a microfluidic device 100 (not shown), or any other microfluidic device described herein.
- the nest 300 can include a socket 302 capable of interfacing with the microfluidic device 360 (e.g., an optically-actuated electrokinetic device 100 ) and providing electrical connections from power source 192 to microfluidic device 360 .
- the nest 300 can further include an integrated electrical signal generation subsystem 304 .
- the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can be configured to supply a biasing voltage to socket 302 such that the biasing voltage is applied across a pair of electrodes in the microfluidic device 360 when it is being held by socket 302 .
- the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can be part of power source 192 .
- the ability to apply a biasing voltage to microfluidic device 360 does not mean that a biasing voltage will be applied at all times when the microfluidic device 360 is held by the socket 302 . Rather, in most cases, the biasing voltage will be applied intermittently, e.g., only as needed to facilitate the generation of electrokinetic forces, such as dielectrophoresis or electro-wetting, in the microfluidic device 360 .
- the nest 300 can include a printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) 320 .
- the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can be mounted on and electrically integrated into the PCBA 320 .
- the exemplary support includes socket 302 mounted on PCBA 320 , as well.
- the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 will include a waveform generator (not shown).
- the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can further include an oscilloscope (not shown) and/or a waveform amplification circuit (not shown) configured to amplify a waveform received from the waveform generator.
- the oscilloscope if present, can be configured to measure the waveform supplied to the microfluidic device 360 held by the socket 302 . In certain embodiments, the oscilloscope measures the waveform at a location proximal to the microfluidic device 360 (and distal to the waveform generator), thus ensuring greater accuracy in measuring the waveform actually applied to the device.
- Data obtained from the oscilloscope measurement can be, for example, provided as feedback to the waveform generator, and the waveform generator can be configured to adjust its output based on such feedback.
- An example of a suitable combined waveform generator and oscilloscope is the Red PitayaTM
- the nest 300 further comprises a controller 308 , such as a microprocessor used to sense and/or control the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 .
- a controller 308 such as a microprocessor used to sense and/or control the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 .
- suitable microprocessors include the chickenTM microprocessors, such as the PC NanoTM.
- the controller 308 may be used to perform functions and analysis or may communicate with an external master controller 154 (shown in FIG. 1 ) to perform functions and analysis. In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3A the controller 308 communicates with a master controller 154 through an interface 310 (e.g., a plug or connector).
- the nest 300 can comprise an electrical signal generation subsystem 304 comprising a Red PitayaTM waveform generator/oscilloscope unit (“Red Pitaya unit”) and a waveform amplification circuit that amplifies the waveform generated by the Red Pitaya unit and passes the amplified voltage to the microfluidic device 100 .
- the Red Pitaya unit is configured to measure the amplified voltage at the microfluidic device 360 and then adjust its own output voltage as needed such that the measured voltage at the microfluidic device 360 is the desired value.
- the waveform amplification circuit can have a +6.5V to ⁇ 6.5V power supply generated by a pair of DC-DC converters mounted on the PCBA 320 , resulting in a signal of up to 13 Vpp at the microfluidic device 100 .
- the support structure 300 can further include a thermal control subsystem 306 .
- the thermal control subsystem 306 can be configured to regulate the temperature of microfluidic device 360 held by the support structure 300 .
- the thermal control subsystem 306 can include a Peltier thermoelectric device (not shown) and a cooling unit (not shown).
- the Peltier thermoelectric device can have a first surface configured to interface with at least one surface of the microfluidic device 360 .
- the cooling unit can be, for example, a cooling block (not shown), such as a liquid-cooled aluminum block.
- a second surface of the Peltier thermoelectric device (e.g., a surface opposite the first surface) can be configured to interface with a surface of such a cooling block.
- the cooling block can be connected to a fluidic path 330 configured to circulate cooled fluid through the cooling block.
- the support structure 300 comprises an inlet 332 and an outlet 334 to receive cooled fluid from an external reservoir (not shown), introduce the cooled fluid into the fluidic path 330 and through the cooling block, and then return the cooled fluid to the external reservoir.
- the Peltier thermoelectric device, the cooling unit, and/or the fluidic path 330 can be mounted on a casing 340 of the support structure 300 .
- the thermal control subsystem 306 is configured to regulate the temperature of the Peltier thermoelectric device so as to achieve a target temperature for the microfluidic device 360 .
- Temperature regulation of the Peltier thermoelectric device can be achieved, for example, by a thermoelectric power supply, such as a PololuTM thermoelectric power supply (Pololu Robotics and Electronics Corp.).
- the thermal control subsystem 306 can include a feedback circuit, such as a temperature value provided by an analog circuit. Alternatively, the feedback circuit can be provided by a digital circuit.
- the nest 300 can include a thermal control subsystem 306 with a feedback circuit that is an analog voltage divider circuit (shown in FIG. 3B ) which includes a resistor (e.g., with resistance 1 kOhm+/ ⁇ 0.1%, temperature coefficient +/ ⁇ 0.02 ppm/CO) and a NTC thermistor (e.g., with nominal resistance 1 kOhm+/ ⁇ 0.01%).
- the thermal control subsystem 306 measures the voltage from the feedback circuit and then uses the calculated temperature value as input to an on-board PID control loop algorithm.
- Output from the PID control loop algorithm can drive, for example, both a directional and a pulse-width-modulated signal pin on a PololuTM motor drive (not shown) to actuate the thermoelectric power supply, thereby controlling the Peltier thermoelectric device.
- the nest 300 can include a serial port 350 which allows the microprocessor of the controller 308 to communicate with an external master controller 154 via the interface 310 .
- the microprocessor of the controller 308 can communicate (e.g., via a Plink tool (not shown)) with the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 and thermal control subsystem 306 .
- the electrical signal generation subsystem 308 and the thermal control subsystem 306 can communicate with the external master controller 154 .
- the master controller 154 can, among other things, assist the electrical signal generation subsystem 308 by performing scaling calculations for output voltage adjustments.
- GUI Graphical User Interface
- 3C provided via a display device 170 coupled to the external master controller 154 , can be configured to plot temperature and waveform data obtained from the thermal control subsystem 306 and the electrical signal generation subsystem 308 , respectively.
- the GUI can allow for updates to the controller 308 , the thermal control subsystem 306 , and the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 .
- system 150 can include an imaging device 194 .
- the imaging device 194 comprises a light modulating subsystem 404 .
- the light modulating subsystem 404 can include a digital mirror device (DMD), or a microshutter array system (MSA), either of which can be configured to receive light from a light source 402 and transmits a subset of the received light into an optical train of microscope 400 .
- DMD digital mirror device
- MSA microshutter array system
- the light modulating subsystem 404 can include a device that produces its own light (and thus dispenses with the need for a light source 402 ), such as an organic light emitting diode display (OLED), a liquid crystal on silicon (LCOS) device, a ferroelectric liquid crystal on silicon device (FLCOS), or a transmissive liquid crystal display (LCD).
- OLED organic light emitting diode display
- LCOS liquid crystal on silicon
- FLCOS ferroelectric liquid crystal on silicon device
- LCD transmissive liquid crystal display
- the light modulating subsystem 404 can be, for example, a projector.
- the light modulating subsystem 404 can be capable of emitting both structured and unstructured light.
- a suitable light modulating subsystem 404 is the MosaicTM system from Andor TechnologiesTM.
- imaging modole 164 and/or motive modole 162 of system 150 can control the light modulating subsystem 404 .
- the imaging device 194 further comprises a microscope 400 .
- the nest 300 and light modulating subsystem 404 can be individually configured to be mounted on the microscope 400 .
- the microscope 400 can be, for example, a standard research-grade light microscope or fluorescence microscope.
- the nest 300 can be configured to be mounted on the stage 410 of the microscope 400 and/or the light modulating subsystem 404 can be configured to mount on a port of microscope 400 .
- the nest 300 and the light modulating subsystem 404 described herein can be integral components of microscope 400 .
- the microscope 400 can further include one or more detectors 422 .
- the detector 422 is controlled by the imaging module 164 .
- the detector 422 can include an eye piece, a charge-coupled device (CCD), a camera (e.g., a digital camera), or any combination thereof. If at least two detectors 422 are present, one detector can be, for example, a fast-frame-rate camera while the other detector can be a high sensitivity camera.
- the microscope 400 can include an optical train configured to receive reflected and/or emitted light from the microfluidic device 360 and focus at least a portion of the reflected and/or emitted light on the one or more detectors 422 .
- the optical train of the microscope can also include different tube lenses (not shown) for the different detectors, such that the final magnification on each detector can be different.
- imaging device 194 is configured to use at least two light sources.
- a first light source 402 can be used to produce structured light (e.g., via the light modulating subsystem 404 ) and a second light source 432 can be used to provide unstructured light.
- the first light source 402 can produce structured light for optically-actuated electrokinesis and/or fluorescent excitation, and the second light source 432 can be used to provide bright field illumination.
- the motive modole 164 can be used to control the first light source 404 and the imaging modole 164 can be used to control the second light source 432 .
- the optical train of the microscope 400 can be configured to (1) receive structured light from the light modulating subsystem 404 and focus the structured light on at least a first region in a microfluidic device, such as an optically-actuated electrokinetic device, when the device is being held by the support structure 200 , and (2) receive reflected and/or emitted light from the microfluidic device and focus at least a portion of such reflected and/or emitted light onto detector 422 .
- the optical train can be further configured to receive unstructured light from a second light source and focus the unstructured light on at least a second region of the microfluidic device, when the device is held by the support structure 300 .
- the first and second regions of the microfluidic device can be overlapping regions.
- the first region can be a subset of the second region.
- the first light source 402 is shown supplying light to a light modulating subsystem 404 , which provides structured light to the optical train of the microscope 400 .
- the second light source 432 is shown providing unstructured light to the optical train via a beam splitter 436 .
- Structured light from the light modulating subsystem 404 and unstructured light from the second light source 432 travel from the beam splitter 436 through the optical train together to reach a second beam splitter 436 (or dichroic filter 406 , depending on the light provided by the light modulating subsystem 404 ), where the light gets reflected down through the objective 408 to the sample plane 412 .
- Reflected and/or emitted light from the sample plane 412 then travels back up through the objective 408 , through the beam splitter and/or dichroic filter 406 , and to a dichroic filter 424 . Only a fraction of the light reaching dichroic filter 424 passes through and reaches the detector 422 .
- the second light source 432 emits blue light.
- blue light reflected from the sample plane 412 is able to pass through dichroic filter 424 and reach the detector 422 .
- structured light coming from the light modulating subsystem 404 gets reflected from the sample plane 412 , but does not pass through the dichroic filter 424 .
- the dichroic filter 424 is filtering out visible light having a wavelength longer than 495 nm. Such filtering out of the light from the light modulating subsystem 404 would only be complete (as shown) if the light emitted from the light modulating subsystem did not include any wavelengths shorter than 495 nm.
- the filter 424 acts to change the balance between the amount of light that reaches the detector 422 from the first light source 402 and the second light source 432 . This can be beneficial if the first light source 402 is significantly stronger than the second light source 432 .
- the second light source 432 can emit red light
- the dichroic filter 424 can filter out visible light other than red light (e.g., visible light having a wavelength shorter than 650 nm).
- FIG. 3E illustrates communications between the motive modole 164 and the light modulating subsystem 404 to project patterns of light on a microfluidic device according to a specific embodiment of the invention.
- the light modulating subsystem 404 may comprise an electrically-addressed spatial light modulator and/or an optically-addressed spatial light modulator. Electrically-addressed spatial light modulators comprise an array of individually-addressable spatial light modulators that are controlled by electrodes.
- the light modulating subsystem 404 is a Digital Mirror Device (DMD) 460 comprising an array of individually-addressable micro-mirrors 464 hat are controlled by electrodes.
- DMD Digital Mirror Device
- the light modulating subsystem 404 can be a Liquid Crystal on Silicon (LCoS) device comprising an array of individually-addressable electrodes that correspond to pixels in a liquid crystal display.
- LCD Liquid Crystal on Silicon
- the light modulating subsystem 404 uses a separate light source 440 to receive and modulate light.
- the light modulating subsystem 404 comprises its own light source.
- FIG. 3E illustrates communications between the motive modole 164 and the light modulating subsystem 404 to project patterns of light on a microfluidic device according to a specific embodiment of the invention.
- the light modulating subsystem 404 may comprise an electrically-addressed spatial light modulator and/or an optically-addressed spatial light modulator.
- Electrically-addressed spatial light modulators comprise an array of individually-addressable spatial light modulators (i.e. spatial light modulating elements) that are controlled by electrodes.
- FIG. 3E illustrates communications between the motive modole 164 and the light modulating subsystem 404 to project patterns of light on a microfluidic device according to a specific embodiment of the invention.
- the light modulating subsystem 404 may comprise an electrically-addressed spatial light modulator and/or an optically-addressed spatial light modulator.
- Electrically-addressed spatial light modulators comprise an array of individually-addressable spatial light modulators
- the light modulating subsystem 404 is a Digital Mirror Device (DMD) 460 comprising an array of individually-addressable micro-mirrors 464 that are controlled by electrodes.
- DMD Digital Mirror Device
- the light modulating subsystem 404 can be a Liquid Crystal on Silicon (LCoS) device comprising an array of individually-addressable electrodes that correspond to pixels in a liquid crystal display.
- LCD Liquid Crystal on Silicon
- the light modulating subsystem 404 uses a separate light source 440 to receive and modulate light.
- the light modulating subsystem 404 comprises its own light source.
- the motive modole 162 transmits information 450 specifying a specific pattern of light (“pattern information”) to the light modulating subsystem 404 .
- the pattern information 450 can comprise a bitmap (or similar pixel-based data structure), vector data, or any combination thereof.
- the pattern information 450 in FIG. 3E is illustrated as a bitmap comprising an array of pixels 454 and including a square pattern 452 of pixels.
- the pattern information 450 can be binary (i.e. specify whether or not to project a pattern of light) or contain values indicating an intensity of light to project.
- the micro-mirrors 464 may create different intensities of light by rapidly switching the mirrors between an “on” and “off” state (i.e. “dithering” the micro-mirrors).
- the light modulating subsystem 404 receives the pattern information 450 from the motive modole 162 and uses the pattern information 450 to direct the projection of a pattern of light 468 onto DEP electrode regions 474 on the microfluidic device 470 .
- the pattern information 450 from the motive modole 162 and uses the pattern information 450 to direct the projection of a pattern of light 468 onto DEP electrode regions 474 on the microfluidic device 470 .
- a DMD 460 rotates a plurality 462 of individually-addressable micro- mirrors 464 corresponding to the square pattern information 450 into an “on state.”
- the square pattern of individual-addressable micro-mirrors 462 modulates the light from the light source 440 to project a pattern of light 468 onto the microfluidic device 470 that illuminates a square pattern of DEP electrode regions 472 in the array of DEP electrode regions 474 in the microfluidic device 470 .
- each individually-addressable spatial light modulating element 464 can project light to generate light-actuated DEP force at a corresponding DEP electrode region 474 .
- the motive modole 162 can send pattern information 450 to the light modulating subsystem 404 that specifies the DEP electrode regions 474 to project light onto.
- the motive modole 162 can communicate directly with the individually-addressable spatial light modulators to control which of the DEP electrode regions 474 are illuminated on the microfluidic device 470 . Once illuminated the DEP electrode regions 474 may exert OET or OEW force on surrounding micro-objects.
- the spatial light modulating elements 464 can receive pattern information 450 specifying an intensity of light to project.
- the pattern information 450 may specify a gradation of light to project over adjacent DEP electrode regions 474 in the microfluidic device.
- the pattern information 450 may specify a gradation of light that decreases in intensity over adjacent DEP electrode regions 474 .
- the pattern information 450 may specify that about 100% of the maximum light intensity is to be projected at a first DEP electrode region 474 , that 70% of the maximum light intensity is to be projected at a second DEP electrode region 474 adjacent to the first DEP electrode region 474 , and that 10% of the maximum light intensity is to be projected at a third DEP electrode region 474 adjacent to the second DEP electrode region 474 .
- Various combinations of light intensities may be used to project a gradation over various numbers of DEP electrode regions 474 (e.g. any decreasing combination of about 100%, about 90%, about 80%, about 70%, about 60%, about 50%, about 40%, about 30%, about 20%, and about 10%, and any values therebetween, of the maximum light intensity over any number of DEP electrode regions 474 ).
- the pattern information 450 may specify a gradation of light that increases in intensity over any number of DEP electrode regions 474 or a gradation of light that both increases and decreases in intensity over any number of DEP electrode regions 474 .
- aspects of the present disclosure are drawn to methods of isolating a cell nucleus using a microfluidic device, e.g., a microfluidic device as disclosed herein.
- the isolated cell nucleus (or multiple isolated cell nuclei) can be analyzed, processed, or further manipulated as desired. Such downstream actions may be performed within the microfluidic device or may be performed once the isolated cell nucleus is exported or otherwise harvested from the microfluidic device.
- a cell nucleus isolation method includes introducing a cell nucleus (or one or more cell nuclei) into a microfluidic device having a substrate configured to selectively generate forces that move micro-objects and then moving the cell nucleus to a desired location in the microfluidic device, thus isolating the cell nucleus.
- the cell nucleus is generally introduced into the microfluidic device in a fluid medium that preserves the integrity of the cell nucleus and is amenable for use in the microfluidic device for subsequent cell nucleus movement/isolation.
- Introducing the cell nucleus into the microfluidic device can be achieved by flowing a medium containing the cell nucleus into a flow region of the microfluidic device which is in fluid connection with at least one isolation region and moving said cell nucleus from the flow region to the isolation region.
- the flow region of the microfluidic device can include a flow channel (e.g., flow channel 122 of FIGS. 1, 2E and 2F ), to which the isolation region is most immediately connected.
- the isolation region can be present in a sequestration pen of the microfluidic device (e.g., isolation regions 258 in sequestration pens 244 , 246 , and 248 of FIG. 2D ).
- the flow region (or flow channel) and the isolation region of the microfluidic device are configured such that the flow of medium/fluid through the flow region does not penetrate into the isolation region. Examples of microfluidic devices having such a configuration of are described in detail above (see e.g., FIGS. 2D, 2E and 2F , and descriptions thereof).
- cell nuclei are introduced into the flow region of a microfluidic device through a port (e.g., port 107 in FIG. 1 ) comprising a passage into the enclosure 102 . Introducing cell nuclei into the microfluidic device is referred to herein as “loading” the nuclei onto the microfluidic device.
- the microfluidic device is controlled or manipulated, e.g., using the control module and control/monitoring equipment, to move the cell nucleus from the flow region to the first isolation region through selective application of one or more forces.
- Any of a number of different forces may be used alone or in combination to move a cell nucleus, including gravity, centrifugal force, magnetic force, fluid flow, or DEP forces (as detailed above).
- moving said cell nucleus from the flow region to an isolation region comprises manipulating the micro-fluidic device such that a gravitational force acts upon the cell nucleus and moves it in a desired direction, e.g., pulls it into or toward the isolation region.
- Manipulating the microfluidic device may include tilting the device to impart the desired gravitational force. Centrifugal forces can be applied by rotating or centrifuging the device, while fluid can be flowed through swept regions of the device to move a cell nucleus, e.g., flowing from an inlet port to a flow channel or from a flow channel to an outlet port.
- DEP forces such as OET forces
- moving a cell nucleus thus can include generating DEP forces that direct a cell nucleus along a desired or pre-determined path, e.g., from a channel to an isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- the DEP forces may attract or repel the cell nucleus to achieve movement along the desired path.
- Generating DEP forces in the microfluidic device includes activating (e.g., optically activating) DEP electrodes located at the surface of the substrate of the microfluidic device.
- the substrate of the microfluidic device can include a layer of amorphous silicon that exhibits increased conductivity at a desired position(s) by directing light to the position(s) on the substrate (e.g., visible light).
- the DEP electrodes are referred to as virtual electrodes (as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,355 (now RE 44,711)).
- DEP electrodes can be phototransistors (e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,956,339).
- DEP electrodes may be controlled by a photo-actuated transistor (e.g., a CMOS chip design as described in US2014/0124370) or by an electrically-actuated transistor (e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,942,776).
- a photo-actuated transistor e.g., a CMOS chip design as described in US2014/0124370
- an electrically-actuated transistor e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,942,776
- each DEP electrode is controlled independently of the other DEP electrodes.
- EW forces such as OEW forces
- moving a cell nucleus thus can include generating EW forces that direct the droplet and a cell nucleus contained therein along a desired or pre-determined path, e.g., from a channel to an isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- the EW forces may attract the aqueous droplet (and cell nucleus) by creating a relative electrostatic attraction with the leading edge of the droplet to achieve movement along the desired path.
- Generating EW forces in the microfluidic device includes activating (e.g., optically activating) EW electrodes located beneath the dielectric layer of the substrate of the microfluidic device.
- the substrate of the microfluidic device can include a layer of amorphous silicon that exhibits increased conductivity at a desired position(s) by directing light to the position(s) on the substrate (e.g., visible light).
- the EW electrodes can be referred to as virtual electrodes, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,132 (Chiou et al.).
- the microfluidic device can have an EWOD configuration with selectively addressable and energizable electrodes, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,685,344 (Sundarsan et al.).
- Blocking solutions and blocking agents after cells are lysed to release nuclei, the remaining nuclei may have excess matter (e.g. proteins and/or nucleic acid in the cytoplasm of the cell) present on the membranes of the nuclei that cause the nuclei to adhere or “stick” to the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device.
- one or more of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device e.g. the inner surface of the cover of the microfluidic device or the electrode activation substrate of the microfluidic device
- the cell nuclei are imported in a blocking solution that includes one or more blocking agents.
- the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device are pre-treated or “primed” with a blocking solution comprising a blocking agent prior to introduction of the cell nuclei.
- a blocking solution comprising a blocking agent prior to introduction of the cell nuclei.
- Any convenient blocking agent/blocking solution can be used, including but not limited to: serum or serum factors, bovine serum albumin (BSA), polymers, detergents, enzymes, and any combination thereof.
- BSA bovine serum albumin
- a blocking agent will be used to treat the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device.
- a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties can be included as a blocking agent in the blocking solution.
- alkylene ether containing polymers may be suitable.
- amphiphilic nonionic block copolymers which include blocks of polyethylene oxide (PEO) and polypropylene oxide (PPO) subunits in differing ratios and locations within the polymer chain.
- Pluronic® polymers BASF are block copolymers of this type and are known in the art to be suitable for use when in contact with living cells.
- the polymers range in average molecular mass M w from about 2000 Da to about 20 KDa.
- the PEO-PPO block copolymer can have a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB) greater than about 10 (e.g. 12-18).
- Pluronic® polymers useful for yielding a conditioned surface include Pluronic® L44, L64, P85, and F127 (including F127NF).
- Another class of alkylene ether containing polymers is polyethylene glycol (PEG M w ⁇ 100,000 Da) or alternatively polyethylene oxide (PEO, M w >100,000).
- PEG polyethylene glycol
- PEO polyethylene oxide
- a PEG may have an M w of about 1000 Da, 5000 Da, 10,000 Da or 20,000 Da.
- DNase can be included in the blocking agent in a blocking solution to remove extranuclear DNA that might cause sticking to the substrate and/or walls of the microfluidic device.
- a blocking solution can comprise various proteins and/or peptides as blocking agents.
- a blocking solution that finds use in the present disclosure includes a protein such as albumin (e.g. BSA) and/or serum (or a combination of multiple different sera) comprising albumin and/or one or more other similar proteins as blocking agents.
- the serum can be from any convenient source, including but not limited to fetal calf serum, sheep serum, goat serum, horse serum, and the like.
- BSA in a blocking solution is present in a range of form about 1 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL, including 5 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 40 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL, 60 mg/mL, 70 mg/mL, 80 mg/mL, 90 mg/mL, or more or anywhere in between.
- serum in a blocking solution is present in a range of from about 20% (v/v) to about 50% v/v, including 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, or more or anywhere in between.
- BSA is present as a blocking agent in a blocking solution at 5 mg/mL, whereas in other embodiments, BSA is present as a blocking agent in a blocking solution at 70 mg/mL. In certain embodiments, serum is present as a blocking agent in a blocking solution at 30%.
- any of the foregoing blocking agents/blocking solutions can be replaced by or used in combination with various coating materials used to coat one or more of the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device (e.g., a DEP-configured and/or EW-configured microfluidic device).
- at least one surface of the microfluidic device includes a coating material that reducing surface fouling and/or prevents or reduces nuclei from sticking to the surface.
- substantially all the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device include the coating material.
- the coated inner surface(s) may include the surface of a flow region (e.g., channel), chamber, or sequestration pen, or a combination thereof.
- each of a plurality of sequestration pens has at least one inner surface coated with coating materials. In other embodiments, each of a plurality of flow regions or channels has at least one inner surface coated with coating materials. In some embodiments, at least one inner surface of each of a plurality of sequestration pens and each of a plurality of channels is coated with coating materials.
- the at least one inner surface may include a coating material that comprises a polymer.
- the polymer may be covalently or non-covalently bound (or linked) to the at least one surface.
- the polymer may have a variety of structural motifs, such as found in block polymers (and copolymers), star polymers (star copolymers), and graft or comb polymers (graft copolymers), all of which may be suitable for the methods disclosed herein.
- the polymer may include a polymer including alkylene ether moieties.
- alkylene ether containing polymers may be suitable for use in the microfluidic devices described herein.
- One non-limiting exemplary class of alkylene ether containing polymers are amphiphilic nonionic block copolymers which include blocks of polyethylene oxide (PEO) and polypropylene oxide (PPO) subunits in differing ratios and locations within the polymer chain.
- Pluronic® polymers BASF are block copolymers of this type and are known in the art to be suitable for use when in contact with living cells.
- the polymers range in average molecular mass M w from about 2000 Da to about 20 KDa.
- the PEO-PPO block copolymer can have a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB) greater than about 10 (e.g. 12-18).
- HLB hydrophilic-lipophilic balance
- Specific Pluronic® polymers useful for yielding a coated surface include Pluronic® L44, L64, P85, and F127 (including F127NF).
- Another class of alkylene ether containing polymers is polyethylene glycol (PEG M w ⁇ 100,000 Da) or alternatively polyethylene oxide (PEO, M w >100,000).
- a PEG may have an M w of about 1000 Da, 5000 Da, 10,000 Da or 20,000 Da.
- the coating material may include a polymer containing carboxylic acid moieties.
- the carboxylic acid subunit may be an alkyl, alkenyl or aromatic moiety containing subunit.
- PVA polylactic acid
- the coating material may include a polymer containing sulfonic acid moieties.
- the sulfonic acid subunit may be an alkyl, alkenyl or aromatic moiety containing subunit.
- One non-limiting example is polystyrene sulfonic acid (PSSA) or polyanethole sulfonic acid. These latter exemplary polymers are polyelectrolytes and may alter the characteristics of the surface to deter nuclei sticking.
- the coating material may include a polymer containing urethane moieties, such as, but not limited to polyurethane.
- the coating material may include a polymer containing phosphate moieties, either at a terminus of the polymer backbone or pendant from the backbone of the polymer.
- the coating material may include a polymer containing saccharide moieties.
- polysaccharides such as those derived from algal or fungal polysaccharides such as xanthan gum or dextran may be suitable to form a material which may reduce or prevent nucleic sticking in the microfluidic device.
- a dextran polymer having a size about 3 Kda may be used to provide a coating material for a surface within a microfluidic device.
- the coating material may include a polymer containing nucleotide moieties, i.e. a nucleic acid, which may have ribonucleotide moieties or deoxyribonucleotide moieties.
- the nucleic acid may contain only natural nucleotide moieties or may contain unnatural nucleotide moieties which comprise nucleobase, ribose or phosphate moiety analogs such as 7-deazaadenine, pentose, methyl phosphonate or phosphorothioate moieties without limitation.
- a nucleic acid containing polymer may include a polyelectrolyte which may reduce or prevent nuclei sticking.
- the coating material may include a polymer containing amino acid moieties.
- the polymer containing amino acid moieties may include a natural amino acid containing polymer or an unnatural amino acid containing polymer, either of which may include a peptide, a polypeptide or a protein.
- the protein may be bovine serum albumin (BSA).
- BSA bovine serum albumin
- ECM extracellular matrix
- a cell matrix protein, which may be included in a coating material can include, but is not limited to, a collagen, an elastin, an RGD-containing peptide (e.g. a fibronectin), or a laminin.
- growth factors, cytokines, hormones or other cell signaling species may be provided within the coating material of the microfluidic device.
- the coating material may include a polymer including amine moieties.
- the polyamino polymer may include a natural polyamine polymer or a synthetic polyamine polymer. Examples of natural polyamines include spermine, spermidine, and putrescine.
- the coating material may include a polymer containing more than one of alkylene oxide moieties, carboxylic acid moieties, sulfonic acid moieties, phosphate moieties, saccharide moieties, nucleotide moieties, or amino acid moieties.
- the polymer conditioned surface may include a mixture of more than one polymer each having alkylene oxide moieties, carboxylic acid moieties, sulfonic acid moieties, phosphate moieties, saccharide moieties, nucleotide moieties, and/or amino acid moieties, which may be independently or simultaneously incorporated into the coating material.
- the at least one inner surface includes covalently linked molecules that reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device.
- the covalently linked molecules include a linking group, wherein the linking group is covalently linked to a surface of the microfluidic device.
- the linking group is also covalently linked to a moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device.
- the surface to which the linking group links may include a surface of the substrate of the microfluidic device which, for embodiments in which the microfluidic device includes a DEP configuration, can include silicon and/or silicon dioxide.
- the covalently linked coating materials coat substantially all of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device.
- the covalently linked moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may include alkyl or fluoroalkyl (which includes perfluoroalkyl) moieties; mono- or polysaccharides (which may include but is not limited to dextran); alcohols (including but not limited to propargyl alcohol); polyalcohols, including but not limited to polyvinyl alcohol; alkylene ethers, including but not limited to polyethylene glycol; polyelectrolytes (including but not limited to polyacrylic acid or polyvinyl phosphonic acid); amino groups (including derivatives thereof, such as, but not limited to alkylated amines, hydroxyalkylated amino group, guanidinium, and heterocylic groups containing an unaromatized nitrogen ring atom, such as, but not limited to morpholinyl or piperazinyl); carboxylic acids including but not limited to propiolic acid (which may provide
- the covalently linked moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may be any polymer as described herein, and may include one or more polymers containing alkylene oxide moieties, carboxylic acid moieties, saccharide moieties, sulfonic acid moieties, phosphate moieties, amino acid moieties, nucleic acid moieties, or amino moieties.
- the covalently linked moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may include non-polymeric moieties such as an alkyl moiety, a substituted alkyl moiety, such as a fluoroalkyl moiety (including but not limited to a perfluoroalkyl moiety), amino acid moiety, alcohol moiety, amino moiety, carboxylic acid moiety, phosphonic acid moiety, sulfonic acid moiety, sulfamic acid moiety, or saccharide moiety.
- non-polymeric moieties such as an alkyl moiety, a substituted alkyl moiety, such as a fluoroalkyl moiety (including but not limited to a perfluoroalkyl moiety), amino acid moiety, alcohol moiety, amino moiety, carboxylic acid moiety, phosphonic acid moiety, sulfonic acid moiety, sulfamic acid moiety, or saccharide mo
- the covalently linked moiety may be an alkyl group that comprises carbon atoms that form a linear chain (e.g., a linear chain of at least 10 carbons, or at least 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbons).
- the alkyl group may be an unbranched alkyl.
- the alkyl group may include a substituted alkyl group (e.g., some of the carbons in the alkyl group can be fluorinated or perfluorinated).
- the alkyl group may comprise a linear chain of substituted (e.g., fluorinated or perfluorinated) carbons joined to a linear chain of non-substituted carbons.
- the alkyl group may include a first segment, which may include a perfluoroalkyl group, joined to a second segment, which may include a non-substituted alkyl group.
- the first and second segments may be joined directly or indirectly (e.g., by means of an ether linkage).
- the first segment of the alkyl group may be located distal to the linking group, and the second segment of the alkyl group may be located proximal to the linking group.
- the alkyl group may include a branched alkyl group and may further have one or more arylene group interrupting the alkyl backbone of the alkyl group.
- a branched or arylene-interrupted portion of the alkyl or fluorinated alkyl group is located at a point distal to the linking group and the covalent linkage to the surface.
- the covalently linked moiety may include at least one amino acid, which may include more than one type of amino acid.
- the covalently linked moiety may include a peptide or a protein.
- the covalently linked moiety may include an amino acid which may provide a zwitterionic surface to support cell growth, viability, portability, or any combination thereof.
- the covalently linked moiety may include one or more saccharides.
- the covalently linked saccharides may be mono-, di-, or polysaccharides.
- the covalently linked saccharides may be modified to introduce a reactive pairing moiety which permits coupling or elaboration for attachment to the surface.
- Exemplary reactive pairing moieties may include aldehyde, alkyne or halo moieties.
- a polysaccharide may be modified in a random fashion, wherein each of the saccharide monomers may be modified or only a portion of the saccharide monomers within the polysaccharide are modified to provide a reactive pairing moiety that may be coupled directly or indirectly to a surface.
- One exemplar may include a dextran polysaccharide, which may be coupled indirectly to a surface via an unbranched linker.
- the covalently linked moiety may include one or more amino groups.
- the amino group may be a substituted amine moiety, guanidine moiety, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic moiety or heteroaryl moiety.
- the amino containing moieties may have structures permitting pH modification of the environment within the microfluidic device, and optionally, within the sequestration pens and/or flow regions (e.g., channels).
- the coating material may comprise only one kind of covalently linked moiety or may include more than one different kind of covalently linked moiety.
- the fluoroalkyl conditioned surfaces may have a plurality of covalently linked moieties which are all the same, e.g., having the same linking group and covalent attachment to the surface, the same overall length, and the same number of fluoromethylene units comprising the fluoroalkyl moiety.
- the coating material may have more than one kind of covalently linked moiety attached to the surface.
- the coating material may include molecules having covalently linked alkyl or fluoroalkyl moieties having a specified number of methylene or fluoromethylene units and may further include a further set of molecules having covalently charged moieties attached to an alkyl or fluoroalkyl chain having a greater number of methylene or fluoromethylene units.
- the coating material having more than one kind of covalently linked moiety may be designed such that a first set of molecules which have a greater number of backbone atoms, and thus a greater length from the covalent attachment to the surface, may provide capacity to present bulkier moieties at the coated surface, while a second set of molecules having different, less sterically demanding termini and fewer backbone atoms can help to functionalize the entire substrate surface and thereby prevent undesired adhesion or contact with silicon or alumina making up the substrate itself.
- the covalently linked moieties may provide a zwitterionic surface presenting alternating charges in a random fashion on the surface.
- the covalently linked moieties may form a monolayer when covalently linked to the surface of the microfluidic device (e.g., a DEP configured substrate surface).
- the conditioned surface formed by the covalently linked moieties may have a thickness of less than 10 nm (e.g., less than 5 nm, or about 1.5 to 3.0 nm).
- the conditioned surface formed by the covalently linked moieties may have a thickness of about 10 nm to about 50 nm.
- the conditioned surface does not require a perfectly formed monolayer to be suitably functional for operation within a DEP-configured microfluidic device.
- the coating material of the microfluidic device may provide desirable electrical properties.
- one factor that impacts robustness of a surface coated with a particular coating material is intrinsic charge trapping. Different coating materials may trap electrons, which can lead to breakdown of the coating material. Defects in the coating material may increase charge trapping and lead to further breakdown of the coating material. Similarly, different coating materials have different dielectric strengths (i.e. the minimum applied electric field that results in dielectric breakdown), which may impact charge trapping.
- the coating material can have an overall structure (e.g., a densely-packed monolayer structure) that reduces or limits that amount of charge trapping.
- the coating material can impact the generation of DEP force and/or electrowetting force by a substrate in a microfluidic device.
- Various factors can alter the physical and electrical thickness of the coating material, including the manner in which the coating material is deposited on the substrate (e.g. vapor deposition, liquid phase deposition, spin coating, or electrostatic coating). The physical thickness and uniformity of the coating material can be measured using an ellipsometer.
- the coating material may have properties that are beneficial in use with biological molecules.
- coating materials that contain fluorinated (or perfluorinated) alkyl groups may provide a benefit relative to unsubstituted alkyl groups in reducing the amount of surface fouling.
- Surface fouling refers to the amount of material indiscriminately deposited on the surface of the microfluidic device, which may include permanent or semi-permanent deposition of biomaterials such as protein and degradation products, nucleic acids, and respective degradation products. Such fouling can increase the amount of adhesion of biological micro-objects to the surface.
- the composition of the conditioned surface can impact DEP force.
- Various factors can alter the physical thickness of the conditioned surface, such as the manner in which the conditioned surface is formed on the substrate (e.g. vapor deposition, liquid phase deposition, spin coating, flooding, and electrostatic coating).
- the physical thickness and uniformity of the conditioned surface can be measured using an ellipsometer.
- the conditioned surface may also have properties that are beneficial in use with biological molecules.
- a conditioned surface that contains fluorinated (or perfluorinated) carbon chains may provide a benefit relative to alkyl-terminated chains in reducing the amount of surface fouling.
- Surface fouling refers to the amount of indiscriminate material deposition on the surface of the microfluidic device, which may include permanent or semi-permanent deposition of biomaterials such as protein and its degradation products, nucleic acids and respective degradation products and the like.
- conditioned surfaces which may be used in DEP configurations are included in the table below. As can be seen, for entries 1 to 7, which were all covalently linked conditioned surfaces as described herein, the thickness as measured by ellipsometry were consistently thinner than that of entry 8, a CYTOP surface which was formed by non-covalent spin coating (N/A represents data not available throughout the table). Fouling was found to be more dependent upon the chemical nature of the surface than upon the mode of formation as the fluorinated surfaces were typically less fouling than that of alkyl (hydrocarbon) conditioned surfaces.
- C 18 Alkyl-terminated CH 3 —(CH 2 ) 17 —P ⁇ O(OH)2 N/A More fouling than phosphonate ester fluorinated layers.
- the linking group may be a siloxy linking group formed by the reaction of a siloxane-containing reagent with oxides of the substrate surface, which can include silicon oxide (e.g., for a DEP-configured substrate) or aluminum oxide or hafnium oxide (e.g., for a EW-configured substrate).
- the linking group may be a phosphonate ester formed by the reaction of a phosphonic acid containing reagent with the oxides of the substrate surface.
- the covalently linked coating material may be formed by reaction of a molecule which already contains the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device (e.g., an alkyl siloxane reagent or a fluoro-substituted alkyl siloxane reagent, which may include a perfluoroalkyl siloxane reagent), as is described below.
- the covalently linked coating material may be formed by coupling the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to a surface modifying ligand that itself is covalently linked to the surface.
- a coating material that is covalently linked to the surface of a microfluidic device (e.g., including at least one surface of the sequestration pens and/or flow regions) has a structure of Formula 1.
- the coating material may be linked covalently to oxides of the surface of a DEP-configured substrate.
- the DEP-configured substrate may comprise silicon or alumina or hafnium oxide, and oxides may be present as part of the native chemical structure of the substrate or may be introduced as discussed below.
- the coating material may be attached to the oxides via a linking group (“LG”), which may be a siloxy or phosphonate ester group formed from the reaction of a siloxane or phosphonic acid group with the oxides.
- the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device can be any of the moieties described herein.
- the linking group LG may be directly or indirectly connected to the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device. When the linking group LG is directly connected to the moiety, optional linker (“L”) is not present and n is 0. When the linking group LG is indirectly connected to the moiety, linker L is present and n is 1.
- the linker L may have a linear portion where a backbone of the linear portion may include 1 to 200 non-hydrogen atoms selected from any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art. It may be interrupted with any combination of one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L may include 10 to 20 atoms.
- the backbone of the linker L may include about 5 atoms to about 200 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms; or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms.
- the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms.
- the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art.
- a molecule of Formula 2 may be used to introduce the coating material:
- the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may be added to the surface of the substrate in a multi-step process.
- the linker L may further include a coupling group CG, as shown in Formula 3.
- the coupling group CG represents the resultant group from reaction of a reactive moiety R x and a reactive pairing moiety R px (i.e., a moiety configured to react with the reactive moiety R x ).
- a reactive moiety R x i.e., a moiety configured to react with the reactive moiety R x
- one typical coupling group CG may include a carboxamidyl group, which is the result of the reaction of an amino group with a derivative of a carboxylic acid, such as an activated ester, an acid chloride or the like.
- Other CG may include a triazolylene group, a carboxamidyl, thioamidyl, an oxime, a mercaptyl, a disulfide, an ether, or alkenyl group, or any other suitable group that may be formed upon reaction of a reactive moiety with its respective reactive pairing moiety.
- the coupling group CG may be located at the second end (i.e., the end proximal to the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device) of a linker L. In some other embodiments, the coupling group CG may interrupt the backbone of the linker L.
- the coupling group CG is triazolylene, which is the result of a reaction between an alkyne group and an azide group, either of which may be the reactive moiety R x or the reactive pairing moiety R px , as is known in the art for use in Click coupling reactions.
- a triazolylene group may also be further substituted.
- a dibenzocylcooctenyl fused triazolylene group may result from the reaction of a moiety bound to a dibenzocyclooctynyl reactive pairing moiety R px with an azido reactive moiety R x of the surface modifying molecule, which are described in more detail in the following paragraphs.
- a variety of dibenzocyclooctynyl modified molecules are known in the art or may be synthesized to incorporate a moiety configured to support cell growth, viability, portability, or any combination thereof.
- the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may be introduced by reaction of a moiety-containing reagent (Formula 5) with a substrate having a surface modifying ligand covalently linked thereto (Formula 6).
- the modified surface of Formula 4 has a surface modifying ligand attached thereto, which has a formula of -LG ⁇ (L′′)j ⁇ R x , which is linked to the oxide of the substrate and is formed similarly as described above for the conditioned surface of Formula 1.
- the surface of the substrate can be a DEP-configured substrate surface as described above, and can include oxides either native to the substrate or introduced therein.
- the linking group LG is as described above.
- the linker L′′ may have a linear portion where a backbone of the linear portion may include 1 to 100 non-hydrogen atoms selected from of any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art. It may be interrupted with any combination of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L′′ may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L′′ may include 10 to 20 carbon atoms.
- the backbone of the linker L′′ may include about 5 atoms to about 100 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms, about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms, or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms.
- the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms.
- the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art.
- a reactive moiety R x is present at the terminus of the surface modifying ligand distal to the covalent linkage of the surface modifying ligand with the surface.
- the reactive moiety R x is any suitable reactive moiety useful for coupling reactions to introduce the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device.
- the reactive moiety R x may be an azido, amino, bromo, a thiol, an activated ester, a succinimidyl or alkynyl moiety.
- the moiety-containing reagent (Formula 5) is configured to supply the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device.
- the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device of the moiety-containing reagent is linked to the surface modifying ligand by reaction of a reactive pairing moiety R px with the reactive moiety R x .
- the reactive pairing moiety R px is any suitable reactive group configured to react with the respective reactive moiety R x .
- one suitable reactive pairing moiety R px may be an alkyne and the reactive moiety R x may be an azide.
- the reactive pairing moiety R px may alternatively be an azide moiety and the respective reactive moiety R x may be alkyne.
- the reactive pairing moiety R px may be an active ester functionality and the reactive moiety R x may be an amino group. In other embodiments, the reactive pairing moiety R px may be aldehyde and the reactive moiety R x may be amino. Other reactive moiety-reactive pairing moiety combinations are possible, and these examples are in no way limiting.
- the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device of the moiety-containing reagent of Formula 5 may include any of the moieties described herein, including alkyl or fluoroalkyl (which includes perfluoroalkyl) moieties; mono- or polysaccharides (which may include but is not limited to dextran); alcohols (including but not limited to propargyl alcohol); polyalcohols, including but not limited to polyvinyl alcohol; alkylene ethers, including but not limited to polyethylene glycol; polyelectrolytes (including but not limited to polyacrylic acid or polyvinyl phosphonic acid); amino groups (including derivatives thereof, such as, but not limited to alkylated amines, hydroxyalkylated amino group, guanidinium, and heterocylic groups containing an unaromatized nitrogen ring atom, such as, but not limited to morpholinyl or piperazinyl); carboxylic acids
- the reactive pairing moiety R px may be connected to a first end of the linker L′, and the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking may be connected to a second end of the linker L′.
- Linker L′ may have a linear portion wherein a backbone of the linear portion includes 1 to 100 non-hydrogen atoms selected from of any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art. It may be interrupted with any combination of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L′ may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker L′. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L′ may include 10 to 20 atoms.
- the backbone of the linker L′ may include about 5 atoms to about 100 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms; or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms.
- the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms.
- the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art.
- the surface modifying reagent is a compound having a structure LG ⁇ (L′′) j ⁇ R x (Formula 4).
- the linking group LG links covalently to the oxides of the surface of the substrate.
- the substrate may be a DEP-configured substrate and may include silicon or alumina or hafnium oxide, and oxides may be present as part of the native chemical structure of the substrate or may be introduced as discussed herein.
- the linking group LG may be any linking group described herein, such as a siloxy or phosphonate ester group, formed from the reaction of a siloxane or phosphonic acid group with the oxide on the surface of the substrate.
- the reactive moiety R x is described above.
- the linking group LG may be attached to a first end of the linker L′′ and the reactive moiety R x may be connected to a second end of the linker L′′, which will be distal to the surface of the substrate once the surface modifying reagent has been attached to the surface as in Formula 6.
- Linker L′′ may have a linear portion wherein a backbone of the linear portion includes 1 to 100 non-hydrogen atoms selected from of any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms. It may be interrupted with any combination of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L′′ may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker L′′. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L′′ may include 10 to 20 atoms.
- the backbone of the linker L′′ may include about 5 atoms to about 100 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms, about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms, or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms.
- the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms.
- the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art.
- the coating material (or surface modifying ligand) is deposited on the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device using chemical vapor deposition.
- chemical vapor deposition the coating material can achieve densely-packed monolayers in which the molecules comprising the coating material are covalently bonded to the molecules of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device.
- molecules comprising, for example, alkyl-terminated siloxane can be vapor deposited at a temperature of at least 110° C.
- Such vapor deposition is typically performed under vacuum and in the presence of a water source, such as a hydrated sulfate salt (e.g., MgSO4.7H20).
- a water source such as a hydrated sulfate salt (e.g., MgSO4.7H20).
- a hydrated sulfate salt e.g., MgSO4.7H20.
- increasing the temperature and duration of the vapor deposition produces improved characteristics of the hydrophobic coating material.
- the vapor deposition process can be optionally improved, for example, by pre-cleaning the cover 110 , the microfluidic circuit material 116 , and/or the substrate (e.g., the inner surface 208 of the electrode activation substrate 206 of a DEP-configured substrate, or a dielectric layer of the support structure 104 of an EW-configured substrate).
- pre-cleaning can include a solvent bath, such as an acetone bath, an ethanol bath, or a combination thereof.
- the solvent bath can include sonication.
- such pre-cleaning can include treating the cover 110 , the microfluidic circuit material 116 , and/or the substrate in an oxygen plasma cleaner, which can remove various impurities, while at the same time introducing an oxidized surface (e.g. oxides at the surface, which may be covalently modified as described herein).
- the oxygen plasma cleaner can be operated, for example, under vacuum conditions, at 100 W for 60 seconds.
- liquid-phase treatments which include oxidizing agents such as hydrogen peroxide to oxidize the surface, may be used in place of an oxygen plasma cleaner.
- a mixture of hydrochloric acid and hydrogen peroxide or a mixture of sulfuric acid and hydrogen peroxide may be used in place of an oxygen plasma cleaner.
- piranha solution which may have a ratio of sulfuric acid to hydrogen peroxide in a range from about 3:1 to about 7:1
- piranha solution which may have a ratio of sulfuric acid to hydrogen peroxide in a range from about 3:1 to about 7:1
- vapor deposition is used to coat the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device 200 after the microfluidic device 200 has been assembled to form an enclosure 102 defining a microfluidic circuit 120 .
- Deposition of a coating material comprising a densely-packed monolayer on a fully-assembled microfluidic circuit 120 may be beneficial in providing various functional properties. Without intending to be limited by theory, depositing such a coating material on a fully-assembled microfluidic circuit 120 may be beneficial in preventing delamination caused by a weakened bond between the microfluidic circuit material 116 and the electrode activation substrate 206 /dielectric layer and/or the cover 110 .
- FIGS. 4A-4D depict cross-sectional views of microfluidic devices 500 comprising exemplary classes of coating materials.
- the coating materials 529 can comprise a monolayer of densely-packed molecules covalently bound to both the inner surface 508 of the substrate 504 and the inner surface 509 of the cover 510 of the microfluidic device 500 .
- the coating material 529 can be disposed on all inner surfaces 508 , 509 proximal to, and facing inwards towards, the enclosure 502 of the microfluidic device 500 , including, in some embodiments and as discussed above, the surfaces of microfluidic circuit material (not shown) used to define circuit elements and/or structures within the microfluidic device 500 .
- the coating material 529 can be disposed on only one or some of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device 500 .
- the coating material 529 comprises a monolayer of alkyl-terminated siloxane molecules, each molecule covalently bonded to the inner surfaces 508 , 509 of the microfluidic device 500 via a siloxy group.
- any of the above-discussed coating materials 529 can be used (e.g. alkyl-terminated phosphonate ester molecules).
- the alkyl group can comprise a linear chain of at least 10 carbon atoms (e.g. 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms) and, optionally, may be a substituted alkyl group.
- coating materials 529 that comprise a monolayer of densely-packed molecules can have beneficial functional characteristics for use in DEP configured microfluidic devices 500 , such as minimal charge trapping, reduced physical/electrical thickness, and a substantially uniform surface.
- the coating material 529 used to coat the inner surface(s) 508 , 509 of the microfluidic device 500 provides a functional benefit of reducing nuclei adhesion.
- the coating material 529 can comprise a fluoroalkyl group (e.g. a fluorinated alkyl group or a perfluorinated alkyl group) at its enclosure-facing terminus (i.e. the portion of the monolayer of the coating material 529 that is not bound to the inner surfaces 508 , 509 and is proximal to the enclosure 502 ).
- the coating material 529 can comprise a monolayer of fluoroalkyl-terminated siloxane or fluoroalkyl-terminated phosphonate ester, wherein the fluoroalkyl group is present at the enclosure-facing terminus of the coating material 529 .
- a coating material 529 provides a functional benefit in reduced fouling and, more generally, reduced adhesion of biological molecules such as those present on the outer membranes of nuclei.
- the coating material 529 used to coat the inner surfaces 508 , 509 of the microfluidic device 500 provides a functional benefit in presenting one or more moieties that can bind a blocking agent in a blocking solution.
- the coating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified (e.g. by reaction) to present a moiety comprising a cation (“cationic moiety”) (e.g. a quaternary ammonium group) at its enclosure-facing terminus.
- the coating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified to present a moiety comprising an anion (“anionic moiety”), such as a phosphonic acid, carboxylic acid, or sulfonic acid moiety, at its enclosure-facing terminus.
- anionic moiety such as a phosphonic acid, carboxylic acid, or sulfonic acid moiety
- the coating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified to present a mixture of cations and anions at its enclosure-facing termini.
- FIG. 4B provides a schematic illustration of a specific embodiment where the monolayer of coating material 529 comprises or has been chemically modified to present a mixture of moieties 532 comprising cations (represented with a “+”) and anions (represented with a “ ⁇ ”) at the enclosure-facing termini of its alkyl groups.
- the coating material 529 can form strong hydrogen bonds with water molecules such that the resulting water of hydration acts as a layer (or “shield”) that separates the nuclei from interactions with non-biological molecules (e.g., the silicon and/or silicon oxide of the substrate).
- the anions and cations of the coating material 529 can form ionic bonds with the charged portions of blocking agents (e.g. proteins in solution) that are present in a medium 180 (e.g. a blocking solution) in the enclosure 502 .
- blocking agents e.g. proteins in solution
- a medium 180 e.g. a blocking solution
- FIG. 4C illustrates an embodiment of FIG. 4B in which the monolayer of coating material 529 comprising anionic and cationic moieties is used to bind a blocking agent 542 .
- the charged portions i.e. the regions of the blocking agent 542 that present cations and/or anions
- the blocking agent 542 form ionic bonds with both the cationic moieties and the anionic moieties in the coating material 529 .
- the presence of the blocking agent 542 at the surface of the coating material 529 will prevent the nuclei 552 from adhering to the inner surfaces 508 , 509 of the microfluidic device 500 .
- the coating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified to present a moiety comprising a zwitterion (“zwitterionic moiety”) at its enclosure-facing terminus.
- zwitterionic moieties include: carboxybetaines, sulfobetaines, sulfamic acids, and amino acids.
- FIG. 4D illustrates an embodiment in which the coating material 529 comprises zwitterionic moieties.
- the zwitterionic moieties can form strong hydrogen bonds with water molecules such that the resulting water of hydration acts as a layer (or “shield”) that separates the nuclei from interactions with non-biological molecules (e.g., the silicon and/or silicon oxide of the substrate).
- the zwitterionic moieties can also form ionic bonds with the charged portions of a blocking agent 542 .
- the binding of the blocking agent 542 to the zwitterionic moieties can help prevent the nuclei 552 from adhering to the inner surfaces 508 , 509 of the microfluidic device 500 .
- the coating material may comprise or be chemically modified to present a blocking agent at its enclosure-facing terminus.
- the blocking agent may be an alkylene ether containing polymer, such as PEG.
- the blocking agent may be a polysaccharide, such as dextran.
- nuclei 552 may be repositioned using DEP force (e.g. OET force) and/or fluid flow in the microfluidic device 500 .
- DEP force e.g. OET force
- Such repositioning can be prior to and/or after the selection of nuclei based on specific characteristics.
- individual nuclei 552 may be repositioned to sequestration pens or other areas of the microfluidic device 500 using DEP force and then assayed (or otherwise analyzed) for a characteristic used to select the nuclei.
- individual nuclei 552 may be exported from sequestration pens or other areas of the microfluidic device using DEP force so that they can be further analyzed.
- one or more characteristics can be used to identify a cell nucleus 552 of interest that is to be selected, e.g., a cell nucleus having a pre-determined or pre-specified characteristic. The selected cell nucleus can then be repositioned for further analysis.
- the one or more characteristics can include any detectable characteristic of the cell nucleus, including morphological characteristics (e.g. size, shape, etc.), color of the cell nucleus, and/or fluorescent or visible light absorption/emission characteristics (e.g., associated with a marker, such as a fluorescently labeled marker).
- a cell nucleus/nuclei are contacted (i.e. “labelled”) with a detectable binding agent that is specific for a cell nucleus target (or analyte) of interest (which can be on the surface of or inside the cell nucleus).
- a cell nucleus/nuclei can be labelled with a detectable binding agent (e.g., a stain, fluorescently-labeled antibodies, or the like) to distinguish nuclei originating from different types of cells or to distinguish nuclei from other micro-objects in a sample.
- labelling can be performed prior to introducing the nuclei into the microfluidic device.
- labelling can be performed after introducing nuclei into the microfluidic device (e.g., after moving the nuclei into the flow region or into an isolation region in a sequestration pen).
- Detectable binding agents including any agent that binds to a target/analyte and that can be detected in the microfluidic device.
- binding agents include polypeptides (e.g., antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof, ligands, receptors, virus particles), polynucleotides (e.g., DNA probes, RNA probes, hybrid DNA/RNA probes, probes containing non-naturally occurring backbone linkages, e.g., PNA, and the like), polysaccharides, small molecules, and the like.
- binding agents include a target specific binding region attached to detectable label, e.g., a fluorescent label, where the attaching can be covalent or non-covalent (e.g., using a binding pair, e.g., biotin/streptavidin).
- the cell nuclei may include gene products that are detectable without the need for contacting them with a specific binding agent, e.g., fluorescent proteins or enzymes with detectable activity on a natural or synthetic substrate that produces a detectable product. No limitation in this regard is intended.
- one or more nuclei can be selected based on a combination of morphological characteristics (e.g. size and shape) and characteristics associated with a detectable binding agent or a detectable gene product (e.g. a quantity or intensity of a detectable binding agent or a detectable gene product).
- morphological characteristics e.g. size and shape
- characteristics associated with a detectable binding agent or a detectable gene product e.g. a quantity or intensity of a detectable binding agent or a detectable gene product.
- nuclei of anaplastic cancer cells are both larger and contain more nucleic acid than nuclei from non-cancerous cells and may be identified based on a combination of size and the intensity of a detectable binding agent that binds nucleic acid.
- nuclei may be selected automatically based on a combination of pre-specified characteristics.
- the characteristic(s) used to select nuclei may be identified using machine learning algorithms.
- an individual may annotate nuclei that belong to a specific class of nuclei and one or more machine learning algorithms may be used to computationally identify one or more characteristics that distinguish the class of nuclei from nuclei that don't belong to the same class.
- a pathologist could annotate several nuclei that belong to the same class of nuclei and a machine learning algorithm could be applied to an image of the annotated nuclei (or a set of features generated from an image of the annotated nuclei) to determine specific characteristics that distinguish (or a combination of characteristics that distinguish) the class of annotated nuclei from other nuclei.
- Suitable machine learning algorithms for this purpose include support vector machines (SVMs), neural networks (e.g. convolutional neural networks (CNNs)), and Bayesian networks. Other machine learning algorithms are known in the art.
- the microfluidic device comprises a plurality of sequestration pens in fluid connection with the flow channel, where each sequestration pen of the plurality has a corresponding isolation region.
- the flow medium introduced into the microfluidic device includes a plurality of cell nuclei (from one or more cell sources) and includes moving each of the plurality of cell nuclei into a corresponding isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- only one cell nucleus is moved to an isolation region of a sequestration pen, while in other embodiments, multiple cell nuclei are moved to an isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- any number of nuclei may be moved into each different isolation regions of the plurality of sequestration pen.
- any given sequestration pen may include no cell nucleus, one cell nucleus, or multiple cell nuclei. No limitation in this regard is intended.
- the plurality of cell nuclei may be isolated and selected in any type of chamber or other holding area of the microfluidic device.
- the method can include selecting a first sub-set of cell nuclei from the plurality of cell nuclei that have a first predetermined characteristic, and moving the selected first sub-set of cell nuclei to the corresponding isolation region(s) of a first plurality of sequestration pens in the microfluidic device.
- a second sub-set of cell nuclei from the plurality of cell nuclei that have a second predetermined characteristic can be selected and moved to the corresponding isolation region(s) of a second plurality of sequestration pens in the microfluidic device.
- a predetermined characteristic can be a positive characteristic, e.g., binding of a particular binding agent, or a negative characteristic, e.g., not binding to a particular binding agent.
- a cell nucleus Once a cell nucleus is isolated, it can be employed in any downstream analysis or process of interest and/or stored (e.g., frozen) for future use. The analysis may be done while the nuclei are within the microfluidic device or after removal/export of the cell nuclei.
- a microfluidic device containing the isolated cell nuclei in the isolation region of the sequestration pens can be stored in any convenient manner such that the cell nuclei, or the components thereof, are maintained in a state that is amenable to a desired downstream process or analysis.
- the microchip can be frozen to provide for storage of isolated cell nuclei. This process may include replacing the fluid in the microfluidic device with a storage buffer or removing the fluid.
- one or more of the isolated cell nuclei are exported from the micro-fluidic device prior to performing a subsequent analysis or process.
- This process may include the use of any number of different forces, e.g., gravitational force, magnetic force, centrifugal force, DEP force (as detailed above), to move the cell nuclei out of the isolation region and into a flow region where the cell nuclei can be exported from the device through an outlet port.
- DEP force is used to move single cell nuclei out of the sequestration pens or other areas of the microfluidic device in which they are located, thereby allowing for cell nuclei to be exported individually.
- the export process might include disassembling the microfluidic device to retrieve the cell nuclei or opening a previously closed outlet port in communication with the isolation region of a sequestration pen which converts the isolation region from an unswept region to a swept region. Flowing a fluidic medium through the isolation region of the sequestration pen will move the cell nuclei through the outlet port thereby exporting the cell nuclei from the device. It is noted that in some situations, the cell nuclei may not need to be exported intact for downstream analysis or processing, and thus the nuclei can be disrupted and the subsequent cell nuclei contents retrieved (e.g., as a sample of proteins, nucleic acids, etc.). No limitation in this regard is intended.
- the cell nuclei can be derived from any nucleated cell (or eukaryotic cell) including nuclei derived from fungi, plants, protists, animals, etc.
- cell nuclei are derived from a mammal, e.g., a human.
- the cell nuclei can be from any type of sample having nucleated cells from a desired source.
- the cell nuclei can be obtained from fresh/live/viable cells (e.g., cells isolated from a fresh tissue sample or cells that have been grown in a medium ex vivo) or from cells that may be non-viable or compromised in some way (e.g., cells recently thawed from a previously frozen biopsy sample or chemically fixed cells).
- the nuclei can be separated from the plasma membranes, cytoplasm, and extracellular proteins and components using any convenient techniques known in the art.
- the cell nuclei are derived from cells that are part of a particular tissue of a multicellular organism.
- tissue include, but are not limited to: epithelial cell types (e.g., neuronal cell types, epidermal cells, cochlear hair cells, or the like), mesodermal cell types (e.g., muscle, fat, bone marrow, blood, or the like), endodermal cell types (e.g., intestinal cells or the like), blood cells (e.g., B cells, T cells, NK cells, macrophages), or tissues exhibiting a disease phenotype (e.g., cancer cells, inflamed cells, cells infected with a bacterial, fungal, protozoan, or viral pathogen).
- epithelial cell types e.g., neuronal cell types, epidermal cells, cochlear hair cells, or the like
- mesodermal cell types e.g., muscle, fat, bone marrow, blood, or the like
- isolation of the cell nucleus may be preferable due to the impracticalities of isolating cells in their intact form.
- certain cell types of interest may be in a tissue that is not amenable to dissociation and/or have a morphology that prevents efficient isolation procedures.
- neuronal cells which have morphological characteristics (e.g., dendrites and axons) that pose significant difficulty for efficient isolation.
- the cell nuclei are derived from a cancer cell or a cell suspected of being a cancer cell, e.g., from the affected tissue of a subject diagnosed with a cancer.
- cancers in affected tissues include: breast cancer, large intestinal cancer, lung cancer, small lung cancer, stomach cancer, liver cancer, blood cancer, bone cancer, pancreatic cancer, skin cancer, head or neck cancer, cutaneous or intraocular melanoma, uterine sarcoma, ovarian cancer, rectal or colorectal cancer, anal cancer, colon cancer, fallopian tube carcinoma, endometrial carcinoma, cervical cancer, vulval cancer, vaginal carcinoma, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, esophageal cancer, small intestine cancer, endocrine cancer, thyroid cancer, parathyroid cancer, adrenal cancer, chronic or acute leukemia, soft tissue tumor, urethral cancer, penile cancer, prostate cancer, lymphocytic lymphoma, bladder
- the cell from which a cell nucleus is derived has been enriched, isolated, sorted, or otherwise manipulated prior to harvesting the cell nuclei.
- Any convenient method may be employed to achieve this, including but not limited to: antibody or binding agent-based methods (e.g., fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS), magnetic activated cell sorting (MACS), panning, and the like), apheresis, centrifugation, elutriation, density gradient centrifugation, differential cell lysis protocols, differential growth medium and/or growth scaffolds, physical isolation (e.g., a clinical biopsy sample), etc. No limitation in this regard is intended.
- FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
- MCS magnetic activated cell sorting
- panning and the like
- apheresis e.g., centrifugation, elutriation, density gradient centrifugation, differential cell lysis protocols, differential growth medium and/or growth scaffolds, physical isolation (e.g., a clinical
- Certain embodiments of the disclosed methods include harvesting one or more cell nuclei from one or more cells in a sample prior to introducing them into the microfluidic device for isolation. Any convenient cell nuclei isolation process may be employed, and generally will be dictated by the cell type from which the cell nucleus is being harvested as well as the state of the cells, e.g., whether the cells are in a viable or non-viable state.
- harvesting cell nuclei can include any one or more of the following process steps: disrupting the cytoplasmic membrane and/or cell wall of a cell to release the cell nucleus/nuclei; contacting the cell nuclei with an enzyme (e.g., DNAse, collagenase, hyaluronidase); contacting the cell nuclei with a chelating agent (e.g., EDTA); washing the released cell nucleus/nuclei to remove cellular debris and cytoplasmic components; and placing the harvested cell nucleus/nuclei in a medium compatible with maintaining the cell nucleus/nuclei in a state that is conducive for isolation in a microfluidic device (e.g., a medium with one or more buffers and/or blocking agents, e.g., BSA, serum, polymers, detergents).
- an enzyme e.g., DNAse, collagenase, hyaluronidase
- a chelating agent e.
- the cells from which the nuclei are derived are non-viable cells.
- cells derived from a formalin fixed paraffin embedded (FFPE) sample are processed to obtain a cell nuclei-containing sample that can be introduced into the microfluidic device.
- FFPE samples can be processed to obtain nuclei using any convenient protocol, including those described in PCT publication WO 2013123463 Al (which includes de-waxing and rehydrating steps, hereby incorporate by reference herein).
- the isolated cell nuclei can be used in any desired analysis or process. It is noted that while one or more assays/processes can be performed after isolation of the cell nucleus, in certain embodiments, the analysis is performed before/during the isolation step, e.g., when the detection of a particular predetermined characteristic of a cell nucleus is used to select and move the cell to an isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- the isolated cell nuclei can be used to determine a genetic characteristic or analyze gene expression (either quantitatively or qualitatively). Any convenient genetic assay may be used, including those in which the cell nuclei are kept substantially intact, e.g., fluorescent in-situ hybridization (FISH), or those in which the cell nuclei are disrupted. It is noted that the analyses may be performed on an individual isolated cell nucleus or on one or more desired populations of isolated cell nuclei. Such analyses may also be done to compare one or more genetic characteristics between a first isolated cell nucleus/population of nuclei and a second isolated cell nucleus/population of nuclei.
- FISH fluorescent in-situ hybridization
- the analyses is done to compare one or more genetic characteristic of one or more isolated cell nucleus/population of nuclei and a reference or control, e.g., the sequence of a gene known to be associated with a particular phenotype, e.g., a disease phenotype.
- genetic analysis includes extracting nucleic acids from the isolated cell nucleus/nuclei, either DNA, RNA or both, and performing one or more genetic analysis tests on the extracted nucleic acids. Extracting the nucleic acids from the isolated cell nuclei can be achieved in any convenient manner. For example, the nuclei can be lysed/disrupted and the nucleic acids recovered using nucleic acid-binding beads or other reagents. In some embodiments, specific target nucleic acids are recovered, e.g., RNA, DNA, or specific sequences of interest, e.g., from a gene of interest or a genomic region of interest.
- nuclei acids extracted from the isolated nuclei can be fragmented, e.g., by physical means or using nucleases, e.g., restriction enzymes.
- the extracted nuclei acids may be replicated, amplified, or reverse transcribed as desired and can be attached to adapters having functional sequences that can be used in downstream analysis, e.g., primer binding sites, barcodes, restriction enzyme sites, recombination sites, etc.
- nucleic acids may be extracted and analyzed in a portion of the microfluidic device that is configured for electrowetting or opto-electrowetting (OEW).
- Examples of the types of results that can be obtained include: copy number of a genetic region, a mutation (e.g., a somatic cell or inherited mutation), a duplication, a single nucleotide polymorphism, an insertion, an inversion, a nucleic acid modification, a chromosomal feature, a difference compared to a reference nucleic acid sample, epigenetic variation, gene expression (e.g., mRNA levels), and combinations thereof.
- a mutation e.g., a somatic cell or inherited mutation
- a duplication e.g., a single nucleotide polymorphism
- an insertion e.g., an inversion
- a nucleic acid modification e.g., a chromosomal feature
- epigenetic variation e.g., mRNA levels
- the genetic assay includes one or more of: nucleic acid sequencing analysis (e.g., whole genome or specific markers, such as disease markers), nucleic acid hybridization analysis, amplification reactions (e.g., PCR, RTPCR, linear amplification, etc.), and the like.
- nucleic acid sequencing analysis e.g., whole genome or specific markers, such as disease markers
- nucleic acid hybridization analysis e.g., PCR, RTPCR, linear amplification, etc.
- amplification reactions e.g., PCR, RTPCR, linear amplification, etc.
- the cell nuclei can be analyzed for a predetermined characteristic such as a marker or physical property of interest.
- a marker or physical property of interest can be used to determine the type of cell from which the nucleus was derived and/or a phenotypic state of the cell, e.g., a disease phenotype.
- cancer cells often have nuclei that are different in size and/or shape than normal cells.
- visual markers can be used to select nuclei of interest.
- the internal structure of cancer nuclei often differs from that of normal cells.
- nuclear proteins e.g., lamins A or B
- nuclear membrane proteins e.g., nuclear lamina-associated proteins, such as emerin
- fibrillarin nuclear pore proteins
- NUPs nuclear pore proteins
- histone proteins nuclear matrix proteins
- nuclear matrix proteins e.g., p84
- nuclear proteins e.g., lamins A or B
- nuclear membrane proteins e.g., nuclear lamina-associated proteins, such as emerin
- NUPs nuclear pore proteins
- histone proteins e.g., p84
- nuclear matrix proteins e.g., p84
- cell-type specific markers that are found on or in nuclei that can be used to identify nuclei originating from a cell type of interest.
- Transcription factors are a common cell-type specific marker, but they can also include related proteins that bind and/or splice RNA (such as NeuN, the marker used in the example below). Additional structural characteristics can also be analyzed, including chromatin structure (e.g., related to histone binding), chromosomal configuration, size, shape, etc.
- the isolated nuclei are used for functional studies, such as nuclear transfer for cloning, as suggested in US 20040148648; Kim J and Zaret K S, Reprogramming of human cancer cells to pluripotency for models of cancer progression. EMBO J. 2015 Mar. 12; 34(6):739-747; and Tamada H, Kikyo N, Nuclear reprogramming in mammalian somatic cell nuclear cloning. Cytogenet Genome Res. 2004; 105(2-4):285-91.
- FIG. 5 illustrates various steps performed to select nuclei in a microfluidic device according to some embodiments of the present invention. As discussed below and as can be appreciated by those skilled in the art, only some of the steps may be performed and the steps may be performed in a different order than shown. In addition, some or all of the steps discussed below may be automated.
- a plurality of cells are lysed to extract a plurality of nuclei.
- the plurality of cells are a homogeneous population of cells (i.e. the cells are all the same type of cell).
- the cells are a heterogeneous population of cells.
- a blood sample from a subject with cancer may comprise circulating tumor cells, white blood cells and red blood cells.
- a fine needle aspirate (“FNA”) tumor sample derived from a patient may contain blood cells and tissue cells as well as tumor cells.
- FNA fine needle aspirate
- a number of different lysing agents may be used to lyse the cells and extract the nuclei.
- a non-ionic detergent is used to perform cell lysis.
- a one to ten percent solution of Trition X-100 is used to perform cell lysis.
- a one to ten percent solution of NP40 is used to perform cell lysis.
- a hypotonic buffer is used to perform cell lysis.
- double distilled water (“ddH20”) is used to lyse the cells.
- a hypotonic buffer is combined with a weak detergent to lyse the cells.
- the nuclei will be lysed outside of the microfluidic device (“off-chip”), prior to importing the nuclei into the microfluidic device.
- off-chip lysis is beneficial because many cell types are difficult to manipulate within the microfluidic device.
- it may be beneficial to load cells on the microfluidic device and perform lysis within the microfluidic device.
- the microfluidic device is optionally primed with the blocking agent and/or blocking solution prior to loading cells/nuclei onto the chip.
- the microfluidic device may be primed with a blocking agent and/or blocking solution that is provided to the microfluidic device for a duration of time (i.e. perfused throughout a microfluidic circuit of the microfluidic device for a duration of time).
- a blocking agent can bind to the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device and thus block nuclei adhesion to one or more of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device.
- the microfluidic device is not primed with the blocking agent and/or blocking solution, but instead, the blocking agent and/or blocking solution is provided to the microfluidic device at the same time as the nuclei are loaded into the microfluidic device.
- the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device can comprise a covalently bound coating material, which can be any of the coating materials described herein.
- the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device can comprise a covalently bound coating material that is bound to blocking agent and/or blocking solution (e.g., via hydrogen bonds and/or ionic bonds).
- the nuclei are loaded into the microfluidic device.
- the nuclei may be introduced to the microfluidic device by providing the nuclei in a flow of medium, by using other forces (e.g. gravity) to load the nuclei, or by using a combination of a flow of medium and other forces.
- the nuclei are repositioned within the microfluidic device.
- the nuclei can be repositioned using any kind of force (e.g. gravity).
- the nuclei can be repositioned using OET force.
- the nuclei may be automatically repositioned into specific areas of the microfluidic device (e.g. sequestration pens or holding areas).
- the nuclei may be automatically identified prior to repositioning the nuclei. Methods of automatically identifying and repositioning micro-objects such as nuclei are discussed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/963,230, the entirety of which is herein incorporated by reference.
- the nuclei are optionally provided (i.e. labelled with) a selective binding agent that is used to determine one or more characteristics of some or all of the nuclei (e.g. amount of DNA in the nuclei, the cell type of the nuclei, etc.).
- the nuclei can be contacted with the selective binding agent at any time (e.g., prior to loading the nuclei on the chip, prior to repositioning the nuclei on the chip, or after repositioning the nuclei on chip but before further repositioning of the nuclei).
- the nuclei are selected based on one or more characteristics of the nuclei.
- the nuclei may be selected based on characteristics such as the morphology of the nuclei or characteristics based on the selective binding agent (e.g. the intensity of the selective binding agent).
- the characteristics used to select the nuclei may be identified through machine learning techniques.
- the selected nuclei are optionally repositioned for further analysis (e.g. additional assays, DNA sequence analysis).
- the selected nuclei may be repositioned from a flow region, such as a channel, into a sequestration pen.
- the selected nuclei may be repositioned into a channel for export and analysis.
- the selected nuclei may be transferred from a first sequestration pen to a second sequestration pen.
- the selected nuclei may be repositioned from a flow region (e.g., channel) or sequestration pen, either or both of which may have a dielectrophoresis (DEP) configuration, to an area or portion of the same microfluidic device having an electrowetting (EW) or opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration or a different device having an an electrowetting (EW) or opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration.
- the repositioning can involve using dielectrophoretic force to move the nuclei.
- nuclei that have been repositioned to a flow region, such as a channel may be further repositioned (e.g., exported) by providing a flow of medium in the channel.
- a microfluidic device (Berkeley LightsTM), having a single flow region with four parallel flow channels and approximately 1000 sequestrations pens, was flushed with 100% CO2, then primed with priming medium (i.e., Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS) +5mg/m1 BSA +0.1% Pluronic F127).
- priming medium i.e., Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS) +5mg/m1 BSA +0.1% Pluronic F127.
- Human brain tissue was snap frozen and dissected on dry ice. Small pieces of this human brain tissue was thawed, as needed, and homogenized to obtain cell nuclei.
- the nuclei were incubated with NeuN-specific antibody labeled with Alexa 485 to allow detection in the device using fluorescence emission (FITC channel). Following the incubation, stained nuclei were pelleted by centrifugation, the resulting supernatant was removed, and the stained nuclei were resuspended in blocking buffer containing Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS)+5mg/ml BSA+30% Goat Serum+1.0% Pluronic® F127 +200 U/ml DNAse. Stained nuclei were incubated in blocking buffer for 15 minutes, then flowed into the microfluidic device in the same buffer.
- DPBS Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride
- the flow channels were flushed with priming medium supplemented with 30% goat serum to remove unwanted cell nuclei and other debris.
- select nuclei were moved out of their sequestration pens and into their corresponding flow channel using OET ( FIG. 6 ), whereupon they were individually exported (by fluidic flow) from the microfluidic device into wells of a micro-titer plate.
- OET was performed with the same settings used for loading nuclei into the sequestration pens and a 30 micron OET bar (see FIG. 6 ).
- a microfluidic device (Berkeley LightsTM), having a single flow region with four parallel flow channels and approximately 1000 sequestration pens, is flushed with 100% CO2, then primed with priming medium (i.e., Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS)+70 mg/ml BSA+1.0% Pluronic F127).
- priming medium i.e., Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS)+70 mg/ml BSA+1.0% Pluronic F127.
- Human brain tissue is snap frozen and dissected on dry ice. Small pieces of this human brain tissue is thawed, as needed, and homogenized to obtain cell nuclei.
- the nuclei are incubated with NeuN-specific antibody labeled with Alexa 485 to allow detection in the device using fluorescence emission (FITC channel). Following the incubation, stained nuclei are pelleted by centrifugation, the resulting supernatant is removed, and the stained nuclei are resuspended in blocking buffer containing Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS)+70 mg/ml BSA+1.0% Pluronic® F127 +200 U/ml DNAse. Stained nuclei are incubated in blocking buffer for 15 minutes, then flowed into the microfluidic device in the same buffer.
- DPBS Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride
- stained neural nuclei are detected using the FITC channel.
- Individual neural nuclei are selected and moved into the isolation regions of sequestration pens using OET.
- OET is performed with a 10 ⁇ microscope objective, at a voltage of 8V ppk (peak-to-peak) and a frequency of 1000 kHz.
- the flow channels are flushed with priming medium supplemented with 30% goat serum to remove unwanted cell nuclei and other debris.
- select nuclei are moved out of their sequestration pens and into their corresponding flow channel using OET, whereupon they are individually exported (by fluidic flow) from the microfluidic device into wells of a micro-titer plate.
- the OET is performed with the same settings used for loading nuclei into the sequestration pens and a 30 micron OET bar.
- Exported nuclei can be subject to DNA sequencing or other downstream analyses/processes as desired.
Abstract
Description
- This application is a non-provisional of, and thus claims the benefit of and/or priority to, U.S. provisional patent application Ser. No. 62/151,334, filed on Apr. 22, 2015, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. This application cross-references U.S. application Ser. No. 15/135,707, entitled “Microfluidic Cell Culture”, filed on Apr. 22, 2016, which disclosure is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- The analysis of individual intact eukaryotic cells, or populations of isolated cells, can be hindered due to many factors, including the morphology of the cell (e.g., differentiated neurons), the source of the cell (e.g., complex tissue), or the fact that the cells have been treated with a preservative or are otherwise in a non-viable or compromised state (e.g., frozen, fixed, paraffin embedded, attached to a slide, etc.). Such difficulties have resulted in a loss of valuable information that could be gained were the cells more amenable to manipulation. Among other advantages, the present disclosure provides methods and systems for isolating individual nuclei derived from a cell sample (e.g., fixed or frozen samples), thereby enabling the analysis of cell phenotypes and genotypes from cell sources that were previously considered of limited value.
- In one aspect, the present invention relates to a method of isolating a cell nucleus. The method comprises flowing a medium comprising a cell nucleus into a flow region of a microfluidic device, wherein said flow region is in fluid connection with a first isolation region, and wherein said microfluidic device comprises a substrate configured to selectively generate forces that move micro-objects. The method further comprises moving said cell nucleus from said flow region to said first isolation region, wherein the flow of said medium in said flow region does not penetrate into said first isolation region.
- In various embodiments, moving said cell nucleus from said flow region to said first isolation region comprises using said forces selectively generated by said substrate.
- In various embodiments, moving said cell nucleus from said flow region to said first isolation region comprises tilting said microfluidic device such that gravity acts upon said cell nucleus and pulls it into or toward said first isolation region.
- In various embodiments, said flow region comprises a flow channel in fluid connection with said first isolation region, and wherein flowing a medium comprising said cell nucleus comprises flowing said medium into said flow channel.
- In various embodiments, said micro-fluidic device comprises a first sequestration pen, and wherein said first isolation region is located within said first sequestration pen.
- In various embodiments, the method further comprises detecting a characteristic of said cell nucleus.
- In various embodiments, detecting a characteristic of the cell nucleus is performed prior to said moving step of the method.
- In various embodiments, said micro-fluidic device comprises a plurality of sequestration pens in fluid connection with said flow channel, each sequestration pen of said plurality having a corresponding isolation region.
- In various embodiments, said flowing medium comprises a plurality of cell nuclei and said method further comprises moving said plurality of cell nuclei into said corresponding isolation region(s) of one or more sequestration pens of said plurality.
- In various embodiments, the method further comprises selecting a first sub-set of cell nuclei from said plurality of cell nuclei that have a first predetermined characteristic, and moving said selected first sub-set of cell nuclei to the corresponding isolation region(s) of one or more first sequestration pens of said plurality of sequestration pens.
- In various embodiments, the method further comprises selecting at least a second sub- set of cell nuclei from said plurality of cell nuclei that have a second predetermined characteristic, and moving said selected second sub-set of cell nuclei to the corresponding isolation region(s) of one or more second sequestration pens of said plurality of sequestration pens.
- In various embodiments, only one cell nucleus is moved to an isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- In various embodiments, said cell nuclei are contacted with a detectable binding agent.
- In various embodiments, said binding agent is an antibody.
- In various embodiments, said binding agent comprises a fluorescent label.
- In various embodiments, moving said nuclei comprises generating dielectrophoresis (DEP) forces that attract or repel said cell nucleus.
- In various embodiments, the method further comprises generating said DEP forces comprises activating DEP electrodes located at the surface of said substrate.
- In various embodiments, said DEP electrodes are optically actuated.
- In various embodiments, said DEP electrodes are virtual electrodes.
- In various embodiments, said DEP electrodes are phototransistors.
- In various embodiments, said DEP electrodes is controlled by a photo-actuated transistor.
- In various embodiments, said DEP electrodes is controlled by an electrically-actuated transistor.
- In various embodiments, said DEP electrodes is controlled independently of the other DEP electrodes.
- In various embodiments, the method further comprises determining a genetic characteristic of one or more of said isolated cell nuclei.
- In various embodiments, said determining step comprises extracting nucleic acids from said one or more of said isolated cell nuclei and performing one or more genetic analysis tests on said nucleic acids.
- In various embodiments, said genetic characteristic is selected from the group consisting of: copy number of a genetic region, a mutation, a duplication, a single nucleotide polymorphism, an insertion, an inversion, a nucleic acid modification, a chromosomal feature, a difference compared to a reference nucleic acid sample, epigenetic variation, and combinations thereof.
- In various embodiments, said one or more of said isolated cell nuclei are exported from said micro-fluidic device prior to performing said determining step.
- In various embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from a eukaryotic cell selected from the group consisting of: fungi, plants, protists, and animals.
- In various embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from a mammal or a human.
- In various embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from a tissue selected from the group consisting of: epithelial cell types (e.g., neuronal cell types, epidermal cells, cochlear hair cells, or the like), mesodermal cell types (e.g., muscle, fat, bone marrow, blood, or the like), endodermal cell types (e.g., intestinal cells or the like), blood cells (e.g., B cells, T cells, NK cells, macrophages), or tissues exhibiting a disease phenotype (e.g., cancer cells, inflamed cells, cells infected with a bacterial, fungal, protozoan, or viral pathogen).
- In various embodiments, the method further comprises comprising harvesting said cell nuclei from one or more cells.
- In various embodiments, said harvesting comprises one or more of: disrupting the cytoplasmic membrane and/or cell wall of said cell; contacting said cell nuclei with an enzyme (e.g., DNAse, collagenase, hyaluronidase); contacting said cell nuclei with a chelating agent (e.g., EDTA); and contacting said cell nuclei with one or more blocking agents (e.g., BSA, serum, polymers, detergents).
- In various embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from live cells.
- In various embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from non-viable cells.
- In various embodiments, said non-viable cells are cells that have been frozen and thawed.
- In various embodiments, said non-viable cells are cells that have been chemically fixed.
- In various embodiments, the non-viable cells are derived from a formalin fixed paraffin embedded (FFPE) sample.
- In various embodiments, the method further comprises de-waxing and rehydrating the sample.
- In various embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from a cancer cell.
- In various embodiments, the cancer is selected from the group consisting of: breast cancer, large intestinal cancer, lung cancer, small lung cancer, stomach cancer, liver cancer, blood cancer, bone cancer, pancreatic cancer, skin cancer, head or neck cancer, cutaneous or intraocular melanoma, uterine sarcoma, ovarian cancer, rectal or colorectal cancer, anal cancer, colon cancer, fallopian tube carcinoma, endometrial carcinoma, cervical cancer, vulval cancer, vaginal carcinoma, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, esophageal cancer, small intestine cancer, endocrine cancer, thyroid cancer, parathyroid cancer, adrenal cancer, chronic or acute leukemia, soft tissue tumor, urethral cancer, penile cancer, prostate cancer, lymphocytic lymphoma, bladder carcinoma, kidney cancer, ureter cancer, renal carcinoma, renal pelvic carcinoma, CNS tumor, primary CNS lymphoma, bone marrow tumor, brain stem nerve gliomas, pituitary adenoma, testicular cancer, oral cancer, pharyngeal cancer, and uveal melanoma.
- In various embodiments, the flow region, flow channel, isolation regions, and/or sequestration pens are pre-treated with a blocking solution to prevent or reduce nuclei adherence.
- In various embodiments, the blocking solution comprises one or more of: serum, BSA, polymer, detergent, enzymes, or any combination thereof.
- In various embodiments, the microfluidic device comprises a substrate surface and the blocking solution comprises a blocking agent that binds to substrate surface.
- In various embodiments, the microfluidic device comprises a substrate surface that comprises a coating material.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and an alkyl moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate.
- In various embodiments, the alkyl moiety is a fluoroalkyl group.
- In various embodiments, the alkyl moiety is a perfluoroalkyl group.
- In various embodiments, the linking group is a siloxy linking group.
- In various embodiments, the alkyl moiety comprises a linear chain of carbons comprising at least 10 carbon atoms (e.g., at least 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms).
- In various embodiments, the molecules of the coating material form a densely-packed monolayer structure.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a cationic moiety and/or an anionic moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate.
- In various embodiments, the cationic moiety comprises a quaternary ammonium group.
- In various embodiments, the anionic moiety comprises a phosphonic acid, carboxylic acid, or sulfonic acid.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a zwitterionic moiety (e.g., capable of ionically bonding with a blocking agent).
- In various embodiments, the zwitterionic moiety is selected from carboxybetaines, sulfobetaines, sulfamic acids, and amino acids.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties, saccharide moieties, or amino acid moieties.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises dextran.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises poly-ethylene glycol.
- In another aspect, the present invention relates to a method of identifying a cell nucleus associated with one or more characteristics wherein the cell nucleus is identified within a microfluidic device. The method further comprises repositioning said cell nucleus within the microfluidic device using dielectrophoretic force responsive to identifying that the cell nucleus is associated with a characteristic.
- In various embodiments, the microfluidic device comprises a plurality of inner surfaces, wherein the plurality of inner surfaces have been treated with a blocking solution to prevent or reduce nuclei adherence.
- In various embodiments, the blocking solution comprises a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties.
- In various embodiments, the polymer comprises polyethylene glycol.
- In various embodiments, the blocking solution comprises a polymer comprising saccharide moieties.
- In various embodiments, the blocking solution comprises dextran.
- In various embodiments, the blocking solution comprises a polymer comprising amino acid moieties.
- In various embodiments, the blocking solution comprises albumin.
- In various embodiments, the microfluidic device comprises a substrate surface that has been coated with a coating material.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and an alkyl moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate surface.
- In various embodiments, the alkyl moiety is a fluoroalkyl group.
- In various embodiments, the alkyl moiety is a perfluoroalkyl group.
- In various embodiments, the linking group is a siloxy linking group.
- In various embodiments, the alkyl moiety comprises a linear chain of carbons comprising at least 10 carbon atoms (e.g., at least 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms).
- In various embodiments, the molecules of the coating material form a densely-packed monolayer structure.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a cationic moiety and/or an anionic moiety, wherein the linking group is covalently bonded to the substrate surface.
- In various embodiments, the cationic moiety comprises a quaternary ammonium group.
- In various embodiments, the anionic moiety comprises a phosphonic acid, carboxylic acid, or sulfonic acid.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises molecules having a linking group and a zwitterionic moiety (: e.g., capable of ionically bonding with a blocking agent).
- In various embodiments, the zwitterionic moiety is selected from carboxybetaines, sulfobetaines, sulfamic acids, and amino acids.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties, saccharide moieties, or amino acid moieties.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises dextran.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises poly-ethylene glycol.
- In various embodiments, the coating material comprises albumin.
- In various embodiments, the one or more characteristics include the morphology of the cell nuclei.
- In various embodiments, the one or more characteristics include the cell nucleus being labelled with a detectable binding agent.
- In various embodiments, the one or more characteristics include the intensity of the binding agent.
- In various embodiments, the one or more characteristics are identified using a machine learning algorithm.
- In various embodiments, the microfluidic device comprises a flow region and a first sequestration pen, and wherein repositioning the cell nucleus in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nucleus from the flow region to the first sequestration pen using dielectrophoretic force.
- In various embodiments, the microfluidic device comprises a first sequestration pen and a second sequestration pen, and repositioning the cell nucleus in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nucleus from the first sequestration pen to the second sequestration pen using dielectrophoretic force.
- In various embodiments, repositioning the cell nuclei in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nuclei to a portion of the microfluidic device for export using dielectrophoretic force.
- In various embodiments, repositioning the cell nuclei in the microfluidic device comprises moving the cell nuclei to a portion of the microfluidic device configured for electrowetting using dielectrophoretic force.
-
FIG. 1 illustrates an example of a system for use with a microfluidic device and associated control equipment according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIGS. 2A and 2B illustrate a microfluidic device according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIGS. 2C and 2D illustrate sequestration pens according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 2E illustrates a detailed sequestration pen according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 2F illustrates a microfluidic device according to an embodiment of the invention. -
FIG. 3A illustrates a specific example of a system for use with a microfluidic device and associated control equipment according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 3B illustrates an exemplary analog voltage divider circuit according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 3C illustrates an exemplary GUI configured to plot temperature and waveform data according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 3D illustrates an imaging device according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 3E illustrates the communications between an imaging module and a light modulating subsystem to project patterns of light according to some embodiments of the invention. -
FIGS. 4A, 4B, 4C and 4D illustrate inner surfaces of a microfluidic device and blocking agents according to various specific embodiments of the invention. -
FIG. 5 illustrates steps performed to select nuclei according to a specific embodiment of the invention. -
FIG. 6 shows an image of a sequestration pen of a microfluidic device according to the present disclosure, with a cell nucleus stained with anti-NeuN-FITC antibody under visible light (left) and fluorescent light to detect FITC (right). -
FIG. 7 shows the cell nucleus ofFIG. 6 after movement using OET. - This specification describes exemplary embodiments and applications of the invention. The invention, however, is not limited to these exemplary embodiments and applications or to the manner in which the exemplary embodiments and applications operate or are described herein. Moreover, the figures may show simplified or partial views, and the dimensions of elements in the figures may be exaggerated or otherwise not in proportion. In addition, as the terms “on,” “attached to,” “connected to,” “coupled to,” or similar words are used herein, one element (e.g., a material, a layer, a substrate, etc.) can be “on,” “attached to,” “connected to,” or “coupled to” another element regardless of whether the one element is directly on, attached to, connected to, or coupled to the other element or there are one or more intervening elements between the one element and the other element. In addition, where reference is made to a list of elements (e.g., elements a, b, c), such reference is intended to include any one of the listed elements by itself, any combination of less than all of the listed elements, and/or a combination of all of the listed elements.
- Section divisions in the specification are for ease of review only and do not limit any combination of elements discussed.
- As used herein, “substantially” means sufficient to work for the intended purpose. The term “substantially” thus allows for minor, insignificant variations from an absolute or perfect state, dimension, measurement, result, or the like such as would be expected by a person of ordinary skill in the field but that do not appreciably affect overall performance. When used with respect to numerical values or parameters or characteristics that can be expressed as numerical values, “substantially” means within ten percent.
- As used herein, the term “ones” means more than one. As used herein, the term “plurality” can be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more.
- As used herein, the term “disposed” encompasses within its meaning “located.”
- As used herein, a “microfluidic device” or “microfluidic apparatus” is a device that includes one or more discrete microfluidic circuits configured to hold a fluid, each microfluidic circuit comprised of fluidically interconnected circuit elements, including but not limited to region(s), flow path(s), channel(s), chamber(s), and/or pen(s), and at least two ports configured to allow the fluid (and, optionally, micro-objects suspended in the fluid) to flow into and/or out of the microfluidic device. Typically, a microfluidic circuit of a microfluidic device will include at least one microfluidic channel and at least one chamber, and will hold a volume of fluid of less than about 1 mL, e.g., less than about 750, 500, 250, 200, 150, 100, 75, 50, 25, 20, 15, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 μL. In certain embodiments, the microfluidic circuit holds about 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 2-5, 2-8, 2-10, 2-12, 2-15, 2-20, 5-20, 5-30, 5-40, 5-50, 10-50, 10-75, 10-100, 20-100, 20-150, 20-200, 50-200, 50-250, or 50-300 μL.
- As used herein, a “nanofluidic device” or “nanofluidic apparatus” is a type of microfluidic device having a microfluidic circuit that contains at least one circuit element configured to hold a volume of fluid of less than about 1μL, e.g., less than about 750, 500, 250, 200, 150, 100, 75, 50, 25, 20, 15, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 nL or less. Typically, a nanofluidic device will comprise a plurality of circuit elements (e.g., at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10,000, or more). In certain embodiments, one or more (e.g., all) of the at least one circuit elements is configured to hold a volume of fluid of about 100 pL to 1 nL, 100 pL to 2 nL, 100 pL to 5 nL, 250 pL to 2 nL, 250 pL to 5 nL, 250 pL to 10 nL, 500 pL to 5 nL, 500 pL to 10 nL, 500 pL to 15 nL, 750 pL to 10 nL, 750 pL to 15 nL, 750 pL to 20 nL, 1 to 10 nL, 1 to 15 nL, 1 to 20 nL, 1 to 25 nL, or 1 to 50 nL. In other embodiments, one or more (e.g., all) of the at least one circuit elements is configured to hold a volume of fluid of about 100 to 200 nL, 100 to 300 nL, 100 to 400 nL, 100 to 500 nL, 200 to 300 nL, 200 to 400 nL, 200 to 500 nL, 200 to 600 nL, 200 to 700 nL, 250 to 400 nL, 250 to 500 nL, 250 to 600 nL, or 250 to 750 nL.
- A “microfluidic channel” or “flow channel” as used herein refers to flow region of a microfluidic device having a length that is significantly longer than both the horizontal and vertical dimensions. For example, the flow channel can be at least 5 times the length of either the horizontal or vertical dimension, e.g., at least 10 times the length, at least 25 times the length, at least 100 times the length, at least 200 times the length, at least 300 times the length, at least 400 times the length, at least 500 times the length, or longer. In some embodiments, the length of a flow channel is in the range of from about 20,000 microns to about 100,000 microns, including any range therebetween. In some embodiments, the horizontal dimension is in the range of from about 100 microns to about 1000 microns (e.g., about 150 to about 500 microns) and the vertical dimension is in the range of from about 25 microns to about 200 microns, e.g., from about 40 to about 150 microns. It is noted that a flow channel may have a variety of different spatial configurations in a microfluidic device, and thus is not restricted to a perfectly linear element. For example, a flow channel may be, or include one or more sections having, the following configurations: curve, bend, spiral, incline, decline, fork (e.g., multiple different flow paths), and any combination thereof. In addition, a flow channel may have different cross-sectional areas along its path, widening and constricting to provide a desired fluid flow therein.
- As used herein, the term “obstruction” refers generally to a bump or similar type of structure that is sufficiently large so as to partially (but not completely) impede movement of target micro-objects between two different regions or circuit elements in a microfluidic device. The two different regions/circuit elements can be, for example, a microfluidic sequestration pen and a microfluidic channel, or a connection region and an isolation region of a microfluidic sequestration pen.
- As used herein, the term “constriction” refers generally to a narrowing of a width of a circuit element (or an interface between two circuit elements) in a microfluidic device. The constriction can be located, for example, at the interface between a microfluidic sequestration pen and a microfluidic channel, or at the interface between an isolation region and a connection region of a microfluidic sequestration pen.
- As used herein, the term “transparent” refers to a material which allows visible light to pass through without substantially altering the light as is passes through.
- As used herein, the term “micro-object” refers generally to any microscopic object that may be isolated and collected in accordance with the present invention. Non-limiting examples of micro-objects include: inanimate micro-objects such as microparticles; microbeads (e.g., polystyrene beads, Luminex™ beads, or the like); magnetic beads; microrods; microwires; quantum dots, and the like; biological micro-objects such as cells (e.g., embryos, oocytes, sperm cells, cells dissociated from a tissue, eukaryotic cells, protist cells, animal cells, mammalian cells, human cells, immunological cells including but not limited to T cells, B cells, Natural Killer Cells, Macrophages, Dendritic Cells and the like, hybridomas, cultured cells, cells from a cell line, cancer cells including but not limited to circulating tumor cells, infected cells, transfected and/or transformed cells including but not limited to CHO cells, reporter cells, prokaryotic cell, and the like); biological organelles (e.g. nuclei); vesicles, or complexes; synthetic vesicles; liposomes (e.g., synthetic or derived from membrane preparations); lipid nanorafts (as described in Ritchie et al. (2009) “Reconstitution of Membrane Proteins in Phospholipid Bilayer Nanodiscs,” Methods Enzymol., 464:211-231), and the like; or a combination of inanimate micro-objects and biological micro-objects (e.g., microbeads attached to cells, liposome-coated micro-beads, liposome-coated magnetic beads, or the like). Beads may further have other moieties/molecules covalently or non-covalently attached, such as fluorescent labels, proteins, small molecule signaling moieties, antigens, or chemical/biological species capable of use in an assay.
- As used herein, the term “maintaining (a) cell(s)” refers to providing an environment comprising both fluidic and gaseous components and, optionally a surface, that provides the conditions necessary to keep the cells viable and/or expanding.
- A “component” of a fluidic medium is any chemical or biochemical molecule present in the medium, including solvent molecules, ions, small molecules, antibiotics, nucleotides and nucleosides, nucleic acids, amino acids, peptides, proteins, sugars, carbohydrates, lipids, fatty acids, cholesterol, metabolites, or the like.
- As used herein in reference to fluidic media, “diffuse” and “diffusion” refer to thermodynamic movement of a component of fluidic medium down a concentration gradient.
- The phrase “flow of a medium” means bulk movement of a fluidic medium primarily due to any mechanism other than diffusion. For example, flow of a medium can involve movement of the fluidic medium from one point to another point due to a pressure differential between the points. Such flow can include a continuous, pulsed, periodic, random, intermittent, or reciprocating flow of the liquid, or any combination thereof. When one fluidic medium flows into another fluidic medium, turbulence and mixing of the media can result.
- The phrase “substantially no flow” refers to a rate of flow of a fluidic medium that, averaged over time, is less than the rate of diffusion of components of a material (e.g., an analyte of interest) into or within the fluidic medium. The rate of diffusion of components of such a material can depend on, for example, temperature, the size of the components, and the strength of interactions between the components and the fluidic medium.
- As used herein in reference to different regions within a microfluidic device, the phrase “fluidically connected” means that, when the different regions are substantially filled with fluid, such as fluidic media, the fluid in each of the regions is connected so as to form a single body of fluid. This does not mean that the fluids (or fluidic media) in the different regions are necessarily identical in composition. Rather, the fluids in different fluidically connected regions of a microfluidic device can have different compositions (e.g., different concentrations of solutes, such as proteins, carbohydrates, ions, or other molecules) which are in flux as solutes move down their respective concentration gradients and/or fluids flow through the device.
- A microfluidic (or nanofluidic) device can comprise “swept” regions and “unswept” regions. As used herein, a “swept” region is comprised of one or more fluidically interconnected circuit elements of a microfluidic circuit, each of which experiences a flow of medium when fluid is flowing through the microfluidic circuit. The circuit elements of a swept region can include, for example, regions, channels, and all or parts of chambers. As used herein, an “unswept” region is comprised of one or more fluidically interconnected circuit element of a microfluidic circuit, each of which experiences substantially no flux of fluid when fluid is flowing through the microfluidic circuit. An unswept region can be fluidically connected to a swept region, provided the fluidic connections are structured to enable diffusion but substantially no flow of media between the swept region and the unswept region. The microfluidic device can thus be structured to substantially isolate an unswept region from a flow of medium in a swept region, while enabling substantially only diffusive fluidic communication between the swept region and the unswept region. For example, a flow channel of a micro-fluidic device is an example of a swept region while an isolation region (described in further detail below) of a microfluidic device is an example of an unswept region.
- As used herein, a “flow path” refers to one or more fluidically connected circuit elements (e.g. channel(s), region(s), chamber(s) and the like) that define, and are subject to, the trajectory of a flow of medium. A flow path is thus an example of a swept region of a microfluidic device. Other circuit elements (e.g., unswept regions) may be fluidically connected with the circuit elements that comprise the flow path without being subject to the flow of medium in the flow path.
- The capability of biological micro-objects (e.g., biological cells) to produce specific biological materials (e.g., proteins, such as antibodies) can be assayed in such a microfluidic device. In a specific embodiment of an assay, sample material comprising biological micro-objects (e.g., cells) to be assayed for production of an analyte of interest can be loaded into a swept region of the microfluidic device. Ones of the biological micro-objects (e.g., mammalian cells, such as human cells) can be selected for particular characteristics and disposed in unswept regions. The remaining sample material can then be flowed out of the swept region and an assay material flowed into the swept region. Because the selected biological micro- objects are in unswept regions, the selected biological micro-objects are not substantially affected by the flowing out of the remaining sample material or the flowing in of the assay material. The selected biological micro-objects can be allowed to produce the analyte of interest, which can diffuse from the unswept regions into the swept region, where the analyte of interest can react with the assay material to produce localized detectable reactions, each of which can be correlated to a particular unswept region. Any unswept region associated with a detected reaction can be analyzed to determine which, if any, of the biological micro-objects in the unswept region are sufficient producers of the analyte of interest.
- Microfluidic devices and systems for operating and observing such devices.
FIG. 1 illustrates an example of asystem 150 which can be used to control a microfluidic device 100 (e.g. a microfluidic device of the present invention) in the practice of the present invention. A perspective view of themicrofluidic device 100 is shown having a partial cut-away of itscover 110 to provide a partial view into themicrofluidic device 100. Themicrofluidic device 100 generally comprises amicrofluidic circuit 120 comprising aflow path 106 through which afluidic medium 180 can flow, optionally carrying one or more micro-objects (not shown) into and/or through themicrofluidic circuit 120. Although a singlemicrofluidic circuit 120 is illustrated inFIG. 1 , suitable microfluidic devices can include a plurality (e.g., 2 or 3) of such microfluidic circuits. Regardless, themicrofluidic device 100 can be configured to be a nanofluidic device. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 1 , themicrofluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality of microfluidic sequestration pens 124, 126, 128, and 130, each having one or more openings in fluidic communication withflow path 106. As discussed further below, the microfluidic sequestration pens comprise various features and structures that have been optimized for retaining micro-objects in the microfluidic device, such asmicrofluidic device 100, even when a medium 180 is flowing through theflow path 106. Before turning to the foregoing, however, a brief description ofmicrofluidic device 100 andsystem 150 is provided. - As generally illustrated in
FIG. 1 , themicrofluidic circuit 120 is defined by anenclosure 102. Although theenclosure 102 can be physically structured in different configurations, in the example shown inFIG. 1 theenclosure 102 is depicted as comprising a support structure 104 (e.g., a base), amicrofluidic circuit structure 108, and acover 110. Thesupport structure 104,microfluidic circuit structure 108, and cover 110 can be attached to each other. For example, themicrofluidic circuit structure 108 can be disposed on aninner surface 109 of thesupport structure 104, and thecover 110 can be disposed over themicrofluidic circuit structure 108. Together with thesupport structure 104 and cover 110, themicrofluidic circuit structure 108 can define the elements of themicrofluidic circuit 120 and theenclosure 102. Depending on the embodiment, the height of the enclosure 102 (i.e. the distance from thecover 110 to the support structure 104) can range from 40 microns to 2 mm. In most embodiments, the height of theenclosure 102 will range from 30-50 microns. - The
support structure 104 can be at the bottom and thecover 110 at the top of themicrofluidic circuit 120 as illustrated inFIG. 1 . Alternatively, thesupport structure 104 and thecover 110 can be configured in other orientations. For example, thesupport structure 104 can be at the top and thecover 110 at the bottom of themicrofluidic circuit 120. Regardless, there can be one ormore ports 107 each comprising a passage into or out of theenclosure 102. Examples of a passage include a valve, a gate, a pass-through hole, or the like. As illustrated,port 107 is a pass-through hole created by a gap in themicrofluidic circuit structure 108. However, theport 107 can be situated in other components of theenclosure 102, such as thecover 110. Only oneport 107 is illustrated inFIG. 1 but themicrofluidic circuit 120 can have two ormore ports 107. For example, there can be afirst port 107 that functions as an inlet for fluid entering themicrofluidic circuit 120, and there can be asecond port 107 that functions as an outlet for fluid exiting themicrofluidic circuit 120. Whether aport 107 function as an inlet or an outlet can depend upon the direction that fluid flows throughflow path 106. - The
support structure 104 can comprise one or more electrodes (not shown) and a substrate or a plurality of interconnected substrates. For example, thesupport structure 104 can comprise one or more semiconductor substrates, each of which is electrically connected to an electrode (e.g., all or a subset of the semiconductor substrates can be electrically connected to a single electrode). Thesupport structure 104 can further comprise a printed circuit board assembly (“PCBA”). For example, the semiconductor substrate(s) can be mounted on a PCBA. - The
microfluidic circuit structure 108 can define circuit elements (e.g. chambers, sequestration pens and channels) of themicrofluidic circuit 120. Such circuit elements can comprise spaces or regions that can be fluidly interconnected whenmicrofluidic circuit 120 is filled with fluid, such as flow channels, chambers, pens, traps, and the like. In themicrofluidic circuit 120 illustrated inFIG. 1 , themicrofluidic circuit structure 108 comprises aframe 114 and amicrofluidic circuit material 116. Theframe 114 can partially or completely enclose themicrofluidic circuit material 116. Theframe 114 can be, for example, a relatively rigid structure substantially surrounding themicrofluidic circuit material 116. For example, theframe 114 can comprise a metal material. - The
microfluidic circuit material 116 can be patterned with cavities or the like to define circuit elements and interconnections of themicrofluidic circuit 120. Themicrofluidic circuit material 116 can comprise a flexible material, such as a flexible polymer (e.g. rubber, plastic, elastomer, silicone, organosilicone, such as polydimethylsiloxane (“PDMS”), or the like), which can be gas permeable. Other examples of materials that can composemicrofluidic circuit material 116 include molded glass, a patternable material such as a silicone polymer (e.g. photo- patternable silicone or “PPS”), photo-resist (e.g., an expoxy-based photo-resist such as SU8), or the like. In some embodiments, such materials—and thus themicrofluidic circuit material 116—can be rigid and/or substantially impermeable to gas. Regardless,microfluidic circuit material 116 can be disposed on thesupport structure 104 and inside theframe 114. - The
cover 110 can be an integral part of theframe 114 and/or themicrofluidic circuit material 116. Alternatively, thecover 110 can be a structurally distinct element, as illustrated inFIG. 1 . Thecover 110 can comprise the same or different materials than theframe 114 and/or themicrofluidic circuit material 116. Similarly, thesupport structure 104 can be a separate structure from theframe 114 ormicrofluidic circuit material 116 as illustrated, or an integral part of theframe 114 ormicrofluidic circuit material 116. Likewise theframe 114 andmicrofluidic circuit material 116 can be separate structures as shown inFIG. 1 or integral portions of the same structure. - In some embodiments, the
cover 110 can comprise a rigid material. The rigid material may be glass or a material with similar properties. In some embodiments, thecover 110 can comprise a deformable material. The deformable material can be a polymer, such as PDMS. In some embodiments, thecover 110 can comprise both rigid and deformable materials. For example, one or more portions of cover 110 (e.g., one or more portions positioned over sequestration pens 124, 126, 128, 130) can comprise a deformable material that interfaces with rigid materials of thecover 110. In some embodiments, thecover 110 can further include one or more electrodes. The one or more electrodes can comprise a conductive oxide, such as indium-tin-oxide (ITO), which may be coated on glass or a similarly insulating material. Alternatively, the one or more electrodes can be flexible electrodes, such as single-walled nanotubes, multi-walled nanotubes, nanowires, clusters of electrically conductive nanoparticles, or combinations thereof, embedded in a deformable material, such as a polymer (e.g., PDMS). Flexible electrodes that can be used in microfluidic devices have been described, for example, in U.S. 2012/0325665 (Chiou et al.), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, thecover 110 can be modified (e.g., by conditioning all or part of a surface that faces inward toward the microfluidic circuit 120) to support cell adhesion, viability and/or growth. The modification may include a coating of a synthetic or natural polymer. In some embodiments, thecover 110 and/or thesupport structure 104 can be transparent to light. Thecover 110 may also include at least one material that is gas permeable (e.g., PDMS or PPS). -
FIG. 1 also shows asystem 150 for operating and controlling microfluidic devices, such asmicrofluidic device 100.System 150, as illustrated, includes anelectrical power source 192, an imaging device 194, and atilting device 190. - The
electrical power source 192 can provide electric power to themicrofluidic device 100 and/or tiltingdevice 190, providing biasing voltages or currents as needed. Theelectrical power source 192 can, for example, comprise one or more alternating current (AC) and/or direct current (DC) voltage or current sources. The imaging device 194 can comprise a device, such as a digital camera, for capturing images insidemicrofluidic circuit 120. In some instances, the imaging device 194 further comprises a detector having a fast frame rate and/or high sensitivity (e.g. for low light applications). The imaging device 194 can also include a mechanism for directing stimulating radiation and/or light beams into themicrofluidic circuit 120 and collecting radiation and/or light beams reflected or emitted from the microfluidic circuit 120 (or micro-objects contained therein). The emitted light beams may be in the visible spectrum and may, e.g., include fluorescent emissions. The reflected light beams may include reflected emissions originating from an LED or a wide spectrum lamp, such as a mercury lamp (e.g. a high pressure mercury lamp) or a Xenon arc lamp. As discussed with respect toFIG. 3 , the imaging device 194 may further include a microscope (or an optical train), which may or may not include an eyepiece. -
System 150 further comprises atilting device 190 configured to rotate amicrofluidic device 100 about one or more axes of rotation. In some embodiments, thetilting device 190 is configured to support and/or hold theenclosure 102 comprising themicrofluidic circuit 120 about at least one axis such that the microfluidic device 100 (and thus the microfluidic circuit 120) can be held in a level orientation (i.e. at 0° relative to x- and y-axes), a vertical orientation (i.e. at 90° relative to the x-axis and/or the y-axis), or any orientation therebetween. The orientation of the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120) relative to an axis is referred to herein as the “tilt” of the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120). For example, thetilting device 190 can tilt themicrofluidic device 100 at 0.1°, 0.2°, 0.3°, 0.4°, 0.5°, 0.6°, 0.7°, 0.8°, 0.9°, 1°, 2°, 3°, 4°, 5°, 10°, 15°, 20°, 25°, 30°, 35°, 40°, 45°, 50°, 55°, 60°, 65°, 70°, 75°, 80°, 90° relative to the x-axis or any degree therebetween. The level orientation (and thus the x- and y-axes) is defined as normal to a vertical axis defined by the force of gravity. The tilting device can also tilt the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120) to any degree greater than 90° relative to the x-axis and/or y-axis, or tilt the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120) 180° relative to the x-axis or the y-axis in order to fully invert the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120). Similarly, in some embodiments, thetilting device 190 tilts the microfluidic device 100 (and the microfluidic circuit 120) about an axis of rotation defined byflow path 106 or some other portion ofmicrofluidic circuit 120. - In some instances, the
microfluidic device 100 is tilted into a vertical orientation such that theflow path 106 is positioned above or below one or more sequestration pens. The term “above” as used herein denotes that theflow path 106 is positioned higher than the one or more sequestration pens on a vertical axis defined by the force of gravity (i.e. an object in a sequestration pen above aflow path 106 would have a higher gravitational potential energy than an object in the flow path). The term “below” as used herein denotes that theflow path 106 is positioned lower than the one or more sequestration pens on a vertical axis defined by the force of gravity (i.e. an object in a sequestration pen below aflow path 106 would have a lower gravitational potential energy than an object in the flow path). - In some instances, the
tilting device 190 tilts themicrofluidic device 100 about an axis that is parallel to theflow path 106. Moreover, themicrofluidic device 100 can be tilted to an angle of less than 90° such that theflow path 106 is located above or below one or more sequestration pens without being located directly above or below the sequestration pens. In other instances, thetilting device 190 tilts themicrofluidic device 100 about an axis perpendicular to theflow path 106. In still other instances, thetilting device 190 tilts themicrofluidic device 100 about an axis that is neither parallel nor perpendicular to theflow path 106. -
System 150 can further include amedia source 178. The media source 178 (e.g., a container, reservoir, or the like) can comprise multiple sections or containers, each for holding adifferent fluidic medium 180. Thus, themedia source 178 can be a device that is outside of and separate from themicrofluidic device 100, as illustrated inFIG. 1 . Alternatively, themedia source 178 can be located in whole or in part inside theenclosure 102 of themicrofluidic device 100. For example, themedia source 178 can comprise reservoirs that are part of themicrofluidic device 100. -
FIG. 1 also illustrates simplified block diagram depictions of examples of control and monitoring equipment 152 that constitute part ofsystem 150 and can be utilized in conjunction with amicrofluidic device 100. As shown, examples of such control and monitoring equipment 152 include amaster controller 154 comprising amedia module 160 for controlling themedia source 178, amotive module 162 for controlling movement and/or selection of micro-objects (not shown) and/or medium (e.g., droplets of medium) in themicrofluidic circuit 120, animaging module 164 for controlling an imaging device 194 (e.g., a camera, microscope, light source or any combination thereof) for capturing images (e.g., digital images), and atilting module 166 for controlling atilting device 190. The control equipment 152 can also includeother modules 168 for controlling, monitoring, or performing other functions with respect to themicrofluidic device 100. As shown, the equipment 152 can further include adisplay device 170 and an input/output device 172. - The
master controller 154 can comprise acontrol module 156 and a digital memory 158. Thecontrol module 156 can comprise, for example, a digital processor configured to operate in accordance with machine executable instructions (e.g., software, firmware, source code, or the like) stored as non-transitory data or signals in the memory 158. Alternatively, or in addition, thecontrol module 156 can comprise hardwired digital circuitry and/or analog circuitry. Themedia module 160,motive module 162,imaging module 164, tiltingmodule 166, and/orother modules 168 can be similarly configured. Thus, functions, processes acts, actions, or steps of a process discussed herein as being performed with respect to themicrofluidic device 100 or any other microfluidic apparatus can be performed by any one or more of themaster controller 154,media module 160,motive module 162,imaging module 164, tiltingmodule 166, and/orother modules 168 configured as discussed above. Similarly, themaster controller 154,media module 160,motive module 162,imaging module 164, tiltingmodule 166, and/orother modules 168 may be communicatively coupled to transmit and receive data used in any function, process, act, action or step discussed herein. - The
media module 160 controls themedia source 178. For example, themedia module 160 can control themedia source 178 to input a selected fluidic medium 180 into the enclosure 102 (e.g., through an inlet port 107). Themedia module 160 can also control removal of media from the enclosure 102 (e.g., through an outlet port (not shown)). One or more media can thus be selectively input into and removed from themicrofluidic circuit 120. Themedia module 160 can also control the flow of fluidic medium 180 in theflow path 106 inside themicrofluidic circuit 120. For example, in someembodiments media module 160 stops the flow ofmedia 180 in theflow path 106 and through theenclosure 102 prior to thetilting module 166 causing thetilting device 190 to tilt themicrofluidic device 100 to a desired angle of incline. - The
motive module 162 can be configured to control selection, trapping, and movement of micro-objects (not shown) in themicrofluidic circuit 120. As discussed below with respect toFIGS. 2A and 2B , theenclosure 102 can comprise a dielectrophoresis (DEP), optoelectronic tweezers (OET) and/or opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration (not shown inFIG. 1 ), and themotive module 162 can control the activation of electrodes and/or transistors (e.g., phototransistors) to select and move micro-objects (not shown) and/or droplets of medium (not shown) in theflow path 106 and/or sequestration pens 124, 126, 128, 130. - The
imaging module 164 can control the imaging device 194. For example, theimaging modole 164 can receive and process image data from the imaging device 194. Image data from the imaging device 194 can comprise any type of information captured by the imaging device 194 (e.g., the presence or absence of micro-objects, droplets of medium, accumulation of label, such as fluorescent label, etc.). Using the information captured by the imaging device 194, theimaging modole 164 can further calculate the position of objects (e.g., micro-objects, droplets of medium) and/or the rate of motion of such objects within themicrofluidic device 100. - The
tilting module 166 can control the tilting motions of tiltingdevice 190. Alternatively, or in addition, thetilting module 166 can control the tilting rate and timing to optimize transfer of micro-objects to the one or more sequestration pens via gravitational forces. Thetilting module 166 is communicatively coupled with theimaging modole 164 to receive data describing the motion of micro-objects and/or droplets of medium in themicrofluidic circuit 120. Using this data, thetilting module 166 may adjust the tilt of themicrofluidic circuit 120 in order to adjust the rate at which micro-objects and/or droplets of medium move in themicrofluidic circuit 120. Thetilting module 166 may also use this data to iteratively adjust the position of a micro-object and/or droplet of medium in themicrofluidic circuit 120. - In the example shown in
FIG. 1 , themicrofluidic circuit 120 is illustrated as comprising amicrofluidic channel 122 and sequestration pens 124, 126, 128, 130. Each pen comprises an opening to channel 122, but otherwise is enclosed such that the pens can substantially isolate micro-objects inside the pen fromfluidic medium 180 and/or micro-objects in theflow path 106 ofchannel 122 or in other pens. In some instances, pens 124, 126, 128, 130 are configured to physically corral one or more micro-objects within themicrofluidic circuit 120. Sequestration pens in accordance with the present invention can comprise various shapes, surfaces and features that are optimized for use with DEP, OET, OEW, and/or gravitational forces, as will be discussed and shown in detail below. - The
microfluidic circuit 120 may comprise any number of microfluidic sequestration pens. Although five sequestration pens are shown,microfluidic circuit 120 may have fewer or more sequestration pens. In some embodiments, themicrofluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality of identical microfluidic sequestration pens. In some embodiments, themicrofluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality of microfluidic sequestration pens, wherein two or more of the sequestration pens comprise differing structures and/or features. - In the embodiment illustrated in
FIG. 1 , asingle channel 122 and flowpath 106 is shown. However, other embodiments may containmultiple channels 122, each configured to comprise aflow path 106. Themicrofluidic circuit 120 further comprises an inlet valve orport 107 in fluid communication with theflow path 106 andfluidic medium 180, wherebyfluidic medium 180 can accesschannel 122 via theinlet port 107. In some instances, theflow path 106 comprises a single path. In some instances, the single path is arranged in a zigzag pattern whereby theflow path 106 travels across themicrofluidic device 100 two or more times in alternating directions. - In some instances,
microfluidic circuit 120 comprises a plurality ofparallel channels 122 and flowpaths 106, wherein thefluidic medium 180 within eachflow path 106 flows in the same direction. In some instances, the fluidic medium within eachflow path 106 flows in at least one of a forward or reverse direction. In some instances, a plurality of sequestration pens are configured (e.g., relative to a channel 122) such that they can be loaded with target micro-objects in parallel. - In some embodiments,
microfluidic circuit 120 further comprises one or more micro-object traps 132. Thetraps 132 are generally formed in a wall forming the boundary of achannel 122, and may be positioned opposite an opening of one or more of the microfluidic sequestration pens 124, 126, 128, 130. In some embodiments, thetraps 132 are configured to receive or capture a single micro-object from theflow path 106. In some embodiments, thetraps 132 are configured to receive or capture a plurality of micro-objects from theflow path 106. In some instances, thetraps 132 comprise a volume approximately equal to the volume of a single target micro-object. - The
traps 132 may further comprise an opening which is configured to assist the flow of targeted micro-objects into thetraps 132. In some instances, thetraps 132 comprise an opening having a height and width that is approximately equal to the dimensions of a single target micro-object, whereby larger micro-objects are prevented from entering into the micro-object trap. Thetraps 132 may further comprise other features configured to assist in retention of targeted micro-objects within thetrap 132. In some instances, thetrap 132 is aligned with and situated on the opposite side of achannel 122 relative to the opening of a microfluidic sequestration pen, such that upon tilting themicrofluidic device 100 about an axis parallel to thechannel 122, the trapped micro-object exits thetrap 132 at a trajectory that causes the micro-object to fall into the opening of the sequestration pen. In some instances, thetrap 132 comprises aside passage 134 that is smaller than the target micro-object in order to facilitate flow through thetrap 132 and thereby increase the likelihood of capturing a micro-object in thetrap 132. - In some embodiments, dielectrophoretic (DEP) forces are applied across the fluidic medium 180 (e.g., in the flow path and/or in the sequestration pens) via one or more electrodes (not shown) to manipulate, transport, separate and sort micro-objects located therein. For example, in some embodiments, DEP forces are applied to one or more portions of a
microfluidic circuit 120 in order to transfer a single micro-object from theflow path 106 into a desired microfluidic sequestration pen. In some embodiments, DEP forces are used to prevent a micro-object within a sequestration pen (e.g.,sequestration pen - In other embodiments, optoelectrowetting (OEW) forces are applied to one or more positions in the support structure 104 (and/or the cover 110) of the microfluidic device 100 (e.g., positions helping to define the flow path and/or the sequestration pens) via one or more electrodes (not shown) to manipulate, transport, separate and sort droplets located in the
microfluidic circuit 120. For example, in some embodiments, OEW forces are applied to one or more positions in the support structure 104 (and/or the cover 110) in order to transfer a single droplet from theflow path 106 into a desired microfluidic sequestration pen. In some embodiments, OEW forces are used to prevent a droplet within a sequestration pen (e.g.,sequestration pen - In some embodiments, DEP and/or OEW forces are combined with other forces, such as flow and/or gravitational force, so as to manipulate, transport, separate and sort micro-objects and/or droplets within the
microfluidic circuit 120. For example, theenclosure 102 can be tilted (e.g., by tilting device 190) to position theflow path 106 and micro-objects located therein above the microfluidic sequestration pens, and the force of gravity can transport the micro-objects and/or droplets into the pens. In some embodiments, the DEP and/or OEW forces can be applied prior to the other forces. In other embodiments, the DEP and/or OEW forces can be applied after the other forces. In still other instances, the DEP and/or OEW forces can be applied at the same time as the other forces or in an alternating manner with the other forces. -
FIGS. 2A-2F illustrates various embodiments of microfluidic devices that can be used in the practice of the present invention.FIG. 2A depicts an embodiment in which themicrofluidic device 200 is configured as an optically-actuated electrokinetic device. A variety of optically-actuated electrokinetic devices are known in the art, including devices having an optoelectronic tweezer (OET) configuration and devices having an opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration. Examples of suitable OET configurations are illustrated in the following U.S. patent documents, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety: U.S. Pat. No. RE 44,711 (Wu et al.) (originally issued as U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,355); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,956,339 (Ohta et al.). Examples of OEW configurations are illustrated in U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,132 (Chiou et al.) and U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0024708 (Chiou et al.), both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Yet another example of an optically-actuated electrokinetic device includes a combined OET/OEW configuration, examples of which are shown in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 20150306598 (Khandros et al.) and 20150306599 (Khandros et al.) and their corresponding PCT Publications WO2015/164846 and WO2015/164847, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. - Motive microfluidic device configurations. As described above, the control and monitoring equipment of the system can comprise a motive module for selecting and moving objects, such as micro-objects or droplets, in the microfluidic circuit of a microfluidic device. The microfluidic device can have a variety of motive configurations, depending upon the type of object being moved and other considerations. For example, a dielectrophoresis (DEP) configuration can be utilized to select and move micro-objects in the microfluidic circuit. Thus, the
support structure 104 and/or cover 110 of themicrofluidic device 100 can comprise a DEP configuration for selectively inducing DEP forces on micro-objects in afluidic medium 180 in themicrofluidic circuit 120 and thereby select, capture, and/or move individual micro-objects or groups of micro-objects. Alternatively, thesupport structure 104 and/or cover 110 of themicrofluidic device 100 can comprise an electrowetting (EW) configuration for selectively inducing EW forces on droplets in afluidic medium 180 in themicrofluidic circuit 120 and thereby select, capture, and/or move individual droplets or groups of droplets. - One example of a
microfluidic device 200 comprising a DEP configuration is illustrated inFIGS. 2A and 2B . While for purposes of simplicityFIGS. 2A and 2B show a side cross-sectional view and a top cross-sectional view, respectively, of a portion of anenclosure 102 of themicrofluidic device 200 having an open region/chamber 202, it should be understood that the region/chamber 202 may be part of a fluidic circuit element having a more detailed structure, such as a growth chamber, a sequestration pen, a flow region, or a flow channel. Furthermore, themicrofluidic device 200 may include other fluidic circuit elements. For example, themicrofluidic device 200 can include a plurality of growth chambers or sequestration pens and/or one or more flow regions or flow channels, such as those described herein with respect tomicrofluidic device 100. A DEP configuration may be incorporated into any such fluidic circuit elements of themicrofluidic device 200, or select portions thereof. It should be further appreciated that any of the above or below described microfluidic device components and system components may be incorporated in and/or used in combination with themicrofluidic device 200. For example,system 150 including control and monitoring equipment 152, described above, may be used withmicrofluidic device 200, including one or more of themedia module 160,motive module 162,imaging module 164, tiltingmodule 166, andother modules 168. - As seen in
FIG. 2A , themicrofluidic device 200 includes asupport structure 104 having a bottom electrode 204 and anelectrode activation substrate 206 overlying the bottom electrode 204, and acover 110 having atop electrode 210, with thetop electrode 210 spaced apart from the bottom electrode 204. Thetop electrode 210 and theelectrode activation substrate 206 define opposing surfaces of the region/chamber 202. A medium 180 contained in the region/chamber 202 thus provides a resistive connection between thetop electrode 210 and theelectrode activation substrate 206. A power source 212 configured to be connected to the bottom electrode 204 and thetop electrode 210 and create a biasing voltage between the electrodes, as required for the generation of DEP forces in the region/chamber 202, is also shown. The power source 212 can be, for example, an alternating current (AC) power source. - In certain embodiments, the
microfluidic device 200 illustrated inFIGS. 2A and 2B can have an optically-actuated DEP configuration. Accordingly, changing patterns of light 222 from thelight source 220, which may be controlled by themotive module 162, can selectively activate and deactivate changing patterns of DEP electrodes atregions 214 of theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206. (Hereinafter theregions 214 of a microfluidic device having a DEP configuration are referred to as “DEP electrode regions.”) As illustrated inFIG. 2B , alight pattern 222 directed onto theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 can illuminate selectDEP electrode regions 214 a (shown in white) in a pattern, such as a square. The non-illuminated DEP electrode regions 214 (cross-hatched) are hereinafter referred to as “dark”DEP electrode regions 214. The relative electrical impedance through the DEP electrode activation substrate 206 (i.e., from the bottom electrode 204 up to theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 which interfaces with the medium 180 in the flow region 106) is greater than the relative electrical impedance through the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202 (i.e., from theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 to thetop electrode 210 of the cover 110) at each darkDEP electrode region 214. An illuminatedDEP electrode region 214 a, however, exhibits a reduced relative impedance through theelectrode activation substrate 206 that is less than the relative impedance through the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202 at each illuminatedDEP electrode region 214 a. - With the power source 212 activated, the foregoing DEP configuration creates an electric field gradient in the
fluidic medium 180 between illuminatedDEP electrode regions 214 a and adjacent darkDEP electrode regions 214, which in turn creates local DEP forces that attract or repel nearby micro-objects (not shown) in thefluidic medium 180. DEP electrodes that attract or repel micro-objects in thefluidic medium 180 can thus be selectively activated and deactivated at many different suchDEP electrode regions 214 at theinner surface 208 of the region/chamber 202 by changinglight patterns 222 projected from alight source 220 into themicrofluidic device 200. Whether the DEP forces attract or repel nearby micro-objects can depend on such parameters as the frequency of the power source 212 and the dielectric properties of the medium 180 and/or micro-objects (not shown). - The square pattern 224 of illuminated
DEP electrode regions 214 a illustrated inFIG. 2B is an example only. Any pattern of theDEP electrode regions 214 can be illuminated (and thereby activated) by the pattern of light 222 projected into thedevice 200, and the pattern of illuminated/activatedDEP electrode regions 214 can be repeatedly changed by changing or moving thelight pattern 222. - In some embodiments, the
electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise or consist of a photoconductive material. In such embodiments, theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 can be featureless. For example, theelectrode activation substrate 206 can comprise or consist of a layer of hydrogenated amorphous silicon (a-Si:H). The a-Si:H can comprise, for example, about 8% to 40% hydrogen (calculated as 100*the number of hydrogen atoms/the total number of hydrogen and silicon atoms). The layer of a-Si:H can have a thickness of about 500 nm to about 2.0 microns. In such embodiments, theDEP electrode regions 214 can be created anywhere and in any pattern on theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 208, in accordance with thelight pattern 222. The number and pattern of theDEP electrode regions 214 thus need not be fixed, but can correspond to thelight pattern 222. Examples of microfluidic devices having a DEP configuration comprising a photoconductive layer such as discussed above have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. RE 44,711 (Wu et al.) (originally issued as U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,355), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. - In other embodiments, the
electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise a substrate comprising a plurality of doped layers, electrically insulating layers (or regions), and electrically conductive layers that form semiconductor integrated circuits, such as is known in semiconductor fields. For example, theelectrode activation substrate 206 can comprise a plurality of phototransistors, including, for example, lateral bipolar phototransistors, each phototransistor corresponding to aDEP electrode region 214. Alternatively, theelectrode activation substrate 206 can comprise electrodes (e.g., conductive metal electrodes) controlled by phototransistor switches, with each such electrode corresponding to aDEP electrode region 214. Theelectrode activation substrate 206 can include a pattern of such phototransistors or phototransistor-controlled electrodes. The pattern, for example, can be an array of substantially square phototransistors or phototransistor-controlled electrodes arranged in rows and columns, such as shown inFIG. 2B . Alternatively, the pattern can be an array of substantially hexagonal phototransistors or phototransistor-controlled electrodes that form a hexagonal lattice. Regardless of the pattern, electric circuit elements can form electrical connections between theDEP electrode regions 214 at theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 and thebottom electrode 210, and those electrical connections (i.e., phototransistors or electrodes) can be selectively activated and deactivated by thelight pattern 222. When not activated, each electrical connection can have high impedance such that the relative impedance through the electrode activation substrate 206 (i.e., from the bottom electrode 204 to theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 which interfaces with the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202) is greater than the relative impedance through the medium 180 (i.e., from theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 to thetop electrode 210 of the cover 110) at the correspondingDEP electrode region 214. When activated by light in thelight pattern 222, however, the relative impedance through theelectrode activation substrate 206 is less than the relative impedance through the medium 180 at each illuminatedDEP electrode region 214, thereby activating the DEP electrode at the correspondingDEP electrode region 214 as discussed above. DEP electrodes that attract or repel micro-objects (not shown) in the medium 180 can thus be selectively activated and deactivated at many differentDEP electrode regions 214 at theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 in the region/chamber 202 in a manner determined by thelight pattern 222. - Examples of microfluidic devices having electrode activation substrates that comprise phototransistors have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 7,956,339 (Ohta et al.) (see, e.g.,
device 300 illustrated inFIGS. 21 and 22 , and descriptions thereof), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Examples of microfluidic devices having electrode activation substrates that comprise electrodes controlled by phototransistor switches have been described, for example, in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2014/0124370 (Short et al.) (see, e.g.,devices - In some embodiments of a DEP configured microfluidic device, the
top electrode 210 is part of a first wall (or cover 110) of theenclosure 102, and theelectrode activation substrate 206 and bottom electrode 204 are part of a second wall (or support structure 104) of theenclosure 102. The region/chamber 202 can be between the first wall and the second wall. In other embodiments, theelectrode 210 is part of the second wall (or support structure 104) and one or both of theelectrode activation substrate 206 and/or theelectrode 210 are part of the first wall (or cover 110). Moreover, thelight source 220 can alternatively be used to illuminate theenclosure 102 from below. - With the
microfluidic device 200 ofFIGS. 2A-2B having a DEP configuration, themotive modole 162 can select a micro-object (not shown) in the medium 180 in the region/chamber 202 by projecting alight pattern 222 into thedevice 200 to activate a first set of one or more DEP electrodes atDEP electrode regions 214 a of theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 in a pattern (e.g., square pattern 224) that surrounds and captures the micro-object. The motive modole 162 can then move the captured micro-object by moving thelight pattern 222 relative to thedevice 200 to activate a second set of one or more DEP electrodes atDEP electrode regions 214. Alternatively, thedevice 200 can be moved relative to thelight pattern 222. - In other embodiments, the
microfluidic device 200 can have a DEP configuration that does not rely upon light activation of DEP electrodes at theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206. For example, theelectrode activation substrate 206 can comprise selectively addressable and energizable electrodes positioned opposite to a surface including at least one electrode (e.g., cover 110). Switches (e.g., transistor switches in a semiconductor substrate) may be selectively opened and closed to activate or inactivate DEP electrodes atDEP electrode regions 214, thereby creating a net DEP force on a micro-object (not shown) in region/chamber 202 in the vicinity of the activated DEP electrodes. Depending on such characteristics as the frequency of the power source 212 and the dielectric properties of the medium (not shown) and/or micro-objects in the region/chamber 202, the DEP force can attract or repel a nearby micro-object. By selectively activating and deactivating a set of DEP electrodes (e.g., at a set ofDEP electrodes regions 214 that forms a square pattern 224), one or more micro-objects in region/chamber 202 can be trapped and moved within the region/chamber 202. The motive modole 162 inFIG. 1 can control such switches and thus activate and deactivate individual ones of the DEP electrodes to select, trap, and move particular micro-objects (not shown) around the region/chamber 202. Microfluidic devices having a DEP configuration that includes selectively addressable and energizable electrodes are known in the art and have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,294,063 (Becker et al.) and U.S. Pat. No. 6,942,776 (Medoro), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. - As yet another example, the
microfluidic device 200 can have an electrowetting (EW) configuration, which can be in place of the DEP configuration or can be located in a portion of themicrofluidic device 200 that is separate from the portion which has the DEP configuration. The EW configuration can be an opto-electrowetting configuration or an electrowetting on dielectric (EWOD) configuration, both of which are known in the art. In some EW configurations, thesupport structure 104 has anelectrode activation substrate 206 sandwiched between a dielectric layer (not shown) and the bottom electrode 204. The dielectric layer can comprise a hydrophobic material and/or can be coated with a hydrophobic material. Formicrofluidic devices 200 that have an EW configuration, theinner surface 208 of thesupport structure 104 is the inner surface of the dielectric layer or its hydrophobic coating. - The dielectric layer (not shown) can comprise one or more oxide layers, and can have a thickness of about 50 nm to about 250 nm (e.g., about 75 nm to about 150 nm, or about 125 nm to about 175 nm). In certain embodiments, the dielectric layer may comprise a layer of oxide, such as a metal oxide (e.g., aluminum oxide or halfnuim oxide). In certain embodiments, the dielectric layer can comprise a dielectric material other than a metal oxide, such as silicon oxide or a nitride. Regardless of the exact composition and thickness, the dielectric layer can have an impedance of about 10 kOhms to about 50 kOhms.
- In some embodiments, the
inner surface 208 of the dielectric layer that faces inward toward region/chamber 202 is coated with a hydrophobic coating material (which is sub-group of the materials generally referred to herein as “coating materials”). The hydrophobic coating material can comprise, for example, fluorinated carbon molecules. Examples of fluorinated carbon molecules include perfluoro-polymers such as polytetrafluoroethylene (e.g., TEFLON®) or poly(2,3-difluoromethylenyl-perfluorotetrahydrofuran) (e.g., CYTOP™). In other embodiments, the hydrophobic coating material can have a thickness of about 10 nm to about 50 nm. - In some embodiments, molecules that make up the hydrophobic coating material can be covalently bonded to the surface of the dielectric layer. For example, molecules of the hydrophobic coating material can form covalent bonds with the
inner surface 208 of the dielectric layer by means of a linking group such as a siloxane group, or a phosphonate ester group. In some embodiments, the hydrophobic coating material can comprise an alkyl group. Thus, in some embodiments, the coating material can comprise alkyl-terminated siloxane or alkyl-terminated phosphonate ester. The alkyl group can comprise carbon atoms that form a linear chain (e.g., a linear chain of at least 10 carbon atoms, or at least 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms). The alkyl group can be an unbranched or a branched alkyl group. In some embodiments, the alkyl group can be a substituted alkyl group (e.g., some of the carbons in the alkyl group can be fluorinated or perfluorinated). Accordingly, the coating material can comprise perfluoroalkyl-terminated siloxane or perfluoroalkyl-terminated phosphonate ester. The alkyl group may comprise a linear chain of substituted (e.g., fluorinated or perfluorinated) carbons joined to a linear chain of non-substituted carbons. For example, the alkyl group may include a first segment, which may be a perfluoroalkyl group, joined to a second segment, which may be a non-substituted alkyl group. The first and second segments may be joined directly or indirectly (e.g., by means of an ethereal linkage). The first segment of the alkyl group can be located distal to the linking group, and the second segment of the alkyl group can be located proximal to the linking group. In some embodiments, the coating material may form a monolayer when covalently bound to the surface of the dielectric layer. Thus, for example, the coating material can form a monolayer of perfluoroalkyl-terminated siloxane or perfluoroalkyl-terminated phosphonate ester, which may or may not have an intervening linear chain of non- substituted carbons. In some embodiments, the covalently bonded hydrophobic coating material can have a thickness of less than 10 nm (e.g., less than 5 nm, or about 1.5 to 3.0 nm). - In some embodiments, the inner surface (not shown) of the
cover 110 of amicrofluidic device 200 having an electrowetting (e.g. OEW) configuration is coated with a coating material (not shown) as well. The hydrophobic coating material can be the same hydrophobic coating material used to coat theinner surface 208 of the dielectric layer, and the hydrophobic coating material can have a thickness that is substantially the same as the thickness of the hydrophobic coating material on the dielectric layer. Moreover, in electrowetting configurations, thecover 110 can comprise anelectrode activation substrate 206 sandwiched between a dielectric layer and thetop electrode 210, in the manner of thesupport structure 104. Theelectrode activation substrate 206 and the dielectric layer of thecover 110 can have the same composition and/or dimensions as theelectrode activation substrate 206 and the dielectric layer of thesupport structure 104. Thus, themicrofluidic device 200 can have two electrowetting surfaces. - In certain embodiments, the hydrophobic coating material is deposited on substantially all exposed regions of the inner surface of the
cover 110 and substantially all exposed regions of theinner surface 208 of dielectric layer of the support structure 104 (i.e., on substantially all surfaces facing inward toward the enclosure 102). In some embodiments, the hydrophobic coating material is deposited on all surfaces within theenclosure 102, including on substantially all inner surfaces ofmicrofluidic circuit material 116 used to form circuit elements and structures (e.g. walls forming sequestration pens and chambers) within theenclosure 102. - In some embodiments, the
electrode activation substrate 206 can comprise a photoconductive material, such as described above. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, theelectrode activation substrate 206 can comprise or consist of a layer of hydrogenated amorphous silicon (a-Si:H). The a-Si:H can comprise, for example, about 8% to 40% hydrogen (calculated as 100* the number of hydrogen atoms/the total number of hydrogen and silicon atoms). The layer of a-Si:H can have a thickness of about 500 nm to about 2.0 μm. Alternatively, theelectrode activation substrate 206 can comprise electrodes (e.g., conductive metal electrodes) controlled by phototransistor switches, as described above. Microfluidic devices having an opto- electrowetting configuration are known in the art and/or can be constructed with electrode activation substrates known in the art. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,132 (Chiou et al.), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference, discloses opto-electrowetting configurations having a photoconductive material such as a-Si:H, while U.S. Patent Publication No. 2014/0124370 (Short et al.), referenced above, discloses electrode activation substrates having electrodes controlled by phototransistor switches. - The
microfluidic device 200 thus can have an opto-electrowetting configuration, andlight patterns 222 can be used to activate photoconductive EW regions or photoresponsive EW electrodes in theelectrode activation substrate 206. Such activated EW regions or EW electrodes of theelectrode activation substrate 206 can generate an electrowetting force at theinner surface 208 of the support structure 104 (i.e., the inner surface of the overlaying dielectric layer or its hydrophobic coating). By changing the light patterns 222 (or movingmicrofluidic device 200 relative to the light source 220) incident on theelectrode activation substrate 206, droplets (e.g., containing an aqueous medium, solution, or solvent) contacting theinner surface 208 of thesupport structure 104 can be moved through an oil-based fluid (e.g., a silicone or fluorinated oil) present in the region/chamber 202. - In other embodiments,
microfluidic devices 200 can have an EWOD configuration, and theelectrode activation substrate 206 can comprise selectively addressable and energizable electrodes that do not rely upon light for activation. Theelectrode activation substrate 206 thus can include a pattern of such electrowetting (EW) electrodes. The pattern, for example, can be an array of substantially square EW electrodes arranged in rows and columns, such as shown inFIG. 2B . Alternatively, the pattern can be an array of substantially hexagonal EW electrodes that form a hexagonal lattice. Regardless of the pattern, the EW electrodes can be selectively activated (or deactivated) by electrical switches (e.g., transistor switches in a semiconductor substrate). By selectively activating and deactivating EW electrodes in theelectrode activation substrate 206, droplets (not shown) contacting theinner surface 208 of the overlaying dielectric layer or its hydrophobic coating can be moved within the region/chamber 202. The motive modole 162 inFIG. 1 can control such switches and thus activate and deactivate individual EW electrodes to select and move particular droplets around region/chamber 202. Microfluidic devices having a EWOD configuration with selectively addressable and energizable electrodes are known in the art and have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 8,685,344 (Sundarsan et al.), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. - Regardless of the configuration of the
microfluidic device 200, a power source 212 can be used to provide a potential (e.g., an AC voltage potential) that powers the electrical circuits of themicrofluidic device 200. The power source 212 can be the same as, or a component of, thepower source 192 referenced inFIG. 1 . Power source 212 can be configured to provide an AC voltage and/or current to thetop electrode 210 and the bottom electrode 204. For an AC voltage, the power source 212 can provide a frequency range and an average or peak power (e.g., voltage or current) range sufficient to generate net DEP forces (or electrowetting forces) strong enough to trap and move individual micro-objects (not shown) in the region/chamber 202, as discussed above, and/or to change the wetting properties of theinner surface 208 of the support structure 104 (i.e., the dielectric layer and/or the hydrophobic coating on the dielectric layer) in the region/chamber 202, as also discussed above. Such frequency ranges and average or peak power ranges are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,132 (Chiou et al.), U.S. Pat. No. RE44,711 (Wu et al.) (originally issued as U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,355), and US Patent Application Publication Nos. US2014/0124370 (Short et al.), US2015/0306598 (Khandros et al.), and US2015/0306599 (Khandros et al.). - Sequestration Pens. Non-limiting examples of generic sequestration pens 244, 246, and 248 are shown within the
microfluidic device 240 depicted inFIGS. 2C and 2D . Eachsequestration pen isolation structure 250 defining anisolation region 258 and aconnection region 254 fluidically connecting theisolation region 258 to achannel 122. Theconnection region 254 can comprise aproximal opening 252 to thechannel 122 and adistal opening 256 to theisolation region 258. Theconnection region 254 can be configured so that the maximum penetration depth of a flow of a fluidic medium (not shown) flowing from thechannel 122 into thesequestration pen isolation region 258. Thus, due to theconnection region 254, a micro-object (not shown) or other material (not shown) disposed in anisolation region 258 of asequestration pen medium 180 in thechannel 122. - The
channel 122 can thus be an example of a swept region, and theisolation regions 258 of the sequestration pens 244, 246, 248 can be examples of unswept regions. As noted, thechannel 122 and sequestration pens 244, 246, 248 can be configured to contain one or morefluidic media 180. In the example shown inFIGS. 2C-2D , theports 242 are connected to thechannel 122 and allow afluidic medium 180 to be introduced into or removed from themicrofluidic device 240. Prior to introduction of thefluidic medium 180, the microfluidic device may be primed with a gas such as carbon dioxide gas. Once themicrofluidic device 240 contains thefluidic medium 180, theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122 can be selectively generated and stopped. For example, as shown, theports 242 can be disposed at different locations (e.g., opposite ends) of thechannel 122, and aflow 260 of medium can be created from oneport 242 functioning as an inlet to anotherport 242 functioning as an outlet. -
FIG. 2E illustrates a detailed view of an example of asequestration pen 244 according to the present invention. Examples ofmicro-objects 270 are also shown. - As is known, a
flow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in amicrofluidic channel 122 past aproximal opening 252 ofsequestration pen 244 can cause asecondary flow 262 of the medium 180 into and/or out of thesequestration pen 244. To isolatemicro-objects 270 in theisolation region 258 of asequestration pen 244 from thesecondary flow 262, the length Lcon of theconnection region 254 of the sequestration pen 244 (i.e., from theproximal opening 252 to the distal opening 256) should be greater than the penetration depth Dp of thesecondary flow 262 into theconnection region 254. The penetration depth Dp of thesecondary flow 262 depends upon the velocity of thefluidic medium 180 flowing in thechannel 122 and various parameters relating to the configuration of thechannel 122 and theproximal opening 252 of theconnection region 254 to thechannel 122. For a given microfluidic device, the configurations of thechannel 122 and theopening 252 will be fixed, whereas the rate offlow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122 will be variable. Accordingly, for eachsequestration pen 244, a maximal velocity Vmax for theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 inchannel 122 can be identified that ensures that the penetration depth Dp of thesecondary flow 262 does not exceed the length Lcon of theconnection region 254. As long as the rate of theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122 does not exceed the maximum velocity Vmax, the resultingsecondary flow 262 can be limited to thechannel 122 and theconnection region 254 and kept out of theisolation region 258. Theflow 260 ofmedium 180 in thechannel 122 will thus not drawmicro-objects 270 out of theisolation region 258. Rather, micro-objects 270 located in theisolation region 258 will stay in theisolation region 258 regardless of theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122. - Moreover, as long as the rate of
flow 260 ofmedium 180 in thechannel 122 does not exceed Vmax, theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122 will not move miscellaneous particles (e.g., microparticles and/or nanoparticles) from thechannel 122 into theisolation region 258 of asequestration pen 244. Having the length Lcon of theconnection region 254 be greater than the maximum penetration depth Dp of thesecondary flow 262 can thus prevent contamination of onesequestration pen 244 with miscellaneous particles from thechannel 122 or another sequestration pen (e.g., sequestration pens 246, 248 inFIG. 2D ). - Because the
channel 122 and theconnection regions 254 of the sequestration pens 244, 246, 248 can be affected by theflow 260 ofmedium 180 in thechannel 122, thechannel 122 andconnection regions 254 can be deemed swept (or flow) regions of themicrofluidic device 240. Theisolation regions 258 of the sequestration pens 244, 246, 248, on the other hand, can be deemed unswept (or non-flow) regions. For example, components (not shown) in afirst fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122 can mix with asecond fluidic medium 280 in theisolation region 258 substantially only by diffusion of components of the first medium 180 from thechannel 122 through theconnection region 254 and into thesecond fluidic medium 280 in theisolation region 258. Similarly, components (not shown) of thesecond medium 280 in theisolation region 258 can mix with thefirst medium 180 in thechannel 122 substantially only by diffusion of components of the second medium 280 from theisolation region 258 through theconnection region 254 and into thefirst medium 180 in thechannel 122. Thefirst medium 180 can be the same medium or a different medium than thesecond medium 280. Moreover, thefirst medium 180 and thesecond medium 280 can start out being the same, then become different (e.g., through conditioning of thesecond medium 280 by one or more cells in theisolation region 258, or by changing the medium 180 flowing through the channel 122). - The maximum penetration depth Dp of the
secondary flow 262 caused by theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122 can depend on a number of parameters, as mentioned above. Examples of such parameters include: the shape of the channel 122 (e.g., the channel can direct medium into theconnection region 254, divert medium away from theconnection region 254, or direct medium in a direction substantially perpendicular to theproximal opening 252 of theconnection region 254 to the channel 122); a width Wch (or cross-sectional area) of thechannel 122 at theproximal opening 252; and a width Wcon (or cross-sectional area) of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252; the velocity V of theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in thechannel 122; the viscosity of thefirst medium 180 and/or thesecond medium 280, or the like. - In some embodiments, the dimensions of the
channel 122 and sequestration pens 244, 246, 248 can be oriented as follows with respect to the vector of theflow 260 of fluidic medium 180 in the channel 122: the channel width Wch (or cross-sectional area of the channel 122) can be substantially perpendicular to theflow 260 ofmedium 180; the width Wcon (or cross-sectional area) of theconnection region 254 at opening 252 can be substantially parallel to theflow 260 ofmedium 180 in thechannel 122; and/or the length Lcon of the connection region can be substantially perpendicular to theflow 260 ofmedium 180 in thechannel 122. The foregoing are examples only, and the relative position of thechannel 122 and sequestration pens 244, 246, 248 can be in other orientations with respect to each other. - As illustrated in
FIG. 2E , the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 can be uniform from theproximal opening 252 to thedistal opening 256. The width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at thedistal opening 256 can thus be in any of the ranges identified herein for the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252. Alternatively, the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at thedistal opening 256 can be larger than the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252. - As illustrated in
FIG. 2E , the width of theisolation region 258 at thedistal opening 256 can be substantially the same as the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252. The width of theisolation region 258 at thedistal opening 256 can thus be in any of the ranges identified herein for the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252. Alternatively, the width of theisolation region 258 at thedistal opening 256 can be larger or smaller than the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252. Moreover, thedistal opening 256 may be smaller than theproximal opening 252 and the width Wcon of theconnection region 254 may be narrowed between theproximal opening 252 anddistal opening 256. For example, theconnection region 254 may be narrowed between the proximal opening and the distal opening, using a variety of different geometries (e.g. chamfering the connection region, beveling the connection region). Further, any part or subpart of theconnection region 254 may be narrowed (e.g. a portion of the connection region adjacent to the proximal opening 252). - In various embodiments of sequestration pens (e.g. 124, 126, 128, 130, 244, 246 or 248), the isolation region (e.g. 258) is configured to contain a plurality of micro-objects. In other embodiments, the isolation region can be configured to contain only one, two, three, four, five, or a similar relatively small number of micro-objects. Accordingly, the volume of an isolation region can be, for example, at least 3×103, 6×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 4×104, 8×104, 1×105, 2×105, 4×105, 8×105, 1×106, 2×106, 4×106, 6×106 cubic microns, or more.
- In various embodiments of sequestration pens, the width Wch of the
channel 122 at a proximal opening (e.g. 252) can be within any of the following ranges: 50-1000 microns, 50-500 microns, 50-400 microns, 50-300 microns, 50-250 microns, 50-200 microns, 50-150 microns, 50-100 microns, 70-500 microns, 70-400 microns, 70-300 microns, 70-250 microns, 70-200 microns, 70-150 microns, 90-400 microns, 90-300 microns, 90-250 microns, 90-200 microns, 90-150 microns, 100-300 microns, 100-250 microns, 100-200 microns, 100-150 microns, and 100-120 microns. The foregoing are examples only, and the width Wch of thechannel 122 can be in other ranges (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above). Moreover, the Wch of thechannel 122 can be selected to be in any of these ranges in regions of the channel other than at a proximal opening of a sequestration pen. - In some embodiments, a sequestration pen has a cross-sectional height of about 30 to about 200 microns, or about 50 to about 150 microns. In some embodiments, the sequestration pen has a cross-sectional area of about 100,000 to about 2,500,000 square microns, or about 200,000 to about 2,000,000 square microns. In some embodiments, a connection region has a cross-sectional height that matches the cross-sectional height of the corresponding sequestration pen. In some embodiments, the connection region has a cross-sectional width of about 50 to about 500 microns, or about 100 to about 300 microns.
- In various embodiments of sequestration pens the height Hch of the
channel 122 at aproximal opening 252 can be within any of the following ranges: 20-150 microns, 20-125 microns, 20-100 microns, 20-80 microns, 20-60 microns, 20-50 microns, 30-150 microns, 30-125 microns, 30-100 microns, 30-80 microns, 30-60 microns, 30-50 microns, 40-150 microns, 40-125 microns, 40-100 microns, 40-80 microns, 40-60 microns, or 40-50 microns. The foregoing are examples only, and the height Hch of thechannel 122 can be in other ranges (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above). The height Hch of thechannel 122 can be selected to be in any of these ranges in regions of the channel other than at a proximal opening of a sequestration pen. - In various embodiments of sequestration pens a cross-sectional area of the
channel 122 at aproximal opening 252 can be within any of the following ranges: 500-50,000 square microns, 500-40,000 square microns, 500-30,000 square microns, 500-25,000 square microns, 500-20,000 square microns, 500-15,000 square microns, 500-10,000 square microns, 500-7,500 square microns, 500-5,000 square microns, 1,000-25,000 square microns, 1,000-20,000 square microns, 1,000-15,000 square microns, 1,000-10,000 square microns, 1,000-7,500 square microns, 1,000-5,000 square microns, 2,000-20,000 square microns, 2,000-15,000 square microns, 2,000-10,000 square microns, 2,000-7,500 square microns, 2,000-6,000 square microns, 3,000-20,000 square microns, 3,000-15,000 square microns, 3,000-10,000 square microns, 3,000-7,500 square microns, or 3,000 to 6,000 square microns. The foregoing are examples only, and the cross-sectional area of thechannel 122 at aproximal opening 252 can be in other ranges (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above). - In various embodiments of sequestration pens, the length Lcon of the
connection region 254 can be in any of the following ranges: 1-200 microns, 5-150 microns, 10-100 microns, 15-80 microns, 20-60 microns, 20-500 microns, 40-400 microns, 60-300 microns, 80-200 microns, and 100-150 microns. The foregoing are examples only, and length Lcon of aconnection region 254 can be in a different ranges than the foregoing examples (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above). - In various embodiments of sequestration pens the width Wcon of a
connection region 254 at aproximal opening 252 can be in any of the following ranges 20-500 microns, 20-400 microns, 20-300 microns, 20-200 microns, 20-150 microns, 20-100 microns, 20-80 microns, 20-60 microns, 30-400 microns, 30-300 microns, 30-200 microns, 30-150 microns, 30-100 microns, 30-80 microns, 30-60 microns, 40-300 microns, 40-200 microns, 40-150 microns, 40-100 microns, 40-80 microns, 40-60 microns, 50-250 microns, 50-200 microns, 50-150 microns, 50-100 microns, 50-80 microns, 60-200 microns, 60-150 microns, 60-100 microns, 60-80 microns, 70-150 microns, 70-100 microns, and 80-100 microns. The foregoing are examples only, and the width Wcon of aconnection region 254 at aproximal opening 252 can be different than the foregoing examples (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above). - In various embodiments of sequestration pens the width Wcon of a
connection region 254 at aproximal opening 252 can be in any of the following ranges 2-35 microns, 2-25 microns, 2-20 microns, 2-15 microns, 2-10 microns, 2-7 microns, 2-5 microns, 2-3 microns, 3-25 microns, 3-20 microns, 3-15 microns, 3-10 microns, 3-7 microns, 3-5 microns, 3-4 microns, 4-20 microns, 4-15 microns, 4-10 microns, 4-7 microns, 4-5 microns, 5-15 microns, 5-10 microns, 5-7 microns, 6-15 microns, 6-10 microns, 6-7 microns, 7-15 microns, 7-10 microns, 8-15 microns, and 8-10 microns. The foregoing are examples only, and the width Wcon of aconnection region 254 at aproximal opening 252 can be different than the foregoing examples (e.g., a range defined by any of the endpoints listed above). - In various embodiments of sequestration pens, a ratio of the length Lcon of a
connection region 254 to a width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252 can be greater than or equal to any of the following ratios: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, or more. The foregoing are examples only, and the ratio of the length Lcon of aconnection region 254 to a width Wcon of theconnection region 254 at theproximal opening 252 can be different than the foregoing examples. - In various embodiments of
microfluidic devices - In various embodiments of microfluidic devices having sequestration pens, the volume of an
isolation region 258 of a sequestration pen can be, for example, at least 3×103, 6×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 4×104, 8×104, 1×5, 2×105, 4×105, 8×105, 1×106, 2×106, 4×106, 6×106 cubic microns, or more. In various embodiments of microfluidic devices having sequestration pens, the volume of a sequestration pen may be about 5×103, 7×103, 1×104, 3×104, 5×104, 8×104, 1×105, 2×105, 4×105, 6×105, 8×105, 1×106, 2×106, 4×106, 8×106, 1×107, 3×107 , 5×107, or about 8×107 cubic microns, or more. In some embodiments, the microfluidic device has sequestration pens wherein no more than 1×102 biological cells may be maintained, and the volume of a sequestration pen may be no more than 2×106cubic microns. In some embodiments, the microfluidic device has sequestration pens wherein no more than 1×102 biological cells may be maintained, and a sequestration pen may be no more than 4×105 cubic microns. In yet other embodiments, the microfluidic device has sequestration pens wherein no more than 50 biological cells may be maintained, a sequestration pen may be no more than 4×105 cubic microns. - In various embodiment, the microfluidic device has sequestration pens configured as in any of the embodiments discussed herein where the microfluidic device has about 100 to about 500 sequestration pens; about 200 to about 1000 sequestration pens, about 500 to about 1500 sequestration pens, about 1000 to about 2000 sequestration pens, or about 1000 to about 3500 sequestration pens.
- In some other embodiments, the microfluidic device has sequestration pens configured as in any of the embodiments discussed herein where the microfluidic device has about 1500 to about 3000 sequestration pens, about 2000 to about 3500 sequestration pens, about 2500 to about 4000 sequestration pens, about 3000 to about 4500 sequestration pens, about 3500 to about 5000 sequestration pens, about 4000 to about 5500 sequestration pens, about 4500 to about 6000 sequestration pens, about 5000 to about 6500 sequestration pens, about 5500 to about 7000 sequestration pens, about 6000 to about 7500 sequestration pens, about 6500 to about 8000 sequestration pens, about 7000 to about 8500 sequestration pens, about 7500 to about 9000 sequestration pens, about 8000 to about 9500 sequestration pens, about 8500 to about 10,000 sequestration pens, about 9000 to about 10,500 sequestration pens, about 9500 to about 11,000 sequestration pens, about 10,000 to about 11,500 sequestration pens, about 10,500 to about 12,000 sequestration pens, about 11,000 to about 12,500 sequestration pens, about 11,500 to about 13,000 sequestration pens, about 12,000 to about 13,500 sequestration pens, about 12,500 to about 14,000 sequestration pens, about 13,000 to about 14,500 sequestration pens, about 13,500 to about 15,000 sequestration pens, about 14,000 to about 15,500 sequestration pens, about 14,500 to about 16,000 sequestration pens, about 15,000 to about 16,500 sequestration pens, about 15,500 to about 17,000 sequestration pens, about 16,000 to about 17,500 sequestration pens, about 16,500 to about 18,000 sequestration pens, about 17,000 to about 18,500 sequestration pens, about 17,500 to about 19,000 sequestration pens, about 18,000 to about 19,500 sequestration pens, about 18,500 to about 20,000 sequestration pens, about 19,000 to about 20,500 sequestration pens, about 19,500 to about 21,000 sequestration pens, or about 20,000 to about 21,500 sequestration pens.
-
FIG. 2F illustrates amicrofluidic device 290 according to one embodiment. Themicrofluidic device 290 is illustrated inFIG. 2F is a stylized diagram of amicrofluidic device 100. In practice themicrofluidic device 290 and its constituent circuit elements (e.g. channels 122 and sequestration pens 128) would have the dimensions discussed herein. Themicrofluidic circuit 120 illustrated inFIG. 2F has twoports 107, fourdistinct channels 122 and fourdistinct flow paths 106. Themicrofluidic device 290 further comprises a plurality of sequestration pens opening off of eachchannel 122. In the microfluidic device illustrated inFIG. 2F , the sequestration pens have a geometry similar to the pens illustrated inFIG. 2E and thus, have both connection regions and isolation regions. Accordingly, themicrofluidic circuit 120 includes both swept regions (e.g. channels 122 and portions of theconnection regions 254 within the maximum penetration depth Dp of the secondary flow 262) and non-swept regions (e.g. isolation regions 258 and portions of theconnection regions 254 not within the maximum penetration depth Dp of the secondary flow 262). -
FIGS. 3A through 3D shows various embodiments ofsystem 150 which can be used to operate and observe microfluidic devices (e.g. 100, 200, 240, 290) according to the present invention. As illustrated inFIG. 3A , thesystem 150 can include a structure (“nest”) 300 configured to hold a microfluidic device 100 (not shown), or any other microfluidic device described herein. Thenest 300 can include asocket 302 capable of interfacing with the microfluidic device 360 (e.g., an optically-actuated electrokinetic device 100) and providing electrical connections frompower source 192 tomicrofluidic device 360. Thenest 300 can further include an integrated electrical signal generation subsystem 304. The electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can be configured to supply a biasing voltage tosocket 302 such that the biasing voltage is applied across a pair of electrodes in themicrofluidic device 360 when it is being held bysocket 302. Thus, the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can be part ofpower source 192. The ability to apply a biasing voltage tomicrofluidic device 360 does not mean that a biasing voltage will be applied at all times when themicrofluidic device 360 is held by thesocket 302. Rather, in most cases, the biasing voltage will be applied intermittently, e.g., only as needed to facilitate the generation of electrokinetic forces, such as dielectrophoresis or electro-wetting, in themicrofluidic device 360. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3A , thenest 300 can include a printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) 320. The electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can be mounted on and electrically integrated into thePCBA 320. The exemplary support includessocket 302 mounted onPCBA 320, as well. - Typically, the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 will include a waveform generator (not shown). The electrical signal generation subsystem 304 can further include an oscilloscope (not shown) and/or a waveform amplification circuit (not shown) configured to amplify a waveform received from the waveform generator. The oscilloscope, if present, can be configured to measure the waveform supplied to the
microfluidic device 360 held by thesocket 302. In certain embodiments, the oscilloscope measures the waveform at a location proximal to the microfluidic device 360 (and distal to the waveform generator), thus ensuring greater accuracy in measuring the waveform actually applied to the device. Data obtained from the oscilloscope measurement can be, for example, provided as feedback to the waveform generator, and the waveform generator can be configured to adjust its output based on such feedback. An example of a suitable combined waveform generator and oscilloscope is the Red Pitaya™ - In certain embodiments, the
nest 300 further comprises a controller 308, such as a microprocessor used to sense and/or control the electrical signal generation subsystem 304. Examples of suitable microprocessors include the Arduino™ microprocessors, such as the Arduino Nano™. The controller 308 may be used to perform functions and analysis or may communicate with an external master controller 154 (shown inFIG. 1 ) to perform functions and analysis. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 3A the controller 308 communicates with amaster controller 154 through an interface 310 (e.g., a plug or connector). - In some embodiments, the
nest 300 can comprise an electrical signal generation subsystem 304 comprising a Red Pitaya™ waveform generator/oscilloscope unit (“Red Pitaya unit”) and a waveform amplification circuit that amplifies the waveform generated by the Red Pitaya unit and passes the amplified voltage to themicrofluidic device 100. In some embodiments, the Red Pitaya unit is configured to measure the amplified voltage at themicrofluidic device 360 and then adjust its own output voltage as needed such that the measured voltage at themicrofluidic device 360 is the desired value. In some embodiments, the waveform amplification circuit can have a +6.5V to −6.5V power supply generated by a pair of DC-DC converters mounted on thePCBA 320, resulting in a signal of up to 13 Vpp at themicrofluidic device 100. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3A , thesupport structure 300 can further include athermal control subsystem 306. Thethermal control subsystem 306 can be configured to regulate the temperature ofmicrofluidic device 360 held by thesupport structure 300. For example, thethermal control subsystem 306 can include a Peltier thermoelectric device (not shown) and a cooling unit (not shown). The Peltier thermoelectric device can have a first surface configured to interface with at least one surface of themicrofluidic device 360. The cooling unit can be, for example, a cooling block (not shown), such as a liquid-cooled aluminum block. A second surface of the Peltier thermoelectric device (e.g., a surface opposite the first surface) can be configured to interface with a surface of such a cooling block. The cooling block can be connected to afluidic path 330 configured to circulate cooled fluid through the cooling block. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 3A , thesupport structure 300 comprises aninlet 332 and anoutlet 334 to receive cooled fluid from an external reservoir (not shown), introduce the cooled fluid into thefluidic path 330 and through the cooling block, and then return the cooled fluid to the external reservoir. In some embodiments, the Peltier thermoelectric device, the cooling unit, and/or thefluidic path 330 can be mounted on acasing 340 of thesupport structure 300. In some embodiments, thethermal control subsystem 306 is configured to regulate the temperature of the Peltier thermoelectric device so as to achieve a target temperature for themicrofluidic device 360. Temperature regulation of the Peltier thermoelectric device can be achieved, for example, by a thermoelectric power supply, such as a Pololu™ thermoelectric power supply (Pololu Robotics and Electronics Corp.). Thethermal control subsystem 306 can include a feedback circuit, such as a temperature value provided by an analog circuit. Alternatively, the feedback circuit can be provided by a digital circuit. - In some embodiments, the
nest 300 can include athermal control subsystem 306 with a feedback circuit that is an analog voltage divider circuit (shown inFIG. 3B ) which includes a resistor (e.g., withresistance 1 kOhm+/−0.1%, temperature coefficient +/−0.02 ppm/CO) and a NTC thermistor (e.g., withnominal resistance 1 kOhm+/−0.01%). In some instances, thethermal control subsystem 306 measures the voltage from the feedback circuit and then uses the calculated temperature value as input to an on-board PID control loop algorithm. Output from the PID control loop algorithm can drive, for example, both a directional and a pulse-width-modulated signal pin on a Pololu™ motor drive (not shown) to actuate the thermoelectric power supply, thereby controlling the Peltier thermoelectric device. - The
nest 300 can include aserial port 350 which allows the microprocessor of the controller 308 to communicate with anexternal master controller 154 via the interface 310. In addition, the microprocessor of the controller 308 can communicate (e.g., via a Plink tool (not shown)) with the electrical signal generation subsystem 304 andthermal control subsystem 306. Thus, via the combination of the controller 308, the interface 310, and theserial port 350, the electrical signal generation subsystem 308 and thethermal control subsystem 306 can communicate with theexternal master controller 154. In this manner, themaster controller 154 can, among other things, assist the electrical signal generation subsystem 308 by performing scaling calculations for output voltage adjustments. A Graphical User Interface (GUI), one example of which is shown inFIG. 3C , provided via adisplay device 170 coupled to theexternal master controller 154, can be configured to plot temperature and waveform data obtained from thethermal control subsystem 306 and the electrical signal generation subsystem 308, respectively. Alternatively, or in addition, the GUI can allow for updates to the controller 308, thethermal control subsystem 306, and the electrical signal generation subsystem 304. - As discussed above,
system 150 can include an imaging device 194. In some embodiments, the imaging device 194 comprises alight modulating subsystem 404. Thelight modulating subsystem 404 can include a digital mirror device (DMD), or a microshutter array system (MSA), either of which can be configured to receive light from alight source 402 and transmits a subset of the received light into an optical train ofmicroscope 400. Alternatively, thelight modulating subsystem 404 can include a device that produces its own light (and thus dispenses with the need for a light source 402), such as an organic light emitting diode display (OLED), a liquid crystal on silicon (LCOS) device, a ferroelectric liquid crystal on silicon device (FLCOS), or a transmissive liquid crystal display (LCD). Thelight modulating subsystem 404 can be, for example, a projector. Thus, thelight modulating subsystem 404 can be capable of emitting both structured and unstructured light. One example of a suitablelight modulating subsystem 404 is the Mosaic™ system from Andor Technologies™. In certain embodiments,imaging modole 164 and/or motive modole 162 ofsystem 150 can control thelight modulating subsystem 404. - In certain embodiments, the imaging device 194 further comprises a
microscope 400. In such embodiments, thenest 300 andlight modulating subsystem 404 can be individually configured to be mounted on themicroscope 400. Themicroscope 400 can be, for example, a standard research-grade light microscope or fluorescence microscope. Thus, thenest 300 can be configured to be mounted on the stage 410 of themicroscope 400 and/or thelight modulating subsystem 404 can be configured to mount on a port ofmicroscope 400. In other embodiments, thenest 300 and thelight modulating subsystem 404 described herein can be integral components ofmicroscope 400. - In certain embodiments, the
microscope 400 can further include one ormore detectors 422. In some embodiments, thedetector 422 is controlled by theimaging module 164. Thedetector 422 can include an eye piece, a charge-coupled device (CCD), a camera (e.g., a digital camera), or any combination thereof. If at least twodetectors 422 are present, one detector can be, for example, a fast-frame-rate camera while the other detector can be a high sensitivity camera. Furthermore, themicroscope 400 can include an optical train configured to receive reflected and/or emitted light from themicrofluidic device 360 and focus at least a portion of the reflected and/or emitted light on the one ormore detectors 422. The optical train of the microscope can also include different tube lenses (not shown) for the different detectors, such that the final magnification on each detector can be different. - In certain embodiments, imaging device 194 is configured to use at least two light sources. For example, a first
light source 402 can be used to produce structured light (e.g., via the light modulating subsystem 404) and a secondlight source 432 can be used to provide unstructured light. The firstlight source 402 can produce structured light for optically-actuated electrokinesis and/or fluorescent excitation, and the secondlight source 432 can be used to provide bright field illumination. In these embodiments, themotive modole 164 can be used to control the firstlight source 404 and theimaging modole 164 can be used to control the secondlight source 432. The optical train of themicroscope 400 can be configured to (1) receive structured light from thelight modulating subsystem 404 and focus the structured light on at least a first region in a microfluidic device, such as an optically-actuated electrokinetic device, when the device is being held by thesupport structure 200, and (2) receive reflected and/or emitted light from the microfluidic device and focus at least a portion of such reflected and/or emitted light ontodetector 422. The optical train can be further configured to receive unstructured light from a second light source and focus the unstructured light on at least a second region of the microfluidic device, when the device is held by thesupport structure 300. In certain embodiments, the first and second regions of the microfluidic device can be overlapping regions. For example, the first region can be a subset of the second region. - In
FIG. 3D , the firstlight source 402 is shown supplying light to alight modulating subsystem 404, which provides structured light to the optical train of themicroscope 400. The secondlight source 432 is shown providing unstructured light to the optical train via a beam splitter 436. Structured light from thelight modulating subsystem 404 and unstructured light from the secondlight source 432 travel from the beam splitter 436 through the optical train together to reach a second beam splitter 436 (ordichroic filter 406, depending on the light provided by the light modulating subsystem 404), where the light gets reflected down through the objective 408 to thesample plane 412. Reflected and/or emitted light from thesample plane 412 then travels back up through the objective 408, through the beam splitter and/ordichroic filter 406, and to adichroic filter 424. Only a fraction of the light reachingdichroic filter 424 passes through and reaches thedetector 422. - In some embodiments, the second
light source 432 emits blue light. With an appropriatedichroic filter 424, blue light reflected from thesample plane 412 is able to pass throughdichroic filter 424 and reach thedetector 422. In contrast, structured light coming from thelight modulating subsystem 404 gets reflected from thesample plane 412, but does not pass through thedichroic filter 424. In this example, thedichroic filter 424 is filtering out visible light having a wavelength longer than 495 nm. Such filtering out of the light from thelight modulating subsystem 404 would only be complete (as shown) if the light emitted from the light modulating subsystem did not include any wavelengths shorter than 495 nm. In practice, if the light coming from thelight modulating subsystem 404 includes wavelengths shorter than 495 nm (e.g., blue wavelengths), then some of the light from the light modulating subsystem would pass throughfilter 424 to reach thedetector 422. In such an embodiment, thefilter 424 acts to change the balance between the amount of light that reaches thedetector 422 from the firstlight source 402 and the secondlight source 432. This can be beneficial if the firstlight source 402 is significantly stronger than the secondlight source 432. In other embodiments, the secondlight source 432 can emit red light, and thedichroic filter 424 can filter out visible light other than red light (e.g., visible light having a wavelength shorter than 650 nm). -
FIG. 3E illustrates communications between the motive modole 164 and thelight modulating subsystem 404 to project patterns of light on a microfluidic device according to a specific embodiment of the invention. As discussed above with respect toFIG. 3D , thelight modulating subsystem 404 may comprise an electrically-addressed spatial light modulator and/or an optically-addressed spatial light modulator. Electrically-addressed spatial light modulators comprise an array of individually-addressable spatial light modulators that are controlled by electrodes. InFIG. 3E , thelight modulating subsystem 404 is a Digital Mirror Device (DMD) 460 comprising an array of individually-addressable micro-mirrors 464 hat are controlled by electrodes. However, in other embodiments, thelight modulating subsystem 404 can be a Liquid Crystal on Silicon (LCoS) device comprising an array of individually-addressable electrodes that correspond to pixels in a liquid crystal display. - In the embodiment illustrated in
FIG. 3E , thelight modulating subsystem 404 uses a separatelight source 440 to receive and modulate light. However, in other embodiments, thelight modulating subsystem 404 comprises its own light source. -
FIG. 3E illustrates communications between the motive modole 164 and thelight modulating subsystem 404 to project patterns of light on a microfluidic device according to a specific embodiment of the invention. As discussed above with respect toFIG. 3D , thelight modulating subsystem 404 may comprise an electrically-addressed spatial light modulator and/or an optically-addressed spatial light modulator. Electrically-addressed spatial light modulators comprise an array of individually-addressable spatial light modulators (i.e. spatial light modulating elements) that are controlled by electrodes. InFIG. 3E , thelight modulating subsystem 404 is a Digital Mirror Device (DMD) 460 comprising an array of individually-addressable micro-mirrors 464 that are controlled by electrodes. However, in other embodiments, thelight modulating subsystem 404 can be a Liquid Crystal on Silicon (LCoS) device comprising an array of individually-addressable electrodes that correspond to pixels in a liquid crystal display. - In the embodiment illustrated in
FIG. 3E , thelight modulating subsystem 404 uses a separatelight source 440 to receive and modulate light. However, in other embodiments, thelight modulating subsystem 404 comprises its own light source. - As illustrated in
FIG. 3E , themotive modole 162 transmitsinformation 450 specifying a specific pattern of light (“pattern information”) to thelight modulating subsystem 404. In some embodiments, thepattern information 450 can comprise a bitmap (or similar pixel-based data structure), vector data, or any combination thereof. For purposes of illustration, thepattern information 450 inFIG. 3E is illustrated as a bitmap comprising an array ofpixels 454 and including asquare pattern 452 of pixels. Depending on the embodiment, thepattern information 450 can be binary (i.e. specify whether or not to project a pattern of light) or contain values indicating an intensity of light to project. In instances where the spatial light modulators are micro-mirrors 464, themicro-mirrors 464 may create different intensities of light by rapidly switching the mirrors between an “on” and “off” state (i.e. “dithering” the micro-mirrors). - The
light modulating subsystem 404 receives thepattern information 450 from the motive modole 162 and uses thepattern information 450 to direct the projection of a pattern of light 468 ontoDEP electrode regions 474 on themicrofluidic device 470. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 3E , aDMD 460 rotates aplurality 462 of individually-addressable micro-mirrors 464 corresponding to thesquare pattern information 450 into an “on state.” The square pattern of individual-addressable micro-mirrors 462 modulates the light from thelight source 440 to project a pattern of light 468 onto themicrofluidic device 470 that illuminates a square pattern ofDEP electrode regions 472 in the array ofDEP electrode regions 474 in themicrofluidic device 470. - In some embodiments, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the array of individually-addressable spatial
light modulating elements 464 that project light onto themicrofluidic device 470 and the array ofDEP electrode regions 474 in themicrofluidic device 470. In this way, each individually-addressable spatiallight modulating element 464 can project light to generate light-actuated DEP force at a correspondingDEP electrode region 474. In these embodiments, themotive modole 162 can sendpattern information 450 to thelight modulating subsystem 404 that specifies theDEP electrode regions 474 to project light onto. For example, instead of sending bitmap and or vector data to thelight modulating subsystem 404, themotive modole 162 can communicate directly with the individually-addressable spatial light modulators to control which of theDEP electrode regions 474 are illuminated on themicrofluidic device 470. Once illuminated theDEP electrode regions 474 may exert OET or OEW force on surrounding micro-objects. - As discussed above, in some embodiments, the spatial
light modulating elements 464 can receivepattern information 450 specifying an intensity of light to project. In a specific embodiment, thepattern information 450 may specify a gradation of light to project over adjacentDEP electrode regions 474 in the microfluidic device. In some embodiments, thepattern information 450 may specify a gradation of light that decreases in intensity over adjacentDEP electrode regions 474. For example, thepattern information 450 may specify that about 100% of the maximum light intensity is to be projected at a firstDEP electrode region 474, that 70% of the maximum light intensity is to be projected at a secondDEP electrode region 474 adjacent to the firstDEP electrode region 474, and that 10% of the maximum light intensity is to be projected at a thirdDEP electrode region 474 adjacent to the secondDEP electrode region 474. Various combinations of light intensities may be used to project a gradation over various numbers of DEP electrode regions 474 (e.g. any decreasing combination of about 100%, about 90%, about 80%, about 70%, about 60%, about 50%, about 40%, about 30%, about 20%, and about 10%, and any values therebetween, of the maximum light intensity over any number of DEP electrode regions 474). Similarly, thepattern information 450 may specify a gradation of light that increases in intensity over any number ofDEP electrode regions 474 or a gradation of light that both increases and decreases in intensity over any number ofDEP electrode regions 474. - Aspects of the present disclosure are drawn to methods of isolating a cell nucleus using a microfluidic device, e.g., a microfluidic device as disclosed herein. The isolated cell nucleus (or multiple isolated cell nuclei) can be analyzed, processed, or further manipulated as desired. Such downstream actions may be performed within the microfluidic device or may be performed once the isolated cell nucleus is exported or otherwise harvested from the microfluidic device.
- In certain embodiments, a cell nucleus isolation method includes introducing a cell nucleus (or one or more cell nuclei) into a microfluidic device having a substrate configured to selectively generate forces that move micro-objects and then moving the cell nucleus to a desired location in the microfluidic device, thus isolating the cell nucleus. The cell nucleus is generally introduced into the microfluidic device in a fluid medium that preserves the integrity of the cell nucleus and is amenable for use in the microfluidic device for subsequent cell nucleus movement/isolation. Introducing the cell nucleus into the microfluidic device can be achieved by flowing a medium containing the cell nucleus into a flow region of the microfluidic device which is in fluid connection with at least one isolation region and moving said cell nucleus from the flow region to the isolation region. The flow region of the microfluidic device can include a flow channel (e.g.,
flow channel 122 ofFIGS. 1, 2E and 2F ), to which the isolation region is most immediately connected. The isolation region can be present in a sequestration pen of the microfluidic device (e.g.,isolation regions 258 in sequestration pens 244, 246, and 248 ofFIG. 2D ). The flow region (or flow channel) and the isolation region of the microfluidic device are configured such that the flow of medium/fluid through the flow region does not penetrate into the isolation region. Examples of microfluidic devices having such a configuration of are described in detail above (see e.g.,FIGS. 2D, 2E and 2F , and descriptions thereof). In certain embodiments, cell nuclei are introduced into the flow region of a microfluidic device through a port (e.g.,port 107 inFIG. 1 ) comprising a passage into theenclosure 102. Introducing cell nuclei into the microfluidic device is referred to herein as “loading” the nuclei onto the microfluidic device. - Once the cell nucleus/nuclei are in the flow region, the microfluidic device is controlled or manipulated, e.g., using the control module and control/monitoring equipment, to move the cell nucleus from the flow region to the first isolation region through selective application of one or more forces. Any of a number of different forces may be used alone or in combination to move a cell nucleus, including gravity, centrifugal force, magnetic force, fluid flow, or DEP forces (as detailed above). As such, in certain embodiments, moving said cell nucleus from the flow region to an isolation region comprises manipulating the micro-fluidic device such that a gravitational force acts upon the cell nucleus and moves it in a desired direction, e.g., pulls it into or toward the isolation region. Manipulating the microfluidic device may include tilting the device to impart the desired gravitational force. Centrifugal forces can be applied by rotating or centrifuging the device, while fluid can be flowed through swept regions of the device to move a cell nucleus, e.g., flowing from an inlet port to a flow channel or from a flow channel to an outlet port.
- In certain embodiments, DEP forces, such as OET forces, are used to move a cell nucleus to an isolation region in the microfluidic device. As described above, moving a cell nucleus thus can include generating DEP forces that direct a cell nucleus along a desired or pre-determined path, e.g., from a channel to an isolation region of a sequestration pen. The DEP forces may attract or repel the cell nucleus to achieve movement along the desired path. Generating DEP forces in the microfluidic device includes activating (e.g., optically activating) DEP electrodes located at the surface of the substrate of the microfluidic device. For example, the substrate of the microfluidic device can include a layer of amorphous silicon that exhibits increased conductivity at a desired position(s) by directing light to the position(s) on the substrate (e.g., visible light). In such embodiments, the DEP electrodes are referred to as virtual electrodes (as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,355 (now RE 44,711)). In additional embodiments, DEP electrodes can be phototransistors (e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,956,339). DEP electrodes may be controlled by a photo-actuated transistor (e.g., a CMOS chip design as described in US2014/0124370) or by an electrically-actuated transistor (e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,942,776). In many embodiments, each DEP electrode is controlled independently of the other DEP electrodes.
- In certain embodiments, EW forces, such as OEW forces, are used to move an aqueous droplet containing a cell nucleus to an isolation region in the microfluidic device. As described above, moving a cell nucleus thus can include generating EW forces that direct the droplet and a cell nucleus contained therein along a desired or pre-determined path, e.g., from a channel to an isolation region of a sequestration pen. The EW forces may attract the aqueous droplet (and cell nucleus) by creating a relative electrostatic attraction with the leading edge of the droplet to achieve movement along the desired path. Generating EW forces in the microfluidic device includes activating (e.g., optically activating) EW electrodes located beneath the dielectric layer of the substrate of the microfluidic device. For example, the substrate of the microfluidic device can include a layer of amorphous silicon that exhibits increased conductivity at a desired position(s) by directing light to the position(s) on the substrate (e.g., visible light). In such embodiments, the EW electrodes can be referred to as virtual electrodes, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,132 (Chiou et al.). Alternatively, the microfluidic device can have an EWOD configuration with selectively addressable and energizable electrodes, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,685,344 (Sundarsan et al.).
- Blocking solutions and blocking agents. Without intending to be limited by theory, after cells are lysed to release nuclei, the remaining nuclei may have excess matter (e.g. proteins and/or nucleic acid in the cytoplasm of the cell) present on the membranes of the nuclei that cause the nuclei to adhere or “stick” to the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device. In some embodiments, one or more of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device (e.g. the inner surface of the cover of the microfluidic device or the electrode activation substrate of the microfluidic device), are treated with a blocking solution and/or blocking agent to prevent or reduce nuclei adherence. In some embodiments, the cell nuclei are imported in a blocking solution that includes one or more blocking agents.
- In other embodiments, the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device (e.g., a DEP-configured microfluidic device) are pre-treated or “primed” with a blocking solution comprising a blocking agent prior to introduction of the cell nuclei. Any convenient blocking agent/blocking solution can be used, including but not limited to: serum or serum factors, bovine serum albumin (BSA), polymers, detergents, enzymes, and any combination thereof. In some specific embodiments, a blocking agent will be used to treat the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device. In one example, a polymer comprising alkylene ether moieties can be included as a blocking agent in the blocking solution. A wide variety of alkylene ether containing polymers may be suitable. One non-limiting exemplary class of alkylene ether containing polymers are amphiphilic nonionic block copolymers which include blocks of polyethylene oxide (PEO) and polypropylene oxide (PPO) subunits in differing ratios and locations within the polymer chain. Pluronic® polymers (BASF) are block copolymers of this type and are known in the art to be suitable for use when in contact with living cells. The polymers range in average molecular mass Mw from about 2000 Da to about 20 KDa. In some embodiments, the PEO-PPO block copolymer can have a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB) greater than about 10 (e.g. 12-18). Specific Pluronic® polymers useful for yielding a conditioned surface include Pluronic® L44, L64, P85, and F127 (including F127NF). Another class of alkylene ether containing polymers is polyethylene glycol (PEG Mw<100,000 Da) or alternatively polyethylene oxide (PEO, Mw>100,000). In some embodiments, a PEG may have an Mw of about 1000 Da, 5000 Da, 10,000 Da or 20,000 Da. In another example, DNase can be included in the blocking agent in a blocking solution to remove extranuclear DNA that might cause sticking to the substrate and/or walls of the microfluidic device.
- In some embodiments, a blocking solution can comprise various proteins and/or peptides as blocking agents. In a specific embodiment, a blocking solution that finds use in the present disclosure includes a protein such as albumin (e.g. BSA) and/or serum (or a combination of multiple different sera) comprising albumin and/or one or more other similar proteins as blocking agents. The serum can be from any convenient source, including but not limited to fetal calf serum, sheep serum, goat serum, horse serum, and the like. In certain embodiments, BSA in a blocking solution is present in a range of form about 1 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL, including 5 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 40 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL, 60 mg/mL, 70 mg/mL, 80 mg/mL, 90 mg/mL, or more or anywhere in between. In certain embodiments, serum in a blocking solution is present in a range of from about 20% (v/v) to about 50% v/v, including 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, or more or anywhere in between. In some embodiments, BSA is present as a blocking agent in a blocking solution at 5 mg/mL, whereas in other embodiments, BSA is present as a blocking agent in a blocking solution at 70 mg/mL. In certain embodiments, serum is present as a blocking agent in a blocking solution at 30%.
- Coating materials. Depending on the embodiment, any of the foregoing blocking agents/blocking solutions can be replaced by or used in combination with various coating materials used to coat one or more of the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device (e.g., a DEP-configured and/or EW-configured microfluidic device). In some embodiments, at least one surface of the microfluidic device includes a coating material that reducing surface fouling and/or prevents or reduces nuclei from sticking to the surface. In some embodiments, substantially all the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device include the coating material. The coated inner surface(s) may include the surface of a flow region (e.g., channel), chamber, or sequestration pen, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, each of a plurality of sequestration pens has at least one inner surface coated with coating materials. In other embodiments, each of a plurality of flow regions or channels has at least one inner surface coated with coating materials. In some embodiments, at least one inner surface of each of a plurality of sequestration pens and each of a plurality of channels is coated with coating materials.
- Polymer-based coating materials. The at least one inner surface may include a coating material that comprises a polymer. The polymer may be covalently or non-covalently bound (or linked) to the at least one surface. The polymer may have a variety of structural motifs, such as found in block polymers (and copolymers), star polymers (star copolymers), and graft or comb polymers (graft copolymers), all of which may be suitable for the methods disclosed herein.
- The polymer may include a polymer including alkylene ether moieties. A wide variety of alkylene ether containing polymers may be suitable for use in the microfluidic devices described herein. One non-limiting exemplary class of alkylene ether containing polymers are amphiphilic nonionic block copolymers which include blocks of polyethylene oxide (PEO) and polypropylene oxide (PPO) subunits in differing ratios and locations within the polymer chain. Pluronic® polymers (BASF) are block copolymers of this type and are known in the art to be suitable for use when in contact with living cells. The polymers range in average molecular mass Mw from about 2000 Da to about 20 KDa. In some embodiments, the PEO-PPO block copolymer can have a hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB) greater than about 10 (e.g. 12-18). Specific Pluronic® polymers useful for yielding a coated surface include Pluronic® L44, L64, P85, and F127 (including F127NF). Another class of alkylene ether containing polymers is polyethylene glycol (PEG Mw<100,000 Da) or alternatively polyethylene oxide (PEO, Mw>100,000). In some embodiments, a PEG may have an Mw of about 1000 Da, 5000 Da, 10,000 Da or 20,000 Da.
- In other embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing carboxylic acid moieties. The carboxylic acid subunit may be an alkyl, alkenyl or aromatic moiety containing subunit. One non-limiting example is polylactic acid (PLA).
- In other embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing sulfonic acid moieties. The sulfonic acid subunit may be an alkyl, alkenyl or aromatic moiety containing subunit. One non-limiting example is polystyrene sulfonic acid (PSSA) or polyanethole sulfonic acid. These latter exemplary polymers are polyelectrolytes and may alter the characteristics of the surface to deter nuclei sticking.
- In some embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing urethane moieties, such as, but not limited to polyurethane.
- In other embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing phosphate moieties, either at a terminus of the polymer backbone or pendant from the backbone of the polymer.
- In other embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing saccharide moieties. In a non-limiting example, polysaccharides such as those derived from algal or fungal polysaccharides such as xanthan gum or dextran may be suitable to form a material which may reduce or prevent nucleic sticking in the microfluidic device. For example, a dextran polymer having a size about 3 Kda may be used to provide a coating material for a surface within a microfluidic device.
- In other embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing nucleotide moieties, i.e. a nucleic acid, which may have ribonucleotide moieties or deoxyribonucleotide moieties. The nucleic acid may contain only natural nucleotide moieties or may contain unnatural nucleotide moieties which comprise nucleobase, ribose or phosphate moiety analogs such as 7-deazaadenine, pentose, methyl phosphonate or phosphorothioate moieties without limitation. A nucleic acid containing polymer may include a polyelectrolyte which may reduce or prevent nuclei sticking.
- In yet other embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing amino acid moieties. The polymer containing amino acid moieties may include a natural amino acid containing polymer or an unnatural amino acid containing polymer, either of which may include a peptide, a polypeptide or a protein. In one non-limiting example, the protein may be bovine serum albumin (BSA). In some embodiments, an extracellular matrix (ECM) protein may be provided within the coating material for optimized cell adhesion to foster cell growth. A cell matrix protein, which may be included in a coating material, can include, but is not limited to, a collagen, an elastin, an RGD-containing peptide (e.g. a fibronectin), or a laminin. In yet other embodiments, growth factors, cytokines, hormones or other cell signaling species may be provided within the coating material of the microfluidic device.
- In further embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer including amine moieties. The polyamino polymer may include a natural polyamine polymer or a synthetic polyamine polymer. Examples of natural polyamines include spermine, spermidine, and putrescine.
- In some embodiments, the coating material may include a polymer containing more than one of alkylene oxide moieties, carboxylic acid moieties, sulfonic acid moieties, phosphate moieties, saccharide moieties, nucleotide moieties, or amino acid moieties. In other embodiments, the polymer conditioned surface may include a mixture of more than one polymer each having alkylene oxide moieties, carboxylic acid moieties, sulfonic acid moieties, phosphate moieties, saccharide moieties, nucleotide moieties, and/or amino acid moieties, which may be independently or simultaneously incorporated into the coating material.
- Covalently linked coating materials. In some embodiments, the at least one inner surface includes covalently linked molecules that reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device. The covalently linked molecules include a linking group, wherein the linking group is covalently linked to a surface of the microfluidic device. The linking group is also covalently linked to a moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device. The surface to which the linking group links may include a surface of the substrate of the microfluidic device which, for embodiments in which the microfluidic device includes a DEP configuration, can include silicon and/or silicon dioxide. In some embodiments, the covalently linked coating materials coat substantially all of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device.
- In some embodiments, the covalently linked moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may include alkyl or fluoroalkyl (which includes perfluoroalkyl) moieties; mono- or polysaccharides (which may include but is not limited to dextran); alcohols (including but not limited to propargyl alcohol); polyalcohols, including but not limited to polyvinyl alcohol; alkylene ethers, including but not limited to polyethylene glycol; polyelectrolytes (including but not limited to polyacrylic acid or polyvinyl phosphonic acid); amino groups (including derivatives thereof, such as, but not limited to alkylated amines, hydroxyalkylated amino group, guanidinium, and heterocylic groups containing an unaromatized nitrogen ring atom, such as, but not limited to morpholinyl or piperazinyl); carboxylic acids including but not limited to propiolic acid (which may provide a carboxylate anionic surface); phosphonic acids, including but not limited to ethynyl phosphonic acid (which may provide a phosphonate anionic surface); sulfonate anions; carboxybetaines; sulfobetaines; sulfamic acids; or amino acids.
- The covalently linked moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may be any polymer as described herein, and may include one or more polymers containing alkylene oxide moieties, carboxylic acid moieties, saccharide moieties, sulfonic acid moieties, phosphate moieties, amino acid moieties, nucleic acid moieties, or amino moieties.
- In other embodiments, the covalently linked moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may include non-polymeric moieties such as an alkyl moiety, a substituted alkyl moiety, such as a fluoroalkyl moiety (including but not limited to a perfluoroalkyl moiety), amino acid moiety, alcohol moiety, amino moiety, carboxylic acid moiety, phosphonic acid moiety, sulfonic acid moiety, sulfamic acid moiety, or saccharide moiety.
- In some embodiments, the covalently linked moiety may be an alkyl group that comprises carbon atoms that form a linear chain (e.g., a linear chain of at least 10 carbons, or at least 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbons). Thus, the alkyl group may be an unbranched alkyl. In some embodiments, the alkyl group may include a substituted alkyl group (e.g., some of the carbons in the alkyl group can be fluorinated or perfluorinated). The alkyl group may comprise a linear chain of substituted (e.g., fluorinated or perfluorinated) carbons joined to a linear chain of non-substituted carbons. For example, the alkyl group may include a first segment, which may include a perfluoroalkyl group, joined to a second segment, which may include a non-substituted alkyl group. The first and second segments may be joined directly or indirectly (e.g., by means of an ether linkage). The first segment of the alkyl group may be located distal to the linking group, and the second segment of the alkyl group may be located proximal to the linking group. In other embodiment, the alkyl group may include a branched alkyl group and may further have one or more arylene group interrupting the alkyl backbone of the alkyl group. In some embodiments, a branched or arylene-interrupted portion of the alkyl or fluorinated alkyl group is located at a point distal to the linking group and the covalent linkage to the surface.
- In other embodiments, the covalently linked moiety may include at least one amino acid, which may include more than one type of amino acid. Thus, the covalently linked moiety may include a peptide or a protein. In some embodiments, the covalently linked moiety may include an amino acid which may provide a zwitterionic surface to support cell growth, viability, portability, or any combination thereof.
- The covalently linked moiety may include one or more saccharides. The covalently linked saccharides may be mono-, di-, or polysaccharides. The covalently linked saccharides may be modified to introduce a reactive pairing moiety which permits coupling or elaboration for attachment to the surface. Exemplary reactive pairing moieties may include aldehyde, alkyne or halo moieties. A polysaccharide may be modified in a random fashion, wherein each of the saccharide monomers may be modified or only a portion of the saccharide monomers within the polysaccharide are modified to provide a reactive pairing moiety that may be coupled directly or indirectly to a surface. One exemplar may include a dextran polysaccharide, which may be coupled indirectly to a surface via an unbranched linker.
- The covalently linked moiety may include one or more amino groups. The amino group may be a substituted amine moiety, guanidine moiety, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic moiety or heteroaryl moiety. The amino containing moieties may have structures permitting pH modification of the environment within the microfluidic device, and optionally, within the sequestration pens and/or flow regions (e.g., channels).
- The coating material may comprise only one kind of covalently linked moiety or may include more than one different kind of covalently linked moiety. For example, the fluoroalkyl conditioned surfaces (including perfluoroalkyl) may have a plurality of covalently linked moieties which are all the same, e.g., having the same linking group and covalent attachment to the surface, the same overall length, and the same number of fluoromethylene units comprising the fluoroalkyl moiety. Alternatively, the coating material may have more than one kind of covalently linked moiety attached to the surface. For example, the coating material may include molecules having covalently linked alkyl or fluoroalkyl moieties having a specified number of methylene or fluoromethylene units and may further include a further set of molecules having covalently charged moieties attached to an alkyl or fluoroalkyl chain having a greater number of methylene or fluoromethylene units. In some embodiments, the coating material having more than one kind of covalently linked moiety may be designed such that a first set of molecules which have a greater number of backbone atoms, and thus a greater length from the covalent attachment to the surface, may provide capacity to present bulkier moieties at the coated surface, while a second set of molecules having different, less sterically demanding termini and fewer backbone atoms can help to functionalize the entire substrate surface and thereby prevent undesired adhesion or contact with silicon or alumina making up the substrate itself. In another example, the covalently linked moieties may provide a zwitterionic surface presenting alternating charges in a random fashion on the surface.
- Conditioned surface properties. In some embodiments, the covalently linked moieties may form a monolayer when covalently linked to the surface of the microfluidic device (e.g., a DEP configured substrate surface). In some embodiments, the conditioned surface formed by the covalently linked moieties may have a thickness of less than 10 nm (e.g., less than 5 nm, or about 1.5 to 3.0 nm). In other embodiments, the conditioned surface formed by the covalently linked moieties may have a thickness of about 10 nm to about 50 nm. In some embodiments, the conditioned surface does not require a perfectly formed monolayer to be suitably functional for operation within a DEP-configured microfluidic device.
- In various embodiments, the coating material of the microfluidic device may provide desirable electrical properties. Without intending to be limited by theory, one factor that impacts robustness of a surface coated with a particular coating material is intrinsic charge trapping. Different coating materials may trap electrons, which can lead to breakdown of the coating material. Defects in the coating material may increase charge trapping and lead to further breakdown of the coating material. Similarly, different coating materials have different dielectric strengths (i.e. the minimum applied electric field that results in dielectric breakdown), which may impact charge trapping. In certain embodiments, the coating material can have an overall structure (e.g., a densely-packed monolayer structure) that reduces or limits that amount of charge trapping.
- Aside from the composition of the coating material, other factors such as physical (and electrical) thickness of the coating material can impact the generation of DEP force and/or electrowetting force by a substrate in a microfluidic device. Various factors can alter the physical and electrical thickness of the coating material, including the manner in which the coating material is deposited on the substrate (e.g. vapor deposition, liquid phase deposition, spin coating, or electrostatic coating). The physical thickness and uniformity of the coating material can be measured using an ellipsometer.
- Besides their electrical properties, the coating material may have properties that are beneficial in use with biological molecules. For example, coating materials that contain fluorinated (or perfluorinated) alkyl groups may provide a benefit relative to unsubstituted alkyl groups in reducing the amount of surface fouling. Surface fouling, as used herein, refers to the amount of material indiscriminately deposited on the surface of the microfluidic device, which may include permanent or semi-permanent deposition of biomaterials such as protein and degradation products, nucleic acids, and respective degradation products. Such fouling can increase the amount of adhesion of biological micro-objects to the surface.
- Various electrical and functional properties for different coating materials that can be used in microfluidic devices are included in the table below.
- Aside from the composition of the conditioned surface, other factors such as physical thickness of the hydrophobic material can impact DEP force. Various factors can alter the physical thickness of the conditioned surface, such as the manner in which the conditioned surface is formed on the substrate (e.g. vapor deposition, liquid phase deposition, spin coating, flooding, and electrostatic coating). The physical thickness and uniformity of the conditioned surface can be measured using an ellipsometer.
- In addition to its electrical properties, the conditioned surface may also have properties that are beneficial in use with biological molecules. For example, a conditioned surface that contains fluorinated (or perfluorinated) carbon chains may provide a benefit relative to alkyl-terminated chains in reducing the amount of surface fouling. Surface fouling, as used herein, refers to the amount of indiscriminate material deposition on the surface of the microfluidic device, which may include permanent or semi-permanent deposition of biomaterials such as protein and its degradation products, nucleic acids and respective degradation products and the like.
- Various properties for conditioned surfaces which may be used in DEP configurations are included in the table below. As can be seen, for
entries 1 to 7, which were all covalently linked conditioned surfaces as described herein, the thickness as measured by ellipsometry were consistently thinner than that of entry 8, a CYTOP surface which was formed by non-covalent spin coating (N/A represents data not available throughout the table). Fouling was found to be more dependent upon the chemical nature of the surface than upon the mode of formation as the fluorinated surfaces were typically less fouling than that of alkyl (hydrocarbon) conditioned surfaces. -
TABLE 1 Properties of various conditioned surfaces prepared by covalently modifying a surface, compared to CYTOP, a non-covalently formed surface. Surface modification type Formula of surface modifying reagent Thickness Fouling Alkyl terminated CH3—(CH2)15—Si—(OCH3)3 N/A More fouling than siloxane fluorinated layers. (C16) Alkyl terminated CH3—(CH2)17—Si—(OCH3)3 ~2 nm More fouling than siloxane fluorinated layers. (C18) Alkyl-terminated CH3—(CH2)17—P═O(OH)2 N/A More fouling than phosphonate ester fluorinated layers. C18PA Alkyl terminated CH3—(CH2)21—Si—(OCH2CH3)3 ~2-2.5 nm More fouling than siloxane fluorinated layers. (C22) Fluoro-alkyl- CF3—(CF2)7—(CH2)2—Si—(OCH3)3 ~1 nm More resistant to terminated alkyl- fouling than alkyl- siloxane terminated layers C10F Fluoro-alkyl- CF3—(CF2)13—(CH2)2—Si—(OCH3)3 ~2 nm More resistant to terminated alkyl- fouling than alkyl- siloxane terminated layers (C16F) Fluoro-alkyl- CF3—(CF2)5—(CH2)2—O—(CH2)11—Si(OCH3)3 ~2 nm N/A terminated alkoxy- alkyl-siloxane C6FC13 CYTOP ~30 nm More resistant to Fluoropolymer 1, 2 fouling than alkyl- terminated layers - Linking group to surface. The covalently linked moieties forming the coating material are attached to the surface via a linking group. The linking group may be a siloxy linking group formed by the reaction of a siloxane-containing reagent with oxides of the substrate surface, which can include silicon oxide (e.g., for a DEP-configured substrate) or aluminum oxide or hafnium oxide (e.g., for a EW-configured substrate). In some other embodiments, the linking group may be a phosphonate ester formed by the reaction of a phosphonic acid containing reagent with the oxides of the substrate surface.
- Multi-part conditioned surface. The covalently linked coating material may be formed by reaction of a molecule which already contains the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device (e.g., an alkyl siloxane reagent or a fluoro-substituted alkyl siloxane reagent, which may include a perfluoroalkyl siloxane reagent), as is described below. Alternatively, the covalently linked coating material may be formed by coupling the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to a surface modifying ligand that itself is covalently linked to the surface.
- Methods of preparing a covalently linked coating material. In some embodiments, a coating material that is covalently linked to the surface of a microfluidic device (e.g., including at least one surface of the sequestration pens and/or flow regions) has a structure of
Formula 1. - The coating material may be linked covalently to oxides of the surface of a DEP-configured substrate. The DEP-configured substrate may comprise silicon or alumina or hafnium oxide, and oxides may be present as part of the native chemical structure of the substrate or may be introduced as discussed below.
- The coating material may be attached to the oxides via a linking group (“LG”), which may be a siloxy or phosphonate ester group formed from the reaction of a siloxane or phosphonic acid group with the oxides. The moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device can be any of the moieties described herein. The linking group LG may be directly or indirectly connected to the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device. When the linking group LG is directly connected to the moiety, optional linker (“L”) is not present and n is 0. When the linking group LG is indirectly connected to the moiety, linker L is present and n is 1. The linker L may have a linear portion where a backbone of the linear portion may include 1 to 200 non-hydrogen atoms selected from any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art. It may be interrupted with any combination of one or more moieties selected from the group consisting of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L may include 10 to 20 atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone of the linker L may include about 5 atoms to about 200 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms; or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms. In some embodiments, the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art.
- When the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device is added to the surface of the substrate in a one step process, a molecule of
Formula 2 may be used to introduce the coating material: -
moiety−(L)n−LG.Formula 2 - In some embodiments, the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may be added to the surface of the substrate in a multi-step process. When the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking is coupled to the surface in a step wise fashion, the linker L may further include a coupling group CG, as shown in
Formula 3. - In some embodiments, the coupling group CG represents the resultant group from reaction of a reactive moiety Rx and a reactive pairing moiety Rpx (i.e., a moiety configured to react with the reactive moiety Rx). For example, one typical coupling group CG may include a carboxamidyl group, which is the result of the reaction of an amino group with a derivative of a carboxylic acid, such as an activated ester, an acid chloride or the like. Other CG may include a triazolylene group, a carboxamidyl, thioamidyl, an oxime, a mercaptyl, a disulfide, an ether, or alkenyl group, or any other suitable group that may be formed upon reaction of a reactive moiety with its respective reactive pairing moiety. The coupling group CG may be located at the second end (i.e., the end proximal to the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device) of a linker L. In some other embodiments, the coupling group CG may interrupt the backbone of the linker L. In some embodiments, the coupling group CG is triazolylene, which is the result of a reaction between an alkyne group and an azide group, either of which may be the reactive moiety Rx or the reactive pairing moiety Rpx, as is known in the art for use in Click coupling reactions. A triazolylene group may also be further substituted. For example, a dibenzocylcooctenyl fused triazolylene group may result from the reaction of a moiety bound to a dibenzocyclooctynyl reactive pairing moiety Rpx with an azido reactive moiety Rx of the surface modifying molecule, which are described in more detail in the following paragraphs. A variety of dibenzocyclooctynyl modified molecules are known in the art or may be synthesized to incorporate a moiety configured to support cell growth, viability, portability, or any combination thereof.
- When the coating material is formed in a multi-step process, the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device may be introduced by reaction of a moiety-containing reagent (Formula 5) with a substrate having a surface modifying ligand covalently linked thereto (Formula 6).
- The modified surface of Formula 4 has a surface modifying ligand attached thereto, which has a formula of -LG−(L″)j−Rx, which is linked to the oxide of the substrate and is formed similarly as described above for the conditioned surface of
Formula 1. The surface of the substrate can be a DEP-configured substrate surface as described above, and can include oxides either native to the substrate or introduced therein. The linking group LG is as described above. A linker L″ may be present (j=1) or absent (j=0). The linker L″ may have a linear portion where a backbone of the linear portion may include 1 to 100 non-hydrogen atoms selected from of any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art. It may be interrupted with any combination of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L″ may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L″ may include 10 to 20 carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone of the linker L″ may include about 5 atoms to about 100 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms, about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms, or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms. In some embodiments, the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art. - A reactive moiety Rx is present at the terminus of the surface modifying ligand distal to the covalent linkage of the surface modifying ligand with the surface. The reactive moiety Rx is any suitable reactive moiety useful for coupling reactions to introduce the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device. In some embodiments, the reactive moiety Rx may be an azido, amino, bromo, a thiol, an activated ester, a succinimidyl or alkynyl moiety.
- Moiety-containing reagent. The moiety-containing reagent (Formula 5) is configured to supply the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device.
-
Moiety−(L′)m−Rpx Formula 5 - The moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device of the moiety-containing reagent is linked to the surface modifying ligand by reaction of a reactive pairing moiety Rpx with the reactive moiety Rx. The reactive pairing moiety Rpx is any suitable reactive group configured to react with the respective reactive moiety Rx. In one non-limiting example, one suitable reactive pairing moiety Rpx may be an alkyne and the reactive moiety Rx may be an azide. The reactive pairing moiety Rpx may alternatively be an azide moiety and the respective reactive moiety Rx may be alkyne. In other embodiments, the reactive pairing moiety Rpx may be an active ester functionality and the reactive moiety Rx may be an amino group. In other embodiments, the reactive pairing moiety Rpx may be aldehyde and the reactive moiety Rx may be amino. Other reactive moiety-reactive pairing moiety combinations are possible, and these examples are in no way limiting.
- The moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device of the moiety-containing reagent of Formula 5 may include any of the moieties described herein, including alkyl or fluoroalkyl (which includes perfluoroalkyl) moieties; mono- or polysaccharides (which may include but is not limited to dextran); alcohols (including but not limited to propargyl alcohol); polyalcohols, including but not limited to polyvinyl alcohol; alkylene ethers, including but not limited to polyethylene glycol; polyelectrolytes (including but not limited to polyacrylic acid or polyvinyl phosphonic acid); amino groups (including derivatives thereof, such as, but not limited to alkylated amines, hydroxyalkylated amino group, guanidinium, and heterocylic groups containing an unaromatized nitrogen ring atom, such as, but not limited to morpholinyl or piperazinyl); carboxylic acids including but not limited to propiolic acid (which may provide a carboxylate anionic surface); phosphonic acids, including but not limited to ethynyl phosphonic acid (which may provide a phosphonate anionic surface); sulfonate anions; carboxybetaines; sulfobetaines; sulfamic acids; or amino acids.
- The moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking to the surface the microfluidic device of the moiety-containing reagent of Formula 5 may be directly connected (i.e., L′, where m=0) or indirectly connected to the reactive pairing moiety Rpx. When the reactive pairing moiety Rpx is connected indirectly to the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking, the reactive pairing moiety Rpx may be connected to a linker L′ (m=1). The reactive pairing moiety Rpx may be connected to a first end of the linker L′, and the moiety configured to reduce surface fouling and/or prevent or reduce nuclei sticking may be connected to a second end of the linker L′. Linker L′ may have a linear portion wherein a backbone of the linear portion includes 1 to 100 non-hydrogen atoms selected from of any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art. It may be interrupted with any combination of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L′ may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker L′. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L′ may include 10 to 20 atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone of the linker L′ may include about 5 atoms to about 100 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms; or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms. In some embodiments, the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art.
- When the moiety-containing reagent (Formula 5) reacts with the surface having a surface modifying ligand (Formula 3), a substrate having a conditioned surface of
Formula 2 is formed. Linker L′ and linker L″ then are formally part of linker L, and the reaction of the reactive pairing moiety Rpx with the reactive moiety Rx yields the coupling group CG ofFormula 2. - Surface modifying reagent. The surface modifying reagent is a compound having a structure LG−(L″)j−Rx (Formula 4). The linking group LG links covalently to the oxides of the surface of the substrate. The substrate may be a DEP-configured substrate and may include silicon or alumina or hafnium oxide, and oxides may be present as part of the native chemical structure of the substrate or may be introduced as discussed herein. The linking group LG may be any linking group described herein, such as a siloxy or phosphonate ester group, formed from the reaction of a siloxane or phosphonic acid group with the oxide on the surface of the substrate. The reactive moiety Rx is described above. The reactive moiety Rx may be connected directly (L″, j=0) or indirectly via a linker L″ (j=1) to the linking group LG. The linking group LG may be attached to a first end of the linker L″ and the reactive moiety Rx may be connected to a second end of the linker L″, which will be distal to the surface of the substrate once the surface modifying reagent has been attached to the surface as in Formula 6.
- Linker L″ may have a linear portion wherein a backbone of the linear portion includes 1 to 100 non-hydrogen atoms selected from of any combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus atoms. It may be interrupted with any combination of ether, amino, carbonyl, amido, or phosphonate groups, in some non-limiting examples. Additionally, the linker L″ may have one or more arylene, heteroarylene, or heterocyclic groups interrupting the backbone of the linker L″. In some embodiments, the backbone of the linker L″ may include 10 to 20 atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone of the linker L″ may include about 5 atoms to about 100 atoms; about 10 atoms to about 80 atoms, about 10 atoms to about 50 atoms, or about 10 atoms to about 40 atoms. In some embodiments, the backbone atoms are all carbon atoms. In other embodiments, the backbone atoms are not all carbons, and may include any possible combination of silicon, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus atoms, subject to chemical bonding limitations as is known in the art.
- In some embodiments, the coating material (or surface modifying ligand) is deposited on the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device using chemical vapor deposition. Through chemical vapor deposition, the coating material can achieve densely-packed monolayers in which the molecules comprising the coating material are covalently bonded to the molecules of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device. To achieve a desirable packing density, molecules comprising, for example, alkyl-terminated siloxane can be vapor deposited at a temperature of at least 110° C. (e.g., at least 120° C., 130° C., 140° C., 150° C., 160° C., etc.), for a period of at least 15 hours (e.g., at least 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or more hours). Such vapor deposition is typically performed under vacuum and in the presence of a water source, such as a hydrated sulfate salt (e.g., MgSO4.7H20). Typically, increasing the temperature and duration of the vapor deposition produces improved characteristics of the hydrophobic coating material.
- The vapor deposition process can be optionally improved, for example, by pre-cleaning the
cover 110, themicrofluidic circuit material 116, and/or the substrate (e.g., theinner surface 208 of theelectrode activation substrate 206 of a DEP-configured substrate, or a dielectric layer of thesupport structure 104 of an EW-configured substrate). For example, such pre-cleaning can include a solvent bath, such as an acetone bath, an ethanol bath, or a combination thereof. The solvent bath can include sonication. Alternatively, or in addition, such pre-cleaning can include treating thecover 110, themicrofluidic circuit material 116, and/or the substrate in an oxygen plasma cleaner, which can remove various impurities, while at the same time introducing an oxidized surface (e.g. oxides at the surface, which may be covalently modified as described herein). The oxygen plasma cleaner can be operated, for example, under vacuum conditions, at 100 W for 60 seconds. Alternatively, liquid-phase treatments, which include oxidizing agents such as hydrogen peroxide to oxidize the surface, may be used in place of an oxygen plasma cleaner. For example, a mixture of hydrochloric acid and hydrogen peroxide or a mixture of sulfuric acid and hydrogen peroxide (e.g., piranha solution, which may have a ratio of sulfuric acid to hydrogen peroxide in a range from about 3:1 to about 7:1) may be used in place of an oxygen plasma cleaner. - In some embodiments, vapor deposition is used to coat the inner surfaces of the
microfluidic device 200 after themicrofluidic device 200 has been assembled to form anenclosure 102 defining amicrofluidic circuit 120. Deposition of a coating material comprising a densely-packed monolayer on a fully-assembledmicrofluidic circuit 120 may be beneficial in providing various functional properties. Without intending to be limited by theory, depositing such a coating material on a fully-assembledmicrofluidic circuit 120 may be beneficial in preventing delamination caused by a weakened bond between themicrofluidic circuit material 116 and theelectrode activation substrate 206/dielectric layer and/or thecover 110. -
FIGS. 4A-4D depict cross-sectional views ofmicrofluidic devices 500 comprising exemplary classes of coating materials. As illustrated, the coating materials 529 (shown schematically) can comprise a monolayer of densely-packed molecules covalently bound to both theinner surface 508 of thesubstrate 504 and theinner surface 509 of thecover 510 of themicrofluidic device 500. Thecoating material 529 can be disposed on allinner surfaces enclosure 502 of themicrofluidic device 500, including, in some embodiments and as discussed above, the surfaces of microfluidic circuit material (not shown) used to define circuit elements and/or structures within themicrofluidic device 500. In alternate embodiments, thecoating material 529 can be disposed on only one or some of the inner surfaces of themicrofluidic device 500. - In the embodiment shown in
FIG. 4A , thecoating material 529 comprises a monolayer of alkyl-terminated siloxane molecules, each molecule covalently bonded to theinner surfaces microfluidic device 500 via a siloxy group. However, any of the above-discussedcoating materials 529 can be used (e.g. alkyl-terminated phosphonate ester molecules). More specifically, the alkyl group can comprise a linear chain of at least 10 carbon atoms (e.g. 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, or more carbon atoms) and, optionally, may be a substituted alkyl group. As discussed above, coatingmaterials 529 that comprise a monolayer of densely-packed molecules can have beneficial functional characteristics for use in DEP configuredmicrofluidic devices 500, such as minimal charge trapping, reduced physical/electrical thickness, and a substantially uniform surface. - In some embodiments, the
coating material 529 used to coat the inner surface(s) 508, 509 of themicrofluidic device 500 provides a functional benefit of reducing nuclei adhesion. In a specific embodiment, thecoating material 529 can comprise a fluoroalkyl group (e.g. a fluorinated alkyl group or a perfluorinated alkyl group) at its enclosure-facing terminus (i.e. the portion of the monolayer of thecoating material 529 that is not bound to theinner surfaces coating material 529 can comprise a monolayer of fluoroalkyl-terminated siloxane or fluoroalkyl-terminated phosphonate ester, wherein the fluoroalkyl group is present at the enclosure-facing terminus of thecoating material 529. Such acoating material 529 provides a functional benefit in reduced fouling and, more generally, reduced adhesion of biological molecules such as those present on the outer membranes of nuclei. - In some embodiments, the
coating material 529 used to coat theinner surfaces microfluidic device 500 provides a functional benefit in presenting one or more moieties that can bind a blocking agent in a blocking solution. Depending on the embodiment, thecoating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified (e.g. by reaction) to present a moiety comprising a cation (“cationic moiety”) (e.g. a quaternary ammonium group) at its enclosure-facing terminus. In some embodiments, thecoating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified to present a moiety comprising an anion (“anionic moiety”), such as a phosphonic acid, carboxylic acid, or sulfonic acid moiety, at its enclosure-facing terminus. In some embodiments thecoating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified to present a mixture of cations and anions at its enclosure-facing termini. -
FIG. 4B provides a schematic illustration of a specific embodiment where the monolayer ofcoating material 529 comprises or has been chemically modified to present a mixture ofmoieties 532 comprising cations (represented with a “+”) and anions (represented with a “−”) at the enclosure-facing termini of its alkyl groups. Without intending to be limited by theory, by presenting both cationic and anionic moieties proximal to theenclosure 502 of themicrofluidic circuit 500, thecoating material 529 can form strong hydrogen bonds with water molecules such that the resulting water of hydration acts as a layer (or “shield”) that separates the nuclei from interactions with non-biological molecules (e.g., the silicon and/or silicon oxide of the substrate). In addition, in embodiments in which thecoating material 529 is used in conjunction with blocking agents, the anions and cations of thecoating material 529 can form ionic bonds with the charged portions of blocking agents (e.g. proteins in solution) that are present in a medium 180 (e.g. a blocking solution) in theenclosure 502. -
FIG. 4C illustrates an embodiment ofFIG. 4B in which the monolayer ofcoating material 529 comprising anionic and cationic moieties is used to bind ablocking agent 542. As illustrated inFIG. 4C , the charged portions (i.e. the regions of the blockingagent 542 that present cations and/or anions) of the blockingagent 542 form ionic bonds with both the cationic moieties and the anionic moieties in thecoating material 529. Providing that thenuclei 552 within theenclosure 502 do not bind to the blockingagent 542, the presence of the blockingagent 542 at the surface of thecoating material 529 will prevent thenuclei 552 from adhering to theinner surfaces microfluidic device 500. - In some embodiments, the
coating material 529 may comprise or be chemically modified to present a moiety comprising a zwitterion (“zwitterionic moiety”) at its enclosure-facing terminus. Non-limiting examples of zwitterionic moieties include: carboxybetaines, sulfobetaines, sulfamic acids, and amino acids.FIG. 4D illustrates an embodiment in which thecoating material 529 comprises zwitterionic moieties. Similar to the discussion relating to cation and anion moieties, the zwitterionic moieties can form strong hydrogen bonds with water molecules such that the resulting water of hydration acts as a layer (or “shield”) that separates the nuclei from interactions with non-biological molecules (e.g., the silicon and/or silicon oxide of the substrate). In addition, as illustrated inFIG. 4D , the zwitterionic moieties can also form ionic bonds with the charged portions of a blockingagent 542. As discussed in regard toFIG. 4C , the binding of the blockingagent 542 to the zwitterionic moieties can help prevent thenuclei 552 from adhering to theinner surfaces microfluidic device 500. - In some embodiments, the coating material may comprise or be chemically modified to present a blocking agent at its enclosure-facing terminus. In some embodiments, the blocking agent may be an alkylene ether containing polymer, such as PEG. In some embodiments, the blocking agent may be a polysaccharide, such as dextran.
- By ensuring that the nuclei do not adhere to the
inner surfaces microfluidic device 500,nuclei 552 may be repositioned using DEP force (e.g. OET force) and/or fluid flow in themicrofluidic device 500. Such repositioning can be prior to and/or after the selection of nuclei based on specific characteristics. For example,individual nuclei 552 may be repositioned to sequestration pens or other areas of themicrofluidic device 500 using DEP force and then assayed (or otherwise analyzed) for a characteristic used to select the nuclei. Similarly,individual nuclei 552 may be exported from sequestration pens or other areas of the microfluidic device using DEP force so that they can be further analyzed. - Selection and Repositioning of Nuclei. In some embodiments, one or more characteristics can be used to identify a
cell nucleus 552 of interest that is to be selected, e.g., a cell nucleus having a pre-determined or pre-specified characteristic. The selected cell nucleus can then be repositioned for further analysis. The one or more characteristics can include any detectable characteristic of the cell nucleus, including morphological characteristics (e.g. size, shape, etc.), color of the cell nucleus, and/or fluorescent or visible light absorption/emission characteristics (e.g., associated with a marker, such as a fluorescently labeled marker). - In some embodiments, a cell nucleus/nuclei are contacted (i.e. “labelled”) with a detectable binding agent that is specific for a cell nucleus target (or analyte) of interest (which can be on the surface of or inside the cell nucleus). For example, a cell nucleus/nuclei can be labelled with a detectable binding agent (e.g., a stain, fluorescently-labeled antibodies, or the like) to distinguish nuclei originating from different types of cells or to distinguish nuclei from other micro-objects in a sample. In some embodiments, labelling can be performed prior to introducing the nuclei into the microfluidic device. In some embodiments, labelling can be performed after introducing nuclei into the microfluidic device (e.g., after moving the nuclei into the flow region or into an isolation region in a sequestration pen). Detectable binding agents including any agent that binds to a target/analyte and that can be detected in the microfluidic device. Non limiting examples of binding agents include polypeptides (e.g., antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof, ligands, receptors, virus particles), polynucleotides (e.g., DNA probes, RNA probes, hybrid DNA/RNA probes, probes containing non-naturally occurring backbone linkages, e.g., PNA, and the like), polysaccharides, small molecules, and the like. In many embodiments, such binding agents include a target specific binding region attached to detectable label, e.g., a fluorescent label, where the attaching can be covalent or non-covalent (e.g., using a binding pair, e.g., biotin/streptavidin). Further, the cell nuclei may include gene products that are detectable without the need for contacting them with a specific binding agent, e.g., fluorescent proteins or enzymes with detectable activity on a natural or synthetic substrate that produces a detectable product. No limitation in this regard is intended.
- Depending on the embodiment, one or more nuclei can be selected based on a combination of morphological characteristics (e.g. size and shape) and characteristics associated with a detectable binding agent or a detectable gene product (e.g. a quantity or intensity of a detectable binding agent or a detectable gene product). For example, nuclei of anaplastic cancer cells are both larger and contain more nucleic acid than nuclei from non-cancerous cells and may be identified based on a combination of size and the intensity of a detectable binding agent that binds nucleic acid. In some embodiments, nuclei may be selected automatically based on a combination of pre-specified characteristics.
- In some embodiments, the characteristic(s) used to select nuclei may be identified using machine learning algorithms. In these embodiments, an individual may annotate nuclei that belong to a specific class of nuclei and one or more machine learning algorithms may be used to computationally identify one or more characteristics that distinguish the class of nuclei from nuclei that don't belong to the same class. For example, a pathologist could annotate several nuclei that belong to the same class of nuclei and a machine learning algorithm could be applied to an image of the annotated nuclei (or a set of features generated from an image of the annotated nuclei) to determine specific characteristics that distinguish (or a combination of characteristics that distinguish) the class of annotated nuclei from other nuclei. Suitable machine learning algorithms for this purpose include support vector machines (SVMs), neural networks (e.g. convolutional neural networks (CNNs)), and Bayesian networks. Other machine learning algorithms are known in the art.
- In certain embodiments, the microfluidic device comprises a plurality of sequestration pens in fluid connection with the flow channel, where each sequestration pen of the plurality has a corresponding isolation region. Such configurations allow for the isolation and selection of many distinct individual nuclei or distinct populations or “classes” of nuclei. Thus, in some embodiments the flow medium introduced into the microfluidic device includes a plurality of cell nuclei (from one or more cell sources) and includes moving each of the plurality of cell nuclei into a corresponding isolation region of a sequestration pen. In some embodiments, only one cell nucleus is moved to an isolation region of a sequestration pen, while in other embodiments, multiple cell nuclei are moved to an isolation region of a sequestration pen. It is to be understood that any number of nuclei may be moved into each different isolation regions of the plurality of sequestration pen. Thus, once the cell nuclei are isolated in the microfluidic device, any given sequestration pen may include no cell nucleus, one cell nucleus, or multiple cell nuclei. No limitation in this regard is intended. For example, in some embodiments, the plurality of cell nuclei may be isolated and selected in any type of chamber or other holding area of the microfluidic device.
- Where a plurality of cell nuclei are being isolated, and where the microfluidic device includes a plurality of sequestration pens, the method can include selecting a first sub-set of cell nuclei from the plurality of cell nuclei that have a first predetermined characteristic, and moving the selected first sub-set of cell nuclei to the corresponding isolation region(s) of a first plurality of sequestration pens in the microfluidic device. In some embodiments, a second sub-set of cell nuclei from the plurality of cell nuclei that have a second predetermined characteristic can be selected and moved to the corresponding isolation region(s) of a second plurality of sequestration pens in the microfluidic device. It is noted here that a predetermined characteristic can be a positive characteristic, e.g., binding of a particular binding agent, or a negative characteristic, e.g., not binding to a particular binding agent.
- Once a cell nucleus is isolated, it can be employed in any downstream analysis or process of interest and/or stored (e.g., frozen) for future use. The analysis may be done while the nuclei are within the microfluidic device or after removal/export of the cell nuclei.
- In some embodiments, a microfluidic device (or microchip) containing the isolated cell nuclei in the isolation region of the sequestration pens can be stored in any convenient manner such that the cell nuclei, or the components thereof, are maintained in a state that is amenable to a desired downstream process or analysis. For example, the microchip can be frozen to provide for storage of isolated cell nuclei. This process may include replacing the fluid in the microfluidic device with a storage buffer or removing the fluid.
- In certain embodiments, one or more of the isolated cell nuclei are exported from the micro-fluidic device prior to performing a subsequent analysis or process. This process may include the use of any number of different forces, e.g., gravitational force, magnetic force, centrifugal force, DEP force (as detailed above), to move the cell nuclei out of the isolation region and into a flow region where the cell nuclei can be exported from the device through an outlet port. In some embodiments, DEP force is used to move single cell nuclei out of the sequestration pens or other areas of the microfluidic device in which they are located, thereby allowing for cell nuclei to be exported individually. In other embodiments, the export process might include disassembling the microfluidic device to retrieve the cell nuclei or opening a previously closed outlet port in communication with the isolation region of a sequestration pen which converts the isolation region from an unswept region to a swept region. Flowing a fluidic medium through the isolation region of the sequestration pen will move the cell nuclei through the outlet port thereby exporting the cell nuclei from the device. It is noted that in some situations, the cell nuclei may not need to be exported intact for downstream analysis or processing, and thus the nuclei can be disrupted and the subsequent cell nuclei contents retrieved (e.g., as a sample of proteins, nucleic acids, etc.). No limitation in this regard is intended.
- Any desired cell nucleus or population of cell nuclei may be employed in the disclosed methods. As such, the cell nuclei can be derived from any nucleated cell (or eukaryotic cell) including nuclei derived from fungi, plants, protists, animals, etc. In many embodiments, cell nuclei are derived from a mammal, e.g., a human. Moreover, the cell nuclei can be from any type of sample having nucleated cells from a desired source. Thus, the cell nuclei can be obtained from fresh/live/viable cells (e.g., cells isolated from a fresh tissue sample or cells that have been grown in a medium ex vivo) or from cells that may be non-viable or compromised in some way (e.g., cells recently thawed from a previously frozen biopsy sample or chemically fixed cells). The nuclei can be separated from the plasma membranes, cytoplasm, and extracellular proteins and components using any convenient techniques known in the art.
- In certain embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from cells that are part of a particular tissue of a multicellular organism. When the cells are derived from an animal, such tissues include, but are not limited to: epithelial cell types (e.g., neuronal cell types, epidermal cells, cochlear hair cells, or the like), mesodermal cell types (e.g., muscle, fat, bone marrow, blood, or the like), endodermal cell types (e.g., intestinal cells or the like), blood cells (e.g., B cells, T cells, NK cells, macrophages), or tissues exhibiting a disease phenotype (e.g., cancer cells, inflamed cells, cells infected with a bacterial, fungal, protozoan, or viral pathogen).
- For certain cell types, isolation of the cell nucleus may be preferable due to the impracticalities of isolating cells in their intact form. For example, certain cell types of interest may be in a tissue that is not amenable to dissociation and/or have a morphology that prevents efficient isolation procedures. One example is neuronal cells, which have morphological characteristics (e.g., dendrites and axons) that pose significant difficulty for efficient isolation.
- In some embodiments, the cell nuclei are derived from a cancer cell or a cell suspected of being a cancer cell, e.g., from the affected tissue of a subject diagnosed with a cancer. Non-limiting examples of cancers in affected tissues include: breast cancer, large intestinal cancer, lung cancer, small lung cancer, stomach cancer, liver cancer, blood cancer, bone cancer, pancreatic cancer, skin cancer, head or neck cancer, cutaneous or intraocular melanoma, uterine sarcoma, ovarian cancer, rectal or colorectal cancer, anal cancer, colon cancer, fallopian tube carcinoma, endometrial carcinoma, cervical cancer, vulval cancer, vaginal carcinoma, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, esophageal cancer, small intestine cancer, endocrine cancer, thyroid cancer, parathyroid cancer, adrenal cancer, chronic or acute leukemia, soft tissue tumor, urethral cancer, penile cancer, prostate cancer, lymphocytic lymphoma, bladder carcinoma, kidney cancer, ureter cancer, renal carcinoma, renal pelvic carcinoma, CNS tumor, primary CNS lymphoma, bone marrow tumor, brain stem nerve gliomas, pituitary adenoma, testicular cancer, oral cancer, pharyngeal cancer, and uveal melanoma.
- In some embodiments, the cell from which a cell nucleus is derived has been enriched, isolated, sorted, or otherwise manipulated prior to harvesting the cell nuclei. Any convenient method may be employed to achieve this, including but not limited to: antibody or binding agent-based methods (e.g., fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS), magnetic activated cell sorting (MACS), panning, and the like), apheresis, centrifugation, elutriation, density gradient centrifugation, differential cell lysis protocols, differential growth medium and/or growth scaffolds, physical isolation (e.g., a clinical biopsy sample), etc. No limitation in this regard is intended.
- Certain embodiments of the disclosed methods include harvesting one or more cell nuclei from one or more cells in a sample prior to introducing them into the microfluidic device for isolation. Any convenient cell nuclei isolation process may be employed, and generally will be dictated by the cell type from which the cell nucleus is being harvested as well as the state of the cells, e.g., whether the cells are in a viable or non-viable state. In general, harvesting cell nuclei can include any one or more of the following process steps: disrupting the cytoplasmic membrane and/or cell wall of a cell to release the cell nucleus/nuclei; contacting the cell nuclei with an enzyme (e.g., DNAse, collagenase, hyaluronidase); contacting the cell nuclei with a chelating agent (e.g., EDTA); washing the released cell nucleus/nuclei to remove cellular debris and cytoplasmic components; and placing the harvested cell nucleus/nuclei in a medium compatible with maintaining the cell nucleus/nuclei in a state that is conducive for isolation in a microfluidic device (e.g., a medium with one or more buffers and/or blocking agents, e.g., BSA, serum, polymers, detergents).
- In certain embodiment, the cells from which the nuclei are derived are non-viable cells. In one example, cells derived from a formalin fixed paraffin embedded (FFPE) sample are processed to obtain a cell nuclei-containing sample that can be introduced into the microfluidic device. FFPE samples can be processed to obtain nuclei using any convenient protocol, including those described in PCT publication WO 2013123463 Al (which includes de-waxing and rehydrating steps, hereby incorporate by reference herein).
- The isolated cell nuclei can be used in any desired analysis or process. It is noted that while one or more assays/processes can be performed after isolation of the cell nucleus, in certain embodiments, the analysis is performed before/during the isolation step, e.g., when the detection of a particular predetermined characteristic of a cell nucleus is used to select and move the cell to an isolation region of a sequestration pen.
- In certain embodiments, the isolated cell nuclei can be used to determine a genetic characteristic or analyze gene expression (either quantitatively or qualitatively). Any convenient genetic assay may be used, including those in which the cell nuclei are kept substantially intact, e.g., fluorescent in-situ hybridization (FISH), or those in which the cell nuclei are disrupted. It is noted that the analyses may be performed on an individual isolated cell nucleus or on one or more desired populations of isolated cell nuclei. Such analyses may also be done to compare one or more genetic characteristics between a first isolated cell nucleus/population of nuclei and a second isolated cell nucleus/population of nuclei. In some embodiments, the analyses is done to compare one or more genetic characteristic of one or more isolated cell nucleus/population of nuclei and a reference or control, e.g., the sequence of a gene known to be associated with a particular phenotype, e.g., a disease phenotype.
- In certain embodiments, genetic analysis includes extracting nucleic acids from the isolated cell nucleus/nuclei, either DNA, RNA or both, and performing one or more genetic analysis tests on the extracted nucleic acids. Extracting the nucleic acids from the isolated cell nuclei can be achieved in any convenient manner. For example, the nuclei can be lysed/disrupted and the nucleic acids recovered using nucleic acid-binding beads or other reagents. In some embodiments, specific target nucleic acids are recovered, e.g., RNA, DNA, or specific sequences of interest, e.g., from a gene of interest or a genomic region of interest. The nuclei acids extracted from the isolated nuclei can be fragmented, e.g., by physical means or using nucleases, e.g., restriction enzymes. The extracted nuclei acids may be replicated, amplified, or reverse transcribed as desired and can be attached to adapters having functional sequences that can be used in downstream analysis, e.g., primer binding sites, barcodes, restriction enzyme sites, recombination sites, etc. In some embodiments, nucleic acids may be extracted and analyzed in a portion of the microfluidic device that is configured for electrowetting or opto-electrowetting (OEW).
- Examples of the types of results that can be obtained include: copy number of a genetic region, a mutation (e.g., a somatic cell or inherited mutation), a duplication, a single nucleotide polymorphism, an insertion, an inversion, a nucleic acid modification, a chromosomal feature, a difference compared to a reference nucleic acid sample, epigenetic variation, gene expression (e.g., mRNA levels), and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments the genetic assay includes one or more of: nucleic acid sequencing analysis (e.g., whole genome or specific markers, such as disease markers), nucleic acid hybridization analysis, amplification reactions (e.g., PCR, RTPCR, linear amplification, etc.), and the like.
- In certain embodiment, the cell nuclei, either before or after isolation, can be analyzed for a predetermined characteristic such as a marker or physical property of interest. Such markers/properties can be used to determine the type of cell from which the nucleus was derived and/or a phenotypic state of the cell, e.g., a disease phenotype. For example, cancer cells often have nuclei that are different in size and/or shape than normal cells. Thus, visual markers can be used to select nuclei of interest. In addition, the internal structure of cancer nuclei often differs from that of normal cells. Thus, staining for nuclear proteins (e.g., lamins A or B), nuclear membrane proteins (e.g., nuclear lamina-associated proteins, such as emerin), fibrillarin, nuclear pore proteins (NUPs, such as Nup153, Nup210, etc.), histone proteins, nuclear matrix proteins (e.g., p84) can highlight differences in nuclear structure. See, e.g., Cancer Biology and the Nuclear envelope: Recent advances may elucidate past paradoxes; Springer 2014; Eric C. Schirmer and Jose de las Heras (eds.) (hereby incorporated herein by reference) for a description of how the nuclear envelope and nuclear morphology can be used in the diagnosis of disease in a subject, including cancer. There are some cell-type specific markers that are found on or in nuclei that can be used to identify nuclei originating from a cell type of interest. Transcription factors are a common cell-type specific marker, but they can also include related proteins that bind and/or splice RNA (such as NeuN, the marker used in the example below). Additional structural characteristics can also be analyzed, including chromatin structure (e.g., related to histone binding), chromosomal configuration, size, shape, etc.
- In certain embodiments, the isolated nuclei are used for functional studies, such as nuclear transfer for cloning, as suggested in US 20040148648; Kim J and Zaret K S, Reprogramming of human cancer cells to pluripotency for models of cancer progression. EMBO J. 2015 Mar. 12; 34(6):739-747; and Tamada H, Kikyo N, Nuclear reprogramming in mammalian somatic cell nuclear cloning. Cytogenet Genome Res. 2004; 105(2-4):285-91.
-
FIG. 5 illustrates various steps performed to select nuclei in a microfluidic device according to some embodiments of the present invention. As discussed below and as can be appreciated by those skilled in the art, only some of the steps may be performed and the steps may be performed in a different order than shown. In addition, some or all of the steps discussed below may be automated. - At
step 502, a plurality of cells are lysed to extract a plurality of nuclei. As discussed above, any type of cell comprising a nucleus can be lysed. In some instances, the plurality of cells are a homogeneous population of cells (i.e. the cells are all the same type of cell). In some instances, the cells are a heterogeneous population of cells. For example, a blood sample from a subject with cancer may comprise circulating tumor cells, white blood cells and red blood cells. Similarly, a fine needle aspirate (“FNA”) tumor sample derived from a patient may contain blood cells and tissue cells as well as tumor cells. - Depending on the embodiment and the functionality required, a number of different lysing agents may be used to lyse the cells and extract the nuclei. In some embodiments, a non-ionic detergent is used to perform cell lysis. In a specific embodiment, a one to ten percent solution of Trition X-100 is used to perform cell lysis. In another embodiment, a one to ten percent solution of NP40 is used to perform cell lysis. In some embodiments, a hypotonic buffer is used to perform cell lysis. In a specific embodiment, double distilled water (“ddH20”) is used to lyse the cells. In some embodiments, a hypotonic buffer is combined with a weak detergent to lyse the cells.
- In most embodiments, the nuclei will be lysed outside of the microfluidic device (“off-chip”), prior to importing the nuclei into the microfluidic device. As discussed above, off-chip lysis is beneficial because many cell types are difficult to manipulate within the microfluidic device. However, in other embodiments, it may be beneficial to load cells on the microfluidic device and perform lysis within the microfluidic device.
- At
step 504, the microfluidic device is optionally primed with the blocking agent and/or blocking solution prior to loading cells/nuclei onto the chip. In some embodiments, the microfluidic device may be primed with a blocking agent and/or blocking solution that is provided to the microfluidic device for a duration of time (i.e. perfused throughout a microfluidic circuit of the microfluidic device for a duration of time). As discussed above, in some embodiments, a blocking agent can bind to the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device and thus block nuclei adhesion to one or more of the inner surfaces of the microfluidic device. In alternate embodiments, the microfluidic device is not primed with the blocking agent and/or blocking solution, but instead, the blocking agent and/or blocking solution is provided to the microfluidic device at the same time as the nuclei are loaded into the microfluidic device. In other embodiments, the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device can comprise a covalently bound coating material, which can be any of the coating materials described herein. In still other embodiments, the inner surface(s) of the microfluidic device can comprise a covalently bound coating material that is bound to blocking agent and/or blocking solution (e.g., via hydrogen bonds and/or ionic bonds). - At
step 506, the nuclei are loaded into the microfluidic device. As discussed above the nuclei may be introduced to the microfluidic device by providing the nuclei in a flow of medium, by using other forces (e.g. gravity) to load the nuclei, or by using a combination of a flow of medium and other forces. - At
step 508, the nuclei are repositioned within the microfluidic device. Depending on the embodiment, the nuclei can be repositioned using any kind of force (e.g. gravity). In some embodiments, the nuclei can be repositioned using OET force. In some embodiments, the nuclei may be automatically repositioned into specific areas of the microfluidic device (e.g. sequestration pens or holding areas). In some embodiments, the nuclei may be automatically identified prior to repositioning the nuclei. Methods of automatically identifying and repositioning micro-objects such as nuclei are discussed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/963,230, the entirety of which is herein incorporated by reference. - At
step 510, the nuclei are optionally provided (i.e. labelled with) a selective binding agent that is used to determine one or more characteristics of some or all of the nuclei (e.g. amount of DNA in the nuclei, the cell type of the nuclei, etc.). As discussed above, the nuclei can be contacted with the selective binding agent at any time (e.g., prior to loading the nuclei on the chip, prior to repositioning the nuclei on the chip, or after repositioning the nuclei on chip but before further repositioning of the nuclei). - At
step 512, the nuclei are selected based on one or more characteristics of the nuclei. As discussed above, the nuclei may be selected based on characteristics such as the morphology of the nuclei or characteristics based on the selective binding agent (e.g. the intensity of the selective binding agent). Similarly, the characteristics used to select the nuclei may be identified through machine learning techniques. - At
step 514, the selected nuclei are optionally repositioned for further analysis (e.g. additional assays, DNA sequence analysis). In some embodiments, the selected nuclei may be repositioned from a flow region, such as a channel, into a sequestration pen. In other embodiments, the selected nuclei may be repositioned into a channel for export and analysis. In other embodiments, the selected nuclei may be transferred from a first sequestration pen to a second sequestration pen. In still other embodiments, the selected nuclei may be repositioned from a flow region (e.g., channel) or sequestration pen, either or both of which may have a dielectrophoresis (DEP) configuration, to an area or portion of the same microfluidic device having an electrowetting (EW) or opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration or a different device having an an electrowetting (EW) or opto-electrowetting (OEW) configuration. The repositioning can involve using dielectrophoretic force to move the nuclei. In a specific embodiment, nuclei that have been repositioned to a flow region, such as a channel, may be further repositioned (e.g., exported) by providing a flow of medium in the channel. - The following examples are put forth so as to provide those of ordinary skill in the art with disclosure and description of how to make and use the present invention, and are not intended to limit the scope of what the inventors regard as their invention nor are they intended to represent that the experiments below are all or the only experiments performed. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect to numbers used (e.g. amounts, temperature, etc.) but some experimental errors and deviations should be accounted for. Unless indicated otherwise, parts are parts by weight, molecular weight is weight average molecular weight, temperature is in degrees Centigrade, and pressure is at or near atmospheric.
- A microfluidic device (Berkeley Lights™), having a single flow region with four parallel flow channels and approximately 1000 sequestrations pens, was flushed with 100% CO2, then primed with priming medium (i.e., Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS) +5mg/m1 BSA +0.1% Pluronic F127).
- Human brain tissue was snap frozen and dissected on dry ice. Small pieces of this human brain tissue was thawed, as needed, and homogenized to obtain cell nuclei.
- The nuclei were incubated with NeuN-specific antibody labeled with Alexa 485 to allow detection in the device using fluorescence emission (FITC channel). Following the incubation, stained nuclei were pelleted by centrifugation, the resulting supernatant was removed, and the stained nuclei were resuspended in blocking buffer containing Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS)+5mg/ml BSA+30% Goat Serum+1.0% Pluronic® F127 +200 U/ml DNAse. Stained nuclei were incubated in blocking buffer for 15 minutes, then flowed into the microfluidic device in the same buffer.
- Once in the flow channels of the microfluidic device, stained neural nuclei were detected using the FITC channel. The observed neural nuclei were 5-10 μm in diameter. Individual neural nuclei were selected and moved into the isolation regions of sequestration pens using OET (see
FIG. 5 ). OET was performed with a 10× microscope objective, at a voltage of 8V ppk (peak-to-peak) and a frequency of 1000 kHz. - After a sufficient number of neural nuclei were sequestered in the sequestration pens, the flow channels were flushed with priming medium supplemented with 30% goat serum to remove unwanted cell nuclei and other debris. After flushing the flow channels, select nuclei were moved out of their sequestration pens and into their corresponding flow channel using OET (
FIG. 6 ), whereupon they were individually exported (by fluidic flow) from the microfluidic device into wells of a micro-titer plate. The OET was performed with the same settings used for loading nuclei into the sequestration pens and a 30 micron OET bar (seeFIG. 6 ). - It was observed that 50%-60% of nuclei could be successfully moved and exported. In contrast, in the absence of 30% goat serum, cell nuclei imported into the microfluidic device settled on the surface of the flow channel and became immovable stuck.
- Exported nuclei were subject to DNA sequencing.
- A microfluidic device (Berkeley Lights™), having a single flow region with four parallel flow channels and approximately 1000 sequestration pens, is flushed with 100% CO2, then primed with priming medium (i.e., Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS)+70 mg/ml BSA+1.0% Pluronic F127).
- Human brain tissue is snap frozen and dissected on dry ice. Small pieces of this human brain tissue is thawed, as needed, and homogenized to obtain cell nuclei.
- The nuclei are incubated with NeuN-specific antibody labeled with Alexa 485 to allow detection in the device using fluorescence emission (FITC channel). Following the incubation, stained nuclei are pelleted by centrifugation, the resulting supernatant is removed, and the stained nuclei are resuspended in blocking buffer containing Dubelco's PBS with Magnesium Chloride and Calcium Chloride (DPBS)+70 mg/ml BSA+1.0% Pluronic® F127 +200 U/ml DNAse. Stained nuclei are incubated in blocking buffer for 15 minutes, then flowed into the microfluidic device in the same buffer.
- Once in the flow channels of the microfluidic device, stained neural nuclei are detected using the FITC channel. Individual neural nuclei are selected and moved into the isolation regions of sequestration pens using OET. OET is performed with a 10× microscope objective, at a voltage of 8V ppk (peak-to-peak) and a frequency of 1000 kHz.
- After a sufficient number of neural nuclei are sequestered in the sequestration pens, the flow channels are flushed with priming medium supplemented with 30% goat serum to remove unwanted cell nuclei and other debris. After flushing the flow channels, select nuclei are moved out of their sequestration pens and into their corresponding flow channel using OET, whereupon they are individually exported (by fluidic flow) from the microfluidic device into wells of a micro-titer plate. The OET is performed with the same settings used for loading nuclei into the sequestration pens and a 30 micron OET bar.
- Exported nuclei can be subject to DNA sequencing or other downstream analyses/processes as desired.
- Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it is readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.
- Accordingly, the preceding merely illustrates the principles of the invention. It will be appreciated that those skilled in the art will be able to devise various arrangements which, although not explicitly described or shown herein, embody the principles of the invention and are included within its spirit and scope. Furthermore, all examples and conditional language recited herein are principally intended to aid the reader in understanding the principles of the invention and the concepts contributed by the inventors to furthering the art, and are to be construed as being without limitation to such specifically recited examples and conditions. Moreover, all statements herein reciting principles, aspects, and embodiments of the invention as well as specific examples thereof, are intended to encompass both structural and functional equivalents thereof. Additionally, it is intended that such equivalents include both currently known equivalents and equivalents developed in the future, i.e., any elements developed that perform the same function, regardless of structure. The scope of the present invention, therefore, is not intended to be limited to the exemplary embodiments shown and described herein. Rather, the scope and spirit of present invention is embodied by the appended claims.
Claims (34)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US16/121,398 US20190064038A1 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2018-09-04 | Manipulation of Cell Nuclei in a Micro-Fluidic Device |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201562151334P | 2015-04-22 | 2015-04-22 | |
US15/136,763 US10101250B2 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2016-04-22 | Manipulation of cell nuclei in a micro-fluidic device |
US16/121,398 US20190064038A1 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2018-09-04 | Manipulation of Cell Nuclei in a Micro-Fluidic Device |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/136,763 Division US10101250B2 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2016-04-22 | Manipulation of cell nuclei in a micro-fluidic device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20190064038A1 true US20190064038A1 (en) | 2019-02-28 |
Family
ID=55910420
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/136,763 Active 2036-05-03 US10101250B2 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2016-04-22 | Manipulation of cell nuclei in a micro-fluidic device |
US16/121,398 Abandoned US20190064038A1 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2018-09-04 | Manipulation of Cell Nuclei in a Micro-Fluidic Device |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/136,763 Active 2036-05-03 US10101250B2 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2016-04-22 | Manipulation of cell nuclei in a micro-fluidic device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US10101250B2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2016172623A1 (en) |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US10954511B2 (en) | 2017-06-06 | 2021-03-23 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform for improving fungal strains |
US11028401B2 (en) | 2018-06-06 | 2021-06-08 | Zymergen Inc. | Manipulation of genes involved in signal transduction to control fungal morphology during fermentation and production |
US11479779B2 (en) | 2020-07-31 | 2022-10-25 | Zymergen Inc. | Systems and methods for high-throughput automated strain generation for non-sporulating fungi |
Families Citing this family (19)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9744533B2 (en) * | 2014-12-10 | 2017-08-29 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Movement and selection of micro-objects in a microfluidic apparatus |
US11666913B2 (en) * | 2015-11-23 | 2023-06-06 | Berkeley Lights, Inc | In situ-generated microfluidic isolation structures, kits and methods of use thereof |
CN115354025A (en) * | 2016-03-17 | 2022-11-18 | 伯克利之光生命科技公司 | Selection and cloning of T lymphocytes in microfluidic devices |
NL2017705B1 (en) * | 2016-11-02 | 2018-05-18 | Lumicks Tech B V | Method and system for studying biological cells |
WO2018111765A1 (en) | 2016-12-12 | 2018-06-21 | xCella Biosciences, Inc. | Methods and systems for screening using microcapillary arrays |
JP6990713B2 (en) | 2017-04-14 | 2022-01-12 | ヴェンタナ メディカル システムズ, インク. | Separation based on the size of the dissociated fixative |
US10408852B2 (en) | 2017-04-26 | 2019-09-10 | Lawrence Livermore National Security, Llc | Automated control of microfluidic devices based on machine learning |
JPWO2018199080A1 (en) * | 2017-04-28 | 2020-03-12 | シンクサイト株式会社 | Imaging flow cytometer |
WO2019017875A1 (en) * | 2017-07-17 | 2019-01-24 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Dielectrophoresis separators with cell ejection devices |
CN107190097B (en) * | 2017-07-26 | 2021-04-30 | 贵州大学 | Method for identifying pitaya germplasm by utilizing SSR molecular marker of transcriptome sequencing |
US11332736B2 (en) | 2017-12-07 | 2022-05-17 | The Broad Institute, Inc. | Methods and compositions for multiplexing single cell and single nuclei sequencing |
WO2019217099A1 (en) * | 2018-05-08 | 2019-11-14 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Droplet-based single cell genomic dna sequencing |
CN112204380A (en) * | 2018-05-31 | 2021-01-08 | 伯克利之光生命科技公司 | Automatic detection and characterization of micro-objects in microfluidic devices |
CN110168364B (en) | 2019-03-27 | 2021-02-05 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Biological detection chip, biological detection device and detection method thereof |
US11807842B2 (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2023-11-07 | Biopico Systems Inc | Fluidic array systems and testing for cells, organoids, and organ cultures |
GB202008014D0 (en) * | 2020-05-28 | 2020-07-15 | Lightcast Discovery Ltd | Improvements in or relating to a device and method for dispensing a droplet |
US11893327B2 (en) * | 2020-12-14 | 2024-02-06 | Xerox Corporation | System and method for machine-learning enabled micro-assembly control with the aid of a digital computer |
US11921488B2 (en) | 2020-12-15 | 2024-03-05 | Xerox Corporation | System and method for machine-learning-enabled micro-object density distribution control with the aid of a digital computer |
CN113634293B (en) * | 2021-08-09 | 2023-02-28 | 复旦大学 | Light-operated all-inorganic EWOD device |
Family Cites Families (61)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP4034351B2 (en) | 1996-04-25 | 2008-01-16 | バイオアレイ ソリューションズ エルエルシー | Light-controlled electrokinetic assembly of particle-proximal surfaces |
US6294063B1 (en) | 1999-02-12 | 2001-09-25 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Method and apparatus for programmable fluidic processing |
US6942776B2 (en) | 1999-05-18 | 2005-09-13 | Silicon Biosystems S.R.L. | Method and apparatus for the manipulation of particles by means of dielectrophoresis |
ATE290166T1 (en) | 1999-06-28 | 2005-03-15 | California Inst Of Techn | ELASTIC MICROPUMP OR MICROVALVE SYSTEM |
EP1254215A1 (en) * | 1999-09-14 | 2002-11-06 | Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. | Microfabrication of a nuclear transfer array for high-throughput animal cloning |
US20030007894A1 (en) | 2001-04-27 | 2003-01-09 | Genoptix | Methods and apparatus for use of optical forces for identification, characterization and/or sorting of particles |
US6685812B2 (en) | 2001-01-09 | 2004-02-03 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Movement of particles using sequentially activated dielectrophoretic particle trapping |
ITTO20010411A1 (en) | 2001-05-02 | 2002-11-02 | Silicon Biosystems S R L | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE EXECUTION OF TESTS AND TESTS WITH HIGH PROCESSIVITY AND HIGH BIOLOGICAL VALUE ON CELLS AND / OR COMPOUNDS. |
US7312085B2 (en) | 2002-04-01 | 2007-12-25 | Fluidigm Corporation | Microfluidic particle-analysis systems |
US6958132B2 (en) | 2002-05-31 | 2005-10-25 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Systems and methods for optical actuation of microfluidics based on opto-electrowetting |
GB2394912B (en) * | 2002-11-01 | 2006-07-12 | Norchip As | A microfabricated fluidic device for fragmentation |
US20040148648A1 (en) | 2002-12-10 | 2004-07-29 | Esmail Behboodi | Method and system for utilizing somatic cell nuclear transfer embryos as cell donors for additional nuclear transfer |
JP4328168B2 (en) | 2003-10-02 | 2009-09-09 | ソニー株式会社 | Detection unit for interaction between substances using capillary phenomenon, method using the detection unit, and substrate for bioassay |
WO2005072399A2 (en) | 2004-01-29 | 2005-08-11 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Microscale sorting cytometer |
WO2005080606A1 (en) | 2004-02-18 | 2005-09-01 | Xiaochuan Zhou | Fluidic devices and methods for multiplex chemical and biochemical reactions |
WO2005100541A2 (en) | 2004-04-12 | 2005-10-27 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Optoelectronic tweezers for microparticle and cell manipulation |
US20060091015A1 (en) | 2004-11-01 | 2006-05-04 | Applera Corporation | Surface modification for non-specific adsorption of biological material |
GB0508983D0 (en) * | 2005-05-03 | 2005-06-08 | Oxford Gene Tech Ip Ltd | Cell analyser |
TWI265864B (en) * | 2005-05-20 | 2006-11-11 | Univ Nat Cheng Kung | Hydrophilic surface structure of non-hydrophilic substrate and fabricating method for the same |
US8475886B2 (en) | 2005-08-05 | 2013-07-02 | Corning Incorporated | Methods for producing surfaces that resist non-specific protein binding and cell attachment |
WO2007024701A2 (en) | 2005-08-19 | 2007-03-01 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Microfluidic methods for diagnostics and cellular analysis |
EP1951742A4 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2011-06-01 | Life Technologies Corp | Optoelectronic separation of biomolecules |
WO2007120829A2 (en) | 2006-04-14 | 2007-10-25 | The General Hospital Corporation | Methods for the cryopreservation of mammalian cells |
US8980198B2 (en) | 2006-04-18 | 2015-03-17 | Advanced Liquid Logic, Inc. | Filler fluids for droplet operations |
WO2008091848A2 (en) | 2007-01-22 | 2008-07-31 | Advanced Liquid Logic, Inc. | Surface assisted fluid loading and droplet dispensing |
WO2008119066A1 (en) | 2007-03-28 | 2008-10-02 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Single-sided lateral-field and phototransistor-based optoelectronic tweezers |
ATE554859T1 (en) | 2007-05-24 | 2012-05-15 | Univ California | INTEGRATED FLUIDIC DEVICES WITH MAGNETIC SORTING |
EP2279238A2 (en) | 2008-04-21 | 2011-02-02 | Cell Kinetics, Ltd. | Flat cell carriers with cell traps |
FR2933315B1 (en) | 2008-07-07 | 2012-02-10 | Commissariat Energie Atomique | MICROFLUIDIC DEVICE FOR DISPLACING LIQUID |
EP2315848B1 (en) * | 2008-07-18 | 2014-12-10 | Canon U.S. Life Sciences, Inc. | Methods and systems for microfluidic dna sample preparation |
EP2414539B1 (en) | 2009-04-03 | 2020-12-16 | The Regents of The University of California | Apparatus and method for sorting cells and other biological particulates |
WO2010147942A1 (en) | 2009-06-16 | 2010-12-23 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Multiphase non-linear electrokinetic devices |
JP2011000079A (en) | 2009-06-19 | 2011-01-06 | Univ Of Tokyo | Method for operating particle and micro fluid device |
EP2316565A1 (en) | 2009-10-26 | 2011-05-04 | Fei Company | A micro-reactor for observing particles in a fluid |
EP2578674A4 (en) | 2010-05-26 | 2014-04-30 | Tosoh Corp | Biological-sample affixing device |
CN101947124B (en) | 2010-06-25 | 2012-07-04 | 博奥生物有限公司 | Integrated microfluidic chip device and using method thereof |
US9533306B2 (en) | 2010-08-02 | 2017-01-03 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Single sided continuous optoelectrowetting (SCEOW) device for droplet manipulation with light patterns |
WO2012037030A2 (en) | 2010-09-14 | 2012-03-22 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Method and device for isolating cells from heterogeneous solution using microfluidic trapping vortices |
ES2641524T3 (en) | 2010-12-03 | 2017-11-10 | Cellply S.R.L. | Microanalysis of cellular function |
EP2646830B1 (en) | 2010-12-03 | 2016-04-13 | Cellply S.R.L. | Rapid screening of monoclonal antibodies |
WO2012109068A2 (en) | 2011-02-11 | 2012-08-16 | Corning Incorporated | Enzyme cleavable cell release polymeric surface |
RU2548619C1 (en) * | 2011-03-08 | 2015-04-20 | Японское Агентство По Науке И Технике | Method of sealing granules, method of detecting target molecule, array, kit and device for detecting target molecule |
WO2012162779A1 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2012-12-06 | The University Of British Columbia | Microfluidic cell trap and assay apparatus for high-throughput analysis |
US9227200B2 (en) | 2011-06-03 | 2016-01-05 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Microfluidic devices with flexible optically transparent electrodes |
CA2842359A1 (en) | 2011-08-01 | 2013-02-07 | Denovo Sciences | Cell capture system and method of use |
US9663826B2 (en) | 2012-02-15 | 2017-05-30 | The Translational Genomics Research Institute | System and method of genomic profiling |
US20130302884A1 (en) | 2012-02-29 | 2013-11-14 | Fluidigm Corporation | Methods, systems and devices for multiple single-cell capturing and processing using microfluidics |
US9857333B2 (en) | 2012-10-31 | 2018-01-02 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Pens for biological micro-objects |
US9403172B2 (en) | 2012-11-08 | 2016-08-02 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Circuit based optoelectronic tweezers |
CA2906231A1 (en) | 2013-03-28 | 2014-10-02 | Marketa RICICOVA | Microfluidic devices and methods for use thereof in multicellular assays of secretion |
KR102113990B1 (en) | 2013-10-22 | 2020-05-25 | 버클리 라잇츠, 인크. | Micro-fluidic devices for assaying biological activity |
AU2014340089B2 (en) | 2013-10-22 | 2019-09-26 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Microfluidic devices having isolation pens and methods of testing biological micro-objects with same |
US9889445B2 (en) | 2013-10-22 | 2018-02-13 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Micro-fluidic devices for assaying biological activity |
US20150166326A1 (en) | 2013-12-18 | 2015-06-18 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Capturing Specific Nucleic Acid Materials From Individual Biological Cells In A Micro-Fluidic Device |
US20150306598A1 (en) | 2014-04-25 | 2015-10-29 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | DEP Force Control And Electrowetting Control In Different Sections Of The Same Microfluidic Apparatus |
SG11201608499XA (en) | 2014-04-25 | 2016-11-29 | Berkeley Lights Inc | Providing dep manipulation devices and controllable electrowetting devices in the same microfluidic apparatus |
US20150306599A1 (en) | 2014-04-25 | 2015-10-29 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Providing DEP Manipulation Devices And Controllable Electrowetting Devices In The Same Microfluidic Apparatus |
SG10201900567QA (en) | 2014-12-08 | 2019-02-27 | Berkeley Lights Inc | Microfluidic device comprising lateral/vertical transistor structures and process of making and using same |
US9996920B2 (en) | 2014-12-09 | 2018-06-12 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Automated detection and repositioning of micro-objects in microfluidic devices |
US10384204B2 (en) | 2014-12-10 | 2019-08-20 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Systems for operating electrokinetic devices |
US10723988B2 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2020-07-28 | Berkeley Lights, Inc. | Microfluidic cell culture |
-
2016
- 2016-04-22 US US15/136,763 patent/US10101250B2/en active Active
- 2016-04-22 WO PCT/US2016/029037 patent/WO2016172623A1/en active Application Filing
-
2018
- 2018-09-04 US US16/121,398 patent/US20190064038A1/en not_active Abandoned
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US10954511B2 (en) | 2017-06-06 | 2021-03-23 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform for improving fungal strains |
US11180753B2 (en) | 2017-06-06 | 2021-11-23 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform for improving fungal strains |
US11242524B2 (en) | 2017-06-06 | 2022-02-08 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform for improving fungal strains |
US11028401B2 (en) | 2018-06-06 | 2021-06-08 | Zymergen Inc. | Manipulation of genes involved in signal transduction to control fungal morphology during fermentation and production |
US11299741B2 (en) | 2018-06-06 | 2022-04-12 | Zymergen Inc. | Manipulation of genes involved in signal transduction to control fungal morphology during fermentation and production |
US11479779B2 (en) | 2020-07-31 | 2022-10-25 | Zymergen Inc. | Systems and methods for high-throughput automated strain generation for non-sporulating fungi |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
WO2016172623A1 (en) | 2016-10-27 |
US20160370266A1 (en) | 2016-12-22 |
US10101250B2 (en) | 2018-10-16 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10101250B2 (en) | Manipulation of cell nuclei in a micro-fluidic device | |
US11454629B2 (en) | In situ-generated microfluidic assay structures, related kits, and methods of use thereof | |
US11666912B2 (en) | Sorting of T lymphocytes in a microfluidic device | |
US11376591B2 (en) | Light sequencing and patterns for dielectrophoretic transport | |
EP3430131B1 (en) | Selection and cloning of t lymphocytes in a microfluidic device | |
IL293366B2 (en) | Kits and methods for preparing microfluidic devices for cell culture | |
US10751715B1 (en) | Microfluidic reporter cell assay methods and kits thereof | |
AU2017239666B2 (en) | Nucleic acid stabilization reagent, kits, and methods of use thereof | |
US20200115680A1 (en) | Selection and Cloning of T Lymphocytes in a Microfluidic Device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: BERKELEY LIGHTS, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:WHITE, MARK P.;LOWE, RANDALL D., JR.;SIGNING DATES FROM 20160621 TO 20160627;REEL/FRAME:049915/0889 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: PHENOMEX INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:BERKELEY LIGHTS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:064961/0794 Effective date: 20230321 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: BRUKER CELLULAR ANALYSIS, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: MERGER AND CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNORS:PHENOMEX INC.;BIRD MERGERSUB CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:065726/0624 Effective date: 20231002 |